HomeMy WebLinkAboutProject Manuel FELLOWSHIP CHURCH
THE NEXT STEP PROJECT
1001 COLGATE DRIVE
COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
DESIGN BUILDER:
COLLIER CONSTRUCTION
FELLOWSHIP CHURCH
P.O. BOX 1889
BRENHAM, TX 77835
THE NEXT STEP PROJECT PH. 979-836-4477
ARCHITECT:
BURCH GROUP ARCHITECTS
P.O. BOX 1889
• El �4BRENHAM, TX 77835
C +
ties...qR '+ 1
•• N E. VS/ PH. 979-836-4477
IF
••• y CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
t+ . ••••••• _ ENGINEER:
t++ OF 1N.• CME TESTING AND
i�s‘~"'• ENGINEERING, INC
320 GRAHAM RD.
COLLEGE STATION, TX 77845
PH. 979.690.3600
MAY 15, 2014
BURCH GROUP ARCHITECTS MEP ENGINEER:
PROJECT NO.: 1314 H.M. MCLEOD, P.E.
5213 CALLE CORDOBA
HOUSTON, TX 77007
P H. 713-806-1646
BURCH GROUP
ARCHITECTS
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS CIVIL
WORK
PREPARED FOR:
FELLOWSHIP CHURCH
NEXT STEP PROJECT
w
� P.• •.
'se
j *: A :* �/
M.F. CONLIN, JR. /
j 13�-PF 44481 <4.•4/i
sr
firW
t% ONAL S/ E�Gw
MAY 15, 2014
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
ENGINEER:
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC
320 GRAHAM RD.
COLLEGE STATION, TX 77845
PH. 979.690.3600
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS
AA Request for Proposals 1-2
AB Instructions to Proposers 1-5
AC Proposal Form 1-4
AI Waiver, Release and Indemnity Agreement 1-2
AJ Owner Site Rules 1
IL CONTRACT FORMS
CB Supplementary Conditions 1-11
HI. SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section
01005 Code Summary 1-2
01010 Summary of Work 1
01020 Allowances 1-2
01030 Alternates 1-3
01092 Abbreviations and Symbols 1-4
01200 Project Meetings 1-4
01300 Submittals 1-6
01310 Construction Schedule 1
01420 Notification of Architect Requirements 1-2
01501 Temporary Facilities 1-3
01530 Tree Protection, Preservation and Treatment 1-3
01710 Guarantees and Certificates and Close-Out 1-2
DIVISION 2 -SITE WORK
02010 Geotechnical Report 1
02011 Subsurface Investigation 1
02200 Earthwork ...1-5
02214 Finish Grading ...1-3
02282 Termite Control 1-2
02500 Concrete Paving and Flatwork 1-6
02720 Site Drainage 1-3
02930 Hydro Mulch Seeding 1-3
Project No.Fellowship 1314
TABLE OF CONTENTS- 1
DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE
03300 Cast in Place Concrete 1-10
03360 Concrete Finishes 1-3
03540 Gypsum Cement Underlayment 1-5
DIVISION 4-MASONRY
04200 Unit Masonry 1-8
DIVISION 5 -METALS
05500 Miscellaneous Metal 1-4
05520 Metal Hand Rails 1-3
DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry 1-3
06220 Finish Carpentry and Millwork 1-4
I
DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
I
07160 Vapor Barrier and Thru-Wall Flashing 1-4
07210 Building Insulation 1-2
I
07270 Firestopping, Penetration Seals 1-4
07415 Prefinished Metal Roofing 1-4
07460 Cementitious Fiber Board Siding 1-4
I
07620 Flashing and Sheetmetal 1-6
07900 Building Sealants 1-2
DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS I
08110 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1-5 I 08213 Plastic Laminate Faced Wood Doors 1-3
08305 Access Doors 1-2
08710 Finish Hardware 1-5
08800 Glazed Systems 1-8
DIVISION 9-FINISHES
09220 Lath and Plaster 1-5
09260 Gypsum Board Systems 1-7 I 09310 Ceramic Tile 1-2
09510 Acoustical Lay-in Ceiling 1-3
09660 Resilient Tile Flooring 1-3
I
Project No.Fellowship 1314
TABLE OF CONTENTS-2
p
09661 Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring 1-3
09680 Carpet 1-6
09770 Concrete Floor Sealer 1
09900 Painting 1-7
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
10165 Plastic Laminate Toilet Partitions 1-2
10420 Graphics 1
10522 Fire Extinguisher and Cabinets 1-2
10650 Operable Wall 1-3
10800 Toilet Room Accessories 1-3
DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 -FURNISHINGS
12510 Horizontal Blinds 1-2
DIVISION 14—CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14240 Elevator 1-10
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL
REFERENCE PLANS
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL
REFERENCE PLANS
DIVISION 17-PLUMBING
REFERENCE PLANS
Project No.Fellowship 1314
TABLE OF CONTENTS-3
III. INDEX OF DRAWINGS
SHEET NO. SHEET NAME it
COVER COVER SHEET rk.
G1.01 PERMIT, BUILDING CODE &PROJECT DATA p
G1.02 ADA&TAS STANDARDS W:
a
C-1 SITE GRADING&DRAINAGE PLAN
C-2 PAVEMENT PLAN &DIMENSION CONTROL PLAN
C-3 EROSION &SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN P
C-4 SITE UTILITIES PLAN k
C-5 STANDARD DRAINAGE DETAILS
C-6 STANDARD SEWER DETAILS I C-7 STANDARD SEWER DETAILS
C-8 STANDARD STREET DETAILS j
C-9 STANDARD SIDEWALK DETAILS
C-10 STANDARD STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION DETAILS I
C-11 STANDARD WATER DETAILS
C-12 STANDARD WATER DETAILS
I
S1-1 FOUNDATION PLAN
S2-1 FOUNDATION DETAILS I S2-2 FOUNDATION DETAILS
S3-1 FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLAN
S3-2 ROOF FRAMING PLAN I S4-1 FOUNDATION AND STRUCTURAL NOTES
S4-2 FOUNDATION AND STRUCTURAL NOTES
in
A1.01 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN '
A1.02 ARCHITECTURAL SITE DETAILS
A1.03 LANDSCAPE PLAN
A2.01 FIRST FLOOR PLAN
A2.02 SECOND FLOOR PLAN
A3.01 PLAN DETAILS / PARTITION TYPES 1111
A4.01 ROOF PLAN / ROOF DETAILS iik
A5.01 ENLARGED PLANS (TOILET ROOMS/SPECIAL ROOMS) I
A6.01 BUILDING SECTIONSII
A6.02 WALL SECTIONS
A6.03 WALL SECTIONS
A6.04 WALL SECTIONS
I
A6.05 WALL SECTIONS
A7.01 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS • 1
A7.02 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
Project No.Fellowship 1314
TABLE OF CONTENTS-4
1
I
1
1
A8.01 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A8.02 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A8.03 MILLWORK DETAILS
A9.01 DOOR SCHEDULE / FRAME TYPES/ HARDWARE
A9.02 DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS
A10.01 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN-FIRST FLOOR
A10.02 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN- SECOND FLOOR
A11.01 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE
A11.02 FIRST FLOOR FINISH PLAN
A11.03 SECOND FLOOR FINISH PLAN
A11.04 FIRST FLOOR WALL FINISH PLAN / PAINT SCHEDULE
A11.05 SECOND FLOOR WALL FINISH PLAN / PAINT SCHEDULE
M-1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL
M-2 SECOND FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL
M-3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
E1.01 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN
E2.01 FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN
E2.02 SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN
E2.03 FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN
E2.04 SECOND FLOOR POWER PLAN
E3.01 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
P2.01 FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN
P2.02 SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN
P3.01 PLUMBING DETAILS
Project No.Fellowship 1314
TABLE OF CONTENTS-5
1 SECTION AA
2
3 REQUEST FOR SUBCONTRACTOR PROPOSALS
4 FOR
5 Fellowship Church,The Next Step Project
6
7 Sealed Stipulated Sum Proposal for the work identified below in accordance with Proposal Documents
8 thereof and such addenda thereto as may be issued prior to date of proposal opening will be received by
9 Collier Construction,until proposal closing date and time,as identified below.
10
11 OWNER: Fellowship Church
12
13 PROJECT: Fellowship Church,The Next Step Project
14
15 PROPOSAL DATE June 4,2014
16
17 AND TIME: 2:00 PM
18
19 LOCATION AND
20 PROPOSAL OPENING: Collier Construction
21 Design-Builder
22 1601 Loop 290 West
23 Brenham,Texas 77833
24 979-836-4477
25
26
27 Qualified Sub Contractors only may obtain one set of plans and specifications at place identified below
28 upon deposit of$100.00 per set with check made payable to Collier Construction. The deposit will be
29 refunded when the plans and specifications are returned promptly in good condition. Plans and
30 Specifications maybe viewed at the following plan rooms:
31 Houston-AGC,ABC
32 Bryan-Brazos Valley Plan Room
33
34 Collier Construction reserves the right to waive any informalities and/or discrepancies and to reject any and
35 all bids if deemed in the best interest of the Owner
36
37 Proposal Documents will be available beginning May 15, 2014 and may be obtained from the following
38 address:
39 Burch Group Architects
40 1601 Loop 290 West
41 Brenham,TX 78833
42 FAX 979-836-4940
43 PH 979-251-4146
44
45 Office Hours are 8:00 AM to 4:00 PM
46
47 FULL REFUND:Deposits will be returned provided all Contract Documents and addenda are returned to
48 the Design-Builder complete with all sheets bound in their original order within 10 days of Receipt of
49 Proposal.
50
51 FORFEIT OF DEPOSIT:When the Documents are not returned under the conditions specified,none of
52 the deposit will be returned.However,the Documents shall remain the property of the Owner and must be
53 returned.
54
Project No. Fellowship 1314 AA- 1
1 SUB CONTRACTORS : Will submit sub bids to Collier Construction, Design Builder, and will be
2 received by Ken Burch at 2:00 PM in the offices of Collier Construction, 1601 Highway 290,Brenham TX
3 or received by facsimile at 979.836.4940
4 All proposals must be in the hands of the Design-Builder no later than the time specified above.Please seal
5 all proposals in duplicate in an envelope with the following information on the face of the envelope.
6
7 Name of Sub Contractor
8 Name of Project
9 Attention: Ken Burch
10
1 1 The Design-Builder reserves the right to reject any and all proposals and to waive any informalities in
12 proposals.
13
14 No proposal shall be withdrawn within 60 days after the proposal opening without the specific
15 consent of the Design-Builder.
16
17 Subcontractors and Suppliers intending to submit proposals to Collier Construction are required to prepare
18 their proposal based on a complete set of documents. If after reviewing the complete set of documents,
19 Subcontractors and Supplier Proposers desire to purchase individual drawings and specification sections
20 for their convenience,they may do so by ordering the specific drawings and specifications directly from the
21 reproduction company.Each proposer purchasing a partial set of documents is responsible for determining
22 exactly which documents he requires and is responsible for all costs associated with printing and delivery.
23 Subcontractors and Suppliers exercising this option must agree to do so on the basis that 1)all documents
24 shall be returned to the Design-Builder, without refund, after receipt of proposals and 2)documents shall
25 not be used on other construction projects. Successful Subcontractors and Supplier Proposers may retain
26 their Documents until completion of the construction.
27
28
29
30 END OF SECTION
31
Project No. Fellowship 1314 AA-2
6r
1 SECTION AB
2
3 INSTRUCTIONS TO SUBCONTRACTOR PROPOSERS
4
5
6
7 6
8 01 PROPOSERS PRESENTATION
9 p
10 Each Proposer by making his Subcontractor proposal represents that:
11
12 A. He has read and understands the Proposal Documents and his Proposal is made in
13 accordance therewith. P
14 w
15 B. He has visited the site,has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the
16 work is to be performed and has correlated his observations with the requirements of the
17 proposed Contract Documents. IP
18 ii
19 C. He agrees to comply with the requirements of the following paragraph. These
20 requirements are absolute, and any Subcontractor who subsequently does not agree toPP
21 comply with these requirements will automatically disqualify himself from proposing or
22 receiving award of the contract. k
23
24 D. He agrees that: '
25
26 01 Work on the project will begin immediately upon receipt of signed subcontract.
27 02 Subcontractor will participate as a team member in cooperation with the
I
28 Design-Builder and Owner.
29 03 The Subcontractor will assign a competent superintendent,to the project, and
30 that superintendent shall be maintained on the project for the duration of the
31 project,subject only to their continuous employment. I 32 04 Subcontractor shall carry and keep in full force for the duration of the Project,
33 insurance coverage for builder's risk,workmen's compensation,comprehensive
34 general liability, and automobile liability as required by the Contract
35 Documents.
I
36 05 Each Proposer by making his Proposal represents that his Proposal includes
37 only material and equipment specified in the Proposal Documents and
38 supplemented,if necessary,for a complete and operating system.
I
39 06 Construction Manager(and subcontractor or supplier submitting a proposal to a
40 Construction Manager) shall submit an affidavit stating that no asbestos
41 building materials shall be used.
42
I
43 04 PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS
44
45 A. Proposal Documents include the Request for Proposal, Instructions to Proposers, the '
46 Proposal Form, and the proposed Contract Documents, including any Addenda issued
47 prior to receipt of proposals. The Contract Documents for the work consist of the
48 Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract(General, Supplementary
49 and other Conditions),the Drawings,the Specifications,and all Addenda issued prior to
I
50 receipt of proposals.
51
52 B. In addition to documents issued to Proposers, Proposal documents will be available at
I
53 the following locations.
54
55
10
Project No. Fellowship 1314 AB- 1
p
1 A.G.C.Houston
2 3825 Dacoma
3 Houston,Texas 77092-8717
4 (713)843-3700
5
6 A.G.C.Waco
7 4500 W Waco Dr
8 Waco,TX 76710
9 (254)772-5400
10
1 1 BVCA Plan Room
12 4346 Carter Creek Parkway
13 Bryan,Texas 77802
14 (979)260-5902
15
16
17 05 PROPOSAL PROCEDURES
18
19 A. A proposal may be deemed invalid if it has not been received at the designated location
20 prior to the time and date for receipt of proposals indicated in the Request for Proposals,
21 or prior to any extension thereof issued to the proposers by Addenda.
22
23 B. All requested Alternates shall be proposed.If no change in the Base Proposal is required,
24 enter"No Change".
25
26 C. Prior to the receipt of Proposals, Addenda will be mailed, faxed or delivered to Collier
27 Construction and will be available for inspection wherever the proposal documents are
28 kept available for that purpose.
29
30 D. Proposals will be received only on the Owner's Form of Proposal for the work as
31 indicated by the Proposal Documents, filled in, and enclosed in a sealed envelope
32 addressed as follows,(or received by facsimile-email):
33
34 Collier Construction
35 Proposal for:Fellowship Church, The Next Step Project
36 Attention: Ken Burch
37
38 Or,
39 979.836.4940 Fax
40
41 Or,
42 bid@collierconstruction.com
43
44
45 E. A proposal may be withdrawn only upon request by the Subcontractor or his duly
46 authorized representative, provided such request is received by the Owner at the place
47 designated for receipt of proposals and prior to the time fixed for the opening of
48 proposals.A withdrawal of a proposal shall not be effective unless a written confirmation
49
50 of the withdrawal is received by Collier Construction at said place within 48 hours
before the time fixed for the opening of proposals. The withdrawal of a proposal does
51 not prejudice the right of the proposer to file a new proposal at the time and place stated.
52
53 06 INTERPRETATION OF PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS
54
Project No. Fellowship 1314 AB-2
t
iit
1 A. Subcontractors proposers requiring clarification or interpretation of the Proposal
2 Documents shall make a written or verbal request which shall reach the Architect at least p
3 Five(05)days prior to the date for receipt of proposals. iit
4
5 B. Any interpretation, correction or change of the Proposal Documents will be made by
6 Addendum. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Proposal Documents made in F
7 any other manner will not be binding.
8
9 07 SUBSTITUTIONS OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT r
10
1 1 A. The materials,products and equipment described in the Proposal Documents establish a
12 standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any
13 proposed substitution. The materials and equipment named in, and the procedures
14 covered by these specifications have been selected as a standard because of quality,
15 particular suitability or record of satisfactory performance.It is not intended to preclude
16 the use of equal or better materials or equipment provided that same meets the
I
17 requirements of the particular project and is approved in an addendum as a substitution
18 prior to the submission of proposals.
19
20 B. No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of proposals unless written request for
I
21 approval has been received by the Architect at least ten(10) days prior to the date for
22 receipt of proposals. Each such request shall include the name of the material or
23 equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed
24 substitute including drawings,cuts,performance and test data and any other information I 25 necessary for an evaluation. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a
26 proposed substitution shall be final.
27 '28 C. If the Architect approves any proposed substitution prior to receipt of proposals, such
29 approval will be set forth in an Addendum.Proposers shall not rely upon approvals made
30 in any other manner.
31
I
32 D. No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award.
33
34 08 SUBSTITUTIONS OF SUBCONTRACTORS
I
35
36 A. The Subcontractors listed as acceptable in certain Sections of the Specifications have
37 been selected because of a demonstrated ability to acceptably perform the Work required
38 for a project of this type and size within the allowable time anticipated for construction.
39 It is not intended to preclude the use of other equally or better qualified Subcontractors
40 provided that same meet the requirements of the particular project and are approved in
41 an Addendum as additional Acceptable Subcontractors prior to the submission of
42 Proposals. If prior written approval has not been obtained, it will be assumed that the
43 Proposal and all alternates are based only upon the Subcontractors listed as acceptable in
44 the Proposal Documents.
45
46 B. Any Subcontractor desiring to have a Subcontractor included in the list of Acceptable
47 Subcontractors shall have the Subcontractor submit as a minimum the information listed
48 in the Subcontractor's Qualification Statement as previously described.These statements
49 shall provide information necessary to ascertain a Subcontractor's qualifications for this
50 particular project,and shall be submitted at least 14 days before the date designated for
51 receipt of proposals.The Architect and his Consultants, after consultation with the CM,
52 will designate additional Subcontractors, if any, to be included by Addendum as
53 additional Acceptable Subcontractors.
54
Project No. Fellowship 1314 AB-3
1 C. In the event a Subcontractor feels obligated or desires for any reason to propose a
2 Subcontractor other than those listed as acceptable(either in the appropriate section of
3 Specifications or in an Addendum) the Subcontractor may propose such Substitute
4 Subcontractor by listing the Proposed Subcontractors on their letterhead showing the
5 name of the firm,the Specification section,the amount the Base Proposal and Alternates
6 will change, and the reason(s) for proposing the substitution. However, under this
7 procedure neither the Owner, Architect nor the Architect's Consultants bind themselves
8 to consider such proposed substitution since a procedure for evaluating such proposed
9 substitution prior to receipt of proposals has been established as described hereinbefore.
10
11
12 09 REJECTION OF PROPOSALS
13
14 A. The Owner and/or Construction Manager shall have the right to reject any or all
15 proposals and to reject a proposal not accompanied by any required Proposal Security,
16 or by other data required by the Proposal Documents,or to reject a proposal which is in
17 any way incomplete or irregular.
18
19 10 INSURANCE
20
21 A. Each Subcontractor shall include in his proposal the complete cost for insurance required
22 under the Contract Documents.
23
24 B. Subcontractors shall carry and keep in full force for the duration of the project,insurance
25 coverage for builder's risk, workmen's compensation, comprehensive general liability,
26 and automobile liability as required by the Contract Documents.
27
28
29
30 15 COMPLETION TIME
31
32 A. Time is of the essence on this project.The Owner has a critical need for this work to be
33 performed and substantially completed by within the time periods designated by the
34 Construction Manager. Each Subcontractor shall keep up with the progress of the work
35 and be prepared to commence and complete all its work upon notice by the Construction
36 Manager.
37
38 B. Having thoroughly familiarized himself with the conditions as they exist at the building
39 site and acquainted himself with the labor supply and the material market,the proposer
40 agrees to be substantially complete with the work at times directed by the Construction
41 Manager for the various trades.
42
43 It is understood that the Construction Manager is to achieve Substantial Completion of
44 the entire work not later than 360days from the date of commencement, subject to the
45 terms of the Agreement.
46
47 The definition of Substantial Completion is found in Article 9.8.1 of the AIA General
48 Conditions bound herein.
49
50
51
52
53 18 ASBESTOS AND ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
54
Project No. Fellowship 1314 AB-4
1 A. The use of any construction process or the installation of any asbestos and/or PCB's,or
2 material containing asbestos or PCB's is strictly prohibited for this Project. p
3
4 B. Prior to submitting a proposal, proposers shall notify the Architect, in writing, of any
5 materials in these specifications which are known to contain or are likely to contain
6 asbestos or PCB's.
7 k
8 C. Prior to payment of retainage and final payment the Construction Manager shall furnish
9 a notarized statement certifying that no asbestos/PCB's or asbestos/PCB containing
10 materials have been used in the Project.
11
12 D. In addition to the Contractor's notarized statement,the Subcontractors will be required to
13 furnish notarized affidavits that no asbestos/PCB's or asbestos/PCB containing products P
14 have been used in this Project.
15
16 19 DETERMINATION OF SUCCESSFUL SUBCONTRACTORS AND AWARD OF SUB-
17 CONTRACT
18 r,
19 A. In determining the successful Subcontractors, Collier Construction will evaluate the
20 information derived from the Subcontractor's Qualification Statement, if any, and the
21 information submitted on the Proposal Form.Items to be evaluated will be:
22 01 The amount of the Base Proposal and each Alternate Proposal.
23 02 The qualifications and reputation of the Subcontractor, as determined by
24 Collier Construction and the Owner.
25
26 B. A decision regarding determination of the successful Subcontractors will be made by
27 Collier Construction and the Owner as soon as practicable.
28
29
30 20 AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS
31
32 A. A serious effort has been made to select only materials that are asbestos free and systems
33 that are readily available. As far as is known at proposal time all items are either
34 available"off the shelf' or within a relatively short period of time.If during the proposal
35 period,a Subcontractor becomes aware of an availability or delivery problem with any of
36 the specified systems or materials or if they contain asbestos, he should notify the
37 Architect immediately. The Architect will promptly explore possibilities for selecting
38 other systems or materials which would circumvent the problem and notify Construction
39 Manager of any changes in an addendum, otherwise it will be understood that only
40 specified systems and materials that are asbestos free are included in the proposals.
41
42 B. Decisions regarding allowance items will be made in a timely manner to avoid
43 construction delays.
44
45 ENI)OF SECTION
I
Project No. Fellowship 1314 AB-5
p
PROPOSAL FORM
Submit on your letterhead in a form exactly as set forth below. Fill in all blanks by printing or
typing, except provide actual seal and signatures where indicated.
BID DATE: lune 4. 2014 at 2:00pm
To: Collier Construction
PO Box 1889
Brenham, Texas 77834
Proposal For: Fellowship Church- The Next Step Project
Collier Construction
Project No. 1314
BIDDER:
Description of work and specification section(s) included in proposal:
BIDDER hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: No. Dated:
No. Dated: No. Dated: No. Dated:
No. Dated: No. Dated: No. Dated:
BIDDER hereby declares that he has: a) carefully examined the Bidding Documents; b) a clear
understanding of the Bidding Documents; c) personally inspected and is familiar with the project site; and
hereby proposes to provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances and facilities as required to perform, in a
workmanlike manner, all work and services for the construction and completion of afore-referenced
project, all in accordance with the Contract Documents dated May 09. 2014 prepared by Burch
Group LLC.
BASE BID: For all work required by the Contract Documents in Base Bid, the lump sum of
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS (THIS GOVERNS)
DOLLARS ($ ).
AMOUNT IN FIGURES
BIDDER hereby acknowledges that he, if awarded the contract, will comply with the insurance
requirements established in the Sample Subcontract. The Sample Subcontract is available upon
request.
Proposal Form Page 1 of 5
ALTERNATES: For each alternate listed in the Contract Documents, state the Alternate Amount.
A.ALT. NO. 1: ADD INTERIOR BUILD OUT SECOND FLOOR & ADDITIONAL PAVING -
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to provide the Interior build out of the second floor and required
paving.
In the Amount of.•
Dollars ($ )
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS (THIS GOVERNS) (AMT.IN FIGURES)
B. ALT. NO. 2A: ADDITIONAL PARKING AREA
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to provide (9) Nine Additional parking spaces to front of building, (not
associated with alt#1).
In the Amount of.•
Dollars ($ )
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS(THIS GOVERNS) (AMT. IN FIGURES)
C.ALT. NO. 2B: ADDITIONAL PARKING AREA
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to provide the Additional parking lot to back of building, (not associated
with alt #1).
In the Amount of•
Dollars ($ )
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS (THIS GOVERNS) (AMT. IN FIGURES)
D.ALT. NO. 3A: FOLDING PARTITION AT OFFICE STAFF #1&2
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to provide folding partition and bracing supports in office staff room.
In the Amount of.• '
Dollars ($ )
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS(THIS GOVERNS) (AMT. IN FIGURES)
E. ALT. NO. 3B: FOLDING PARTITION AT MEETING ROOM #204
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to provide the folding partition and bracing supports in the second floor
meeting room.
In the Amount of.
Dollars ($ )
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS (THIS GOVERNS) (AMT. IN FIGURES)
F. ALT. NO. 4A: KITCHEN APPLIANCES ROOM 124
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to furnish and install residential appliances in the break room #124. REF:
Architectural for equipment types.
In the Amount of.•
Proposal Form Page 2 of 5
Dollars ($ )
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS(THIS GOVERNS) (AMT. IN FIGURES)
G. ALT. NO. 4B: BREAKROOM APPLIANCES ROOM 211-
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to furnish and install residential appliances in the break room #211. REF:
Architectural for equipment types.
In the Amount of
Dollars ($ )
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS(THIS GOVERNS) (AMT.IN FIGURES)
H.ALT. NO. 5A: LVT IN LIEU OF POLISHED CONCRETE AT FIRST FLOOR
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to provide lvt in lieu of polished concrete at first floor.
In the Amount of
Dollars ($ )
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS(THIS GOVERNS) (AMT. IN FIGURES)
I. ALT. NO. 5B: LVT IN LIEU OF VCT AT SECOND FLOOR
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to provide lvt in lieu of VCT at second floor.
In the Amount of.•
Dollars ($ )
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS(THIS GOVERNS) (AMT. IN FIGURES)
J.ALT. NO. 5C: CARPET TILE IN LIEU OF BROADLOOM AT SECOND FLOOR MEETING
ROOM
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to provide Carpet tiles in lieu of broadloom carpet in the second floor
meeting room.
In the Amount of
Dollars ($ )
K.ALT. NO. 6: LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base
Proposal to provide all landscaping and irrigation per plans and specs.
In the Amount of.•
Dollars ($ )
Proposal Form Page 3 of 5
L.ALT. NO. 7: Premium Metallic Roofing-
This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the Base Proposal to
furnish and install all metal roofing panels and associated trim in Metallic Kynar 500
color; Champagne in lieu of galvalume. Gutters and downspouts to remain Galvalume
In the Amount of:
Dollars ($ )
UNIT PRICES: '
A. Unit Price No.1: ADD/DELETE 120V Duplex Receptacle
01 To include Outlet,Coverplate,Electrical box,and 3/4"Conduit/Wiring necessary to the nearest circuit
In the Amount of: Dollars )
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS(THIS GOVERNS) (AMT. IN FIGURES)
B. Unit Price No.2: ADD/DELETE DATA PORT
01 To include Electrical box,blank coverplate,3/4"conduit to access above ceiling and a pull string.
In the Amount of: Dollars ) '
AMOUNT WRITTEN IN WORDS(THIS GOVERNS) (AMT. IN FIGURES)
CONTRACT TIME: Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work under this Contract within
the time specified from the date of written "Notice to Proceed" and to fully complete all Work required by
the Contract Documents as agreed upon in the contract between Construction Manager and Subcontractor,
or within the time as extended as stipulated in the Contract Documents,
REJECTION OF BIDS: Bidder understands that the Owner and/or Design-Builder reserves the right to reject
any or all bids, to accept or reject any Alternates(s) or combination(s) of Alternates, to waive any
informality or irregularity in bidding, and to accept any bid which, in the Owner's and/or Construction
Manager's judgment, is in the Owner's and/or Design-Builder's own best interest.
WITHDRAWAL OF BID: Bidder agrees that this Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of
sixty (60) calendar days after the date and time scheduled for receipt of Bids.
NOTIFICATION, EXECUTION and COMPLETION: Upon receipt of the Notice of Acceptance of this bid, the
Bidder will execute the formal Contract. The Work shall commence within 10 days of the date of issuance
of the Notice to Proceed and shall be completed within the Contract time as stated above_
Undersigned certifies that amounts contained in this Bid have been carefully checked and are submitted as
correct and final.
Bidder's Firm Name:
Organization Type:
Corporation/Partnership/Proprietorship, etc.;
and, if incorporated, state of incorporation
Proposal Form Page 4 of 5
By (Signature):
Printed Signature:
Title:
Legal Address:
Telephone:
ATTEST (if Bidder CORP.
is a corporation): Signature of Corporate Secretary SEAL
•
Proposal Form Page 5 of 5
1 SECTION AI
2
3 Burch Group Architects, H. M. McLeod MEP Engineers, and CME Engineers.
4
5 WAIVER,RELEASE AND INDEMNITY AGREEMENT
6
7
8 Whereas, Architects/Engineers,has utilized certain electronic CADD files in
9 preparation of drawings for the Project,
10 , on behalf Fellowship Church
11 "Owner", and F
12
13 Whereas, , a Subcontractor/Contractor for
14 _ or , a Subcontractor to
15 hereafter"Subcontractors" desires to obtain copies on
16 disk of certain of the Architect/Engineer computer aided drafting(CADD) files
17 consisting of construction drawings for the Project, hereinafter, "Electronic Media,"
18 and
19
20 Whereas, Architect/Engineers is willing to provide copies for the convenience of
21 Subcontractors only under certain express conditions of understanding,
22 acknowledgment and covenant as hereinafter provided without qualification.
23
24 Now therefore, Architect/Engineers and Subcontractor agree as follows:
25
26 1. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT AND LIMITATIONS: It is acknowledged that(1)
27 Architect/Engineers instruments of professional serves are the hard copy drawings and
28 specifications issued by Architect/Engineers hereinafter"Instrument", (2) the
29 Electronic Media are not substitutions for said Instruments, (3) differences may exist
30 between said Instruments and the Electronic Media which Architect/Engineers is
31 under no obligation to discover or disclose if known, (4)the Electronic Media may be
32 incompatible with the Subcontractor's software and hardware configurations. In all
33 ways, including those enumerated, Subcontractors accept the Electronic Media"as is"
34 and Architect/Engineers is under no obligation to correct,update for changes, enhance
35 or maintain the Electronic Media for Subcontractors. Architect/Engineers does not
36 represent or warrant that the Electronic Media are complete, free from defects, or ,
37 accurate now or in the future. It is acknowledged, finally, that no client relationship is
38 created by or through this instrument between Architect/Engineers and
39 Subcontractors.
40
41 2. WAIVER AND RELEASE: Subcontractors agree all risk of incomplete,
42 inaccurate, defective and variant information contained in the Electronic Media, and
43 waives, quits, and forever discharges and releases the Owner, the Architect/Engineers
44 and their officers, directors, employees and successors for every claim arising out of or
45 related to any error, discrepancy, inaccuracy, variation or other defect in the Electronic
46 Media, whether or not resulting in whole or in part from an act, error or omission of
Project No.Fellowship 1314 AI- 1
1 the Architect/Engineers and whether or not such claim is known or unknown as of the
2 date of this waiver and release.
3
4 3. REUSE: The Electronic Media is not reusable for any other project or for
5 additions or extensions of the project identified in the Electronic Media.
6 Architect/Engineers does not authorize release of the Electronic Media to any person
7 or party other than the Subcontractors, and the Subcontractors agree and covenant not
8 to release the Electronic Media to any other party.
9
10 4. INDEMNIFICATION: USE OF THE ELECTRONIC MEDIA SHALL
11 BE AT THE SOLE RISK OF THE SUBCONTRACTORS AND WITHOUT
12 LIABILITY OR LEGAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER OR THE ARCHITECT/
13 ENGINEERS; FURTHER, SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL,TO THE FULLEST
14 EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW,DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE
15 OWNER, THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEERS AND ITS OFFICERS,
16 DIRECTORS,EMPLOYEES AND SUCCESSORS HARMLESS FROM ALL
17 CLAIMS,DAMAGES,INCLUDING BODILY INJURY OR DEATH,LOSSES
18 AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING ATTORNEY FEES,ARISING OUT OF OR
19 RESULTING IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE USE OF THE
20 ELECTRONIC MEDIA.
21
22 5. DISPUTES: Due to the risk of damage, anomalies in transcription or copying
23 and modification during use by Subcontractors where intended or otherwise, it is
24 agreed the Architect/Engineers archived copy of the Electronic Media, if
25 Architect/Engineers chooses to maintain same shall be conclusive,unrebuttable proof
26 in all disputes over the content of the Electronic Media furnished to Subcontractors by
27 this Agreement.
28
29
30
31 WHEREFORE, THE PARTIES HAVE EXECUTED THIS RELEASE,
32 WAIVER AND INDEMNIFY AGREEMENT ON THE
33 DAY OF ,2014.BY SUBMITTING A PROPOSAL FOR
34 THIS PROJECT, SUBCONTRACTOR AGREES TO BE BOUND TO THE
35 TERMS OF THIS WAIVER, RELEASE,AND INDEMNITY AGREEMENT,
36 ALONG WITH EACH AND EVERY PROVISION OF THIS PROJECT
37 MANUAL.ALL PROVISIONS CONTAINED IN THIS PROJECT MANUAL.
38 ALL PROVISIONS CONTAINED IN THIS PROJECT MANUAL WILL BE
39 BINDING ON ALL SUCCESSFUL PROPOSERS UNLESS SPECIFIC
40 EXCEPTIONS ARE MADE IN THIS SUBCONTRACTORS PROPOSAL.
41
42
43
Project No.Fellowship 1314 AI-2
1 SECTION AJ
2
3 CONTRACTOR SITE RULES
4
5
6 A. No foul language or spitting on floor
7 B. No tobacco products on church property. On new construction projects, tobacco products are
8 prohibited after air conditioning systems are initially activated.
9 C. The possession or use of alcohol or illegal drugs is strictly prohibited.
10 D. No tank tops—workers must be fully clothed.
11 E. No workers with a history of felony convictions or warrants.
12 F. No parking on grass,under shade trees,sidewalks or non-vehicular paved areas.
13 the Owner must approve the Contractors parking.
14 G. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste, materials or rubbish caused by the work
15 under this contract at each site. Boxes must be broken down prior to removal from the building.
16 H. Upon completion of the work, and prior to the final inspection,have the premises in a neat and
17 clean condition.
18 Take all precautions necessary for the safety of,and provide protection to prevent damage,injury
19 or loss to:
20 • All employees on the project and all other persons who may be affected thereby.
21 • All the work and all materials to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site.
22 • All property at the site and adjacent thereto including trees,shrubs,lawns,walks,pavements,
23 roadways,structures,utilities and any other church property.
24 J. A competent supervisor who understands the full scope of the work shall be on site at all times.
25 Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons
26 performing portions of the work under the contract.
27 e
28
29 '•
30 ENI)OF SECTION
31
e
V
p
i:.
E'
Project No. Fellowship 1314 AJ- 1
1 SECTION CB
2
3 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
4 TO THE
5 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
6
7 The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for
8 Construction", AIA Document A141, 2004. Where a portion of the General
9 Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions,the unaltered
10 portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. The"General Conditions"
11 are a part of these documents whether or not they are bound herein.
12
13 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
14
15 1.1 DEFINITIONS
16
17 A. THE WORK
18
19 The Work also includes all supplies,skill,supervision,transportation services and other facilities
20 and things necessary,proper or incidental to the carrying out and completion of the terms of the
21 contract and all other items of cost or value needed to produce, construct and fully complete the
22 work identified by the Contract Documents.
23
24 Clarifications
25
26 A. ADDENDA
27
28 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Contract, which
29 modify or interpret the bidding documents, including Drawings and Specifications,by additions,
30 deletions, clarifications or corrections. Addenda will become part of the Contract Documents
31 when the Construction Agreement is executed.
32
33 B. APPROVED,APPROVED EQUAL,APPROVED EQUIVALENT,OR EQUAL
34
35 The terms Approved and Approved Equal relate to the substitution of materials, equipment or
36 procedure approved in writing by the Design-Builder.
37
38 C. ABBREVIATIONS
39
40 N.I.C;or Not in contract.Indicating work not to be done by this Design-Builder
41 By Others;or under this Agreement.By Owner;or Existing.
42
43 ADA Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990
44 ADAAGAmericans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings&Facilities
45 AIA American Institute of Architects
46 ACI American Concrete Institute
47 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
48 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
49 ASA American Standards Association
50 ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
51 AWSC American Welding Society Code
52 FS Federal Specification
53 NBS National Bureau of Standards
54 NEC National Electrical Code
Project No. Fellowship 1314 CB- 1
1 SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation
2 UL Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.
3 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
4 ANSI American National Standards Institute
5
6 D. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
7
8 PRECEDENCE OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The most recent issued
9 Document takes precedence over previous issued forms of the same Document. The
10 order of precedence is as follows with the highest authority listed first.
11
12 .1 Amendments to the Agreement
13 .2 The Agreement
14 .3 The Addenda
15 .4 The Supplementary Conditions
16 .5 The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
17 .6 Drawings, and Specifications shall have equal authority. Should these
18 documents disagree in themselves, the Design-Builder Will select the
19 appropriate method for performing the work.
20
21 E. RELATION OF SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS: The Drawings and
22 Specifications are correlative and have equal authority and priority.Should they disagree
23 in themselves, or with each other,the appropriate method of performing the Work will
24 be made by the Design-Builder.
25
26 F. OPTIONAL MATERIALS, BRANDS AND PROCESSES: When more than one is
27 specified for a particular item of Work, the choice shall be the Design-Builder's. The
28 final selection of color and pattern will be made from the range available within the
29 option selected by the Design-Builder, unless the item is specified to match a specific
30 color or sample furnished. Where particular items are specified only products of those
31 named manufacturers are acceptable unless different manufactures are approved by
32 Design-Builder . Certain specified construction and equipment details may not be
33 regularly included as part of the named manufacturer's standard catalog equipment but
34 shall be provided by the manufacturer only to the extent required for the proper
35 functioning of the equipment.Reasonable variations in equipment are expected and will
36 be acceptable. The Design-Builder reserves the right to determine the equality of
37 equipment and materials that deviate from any of the indicated and specified
38 requirements.
39
40
41
42 G. DATE(S)OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
43
44 Projects which are not phased shall have a single date of Substantial Completion.
45 Projects which consist of sequential Alternates shall have a date of Substantial
46 Completion for each phase or campus, as applicable. The Date(s) of Substantial
47 Completion shall be the date or dates when the Work or designated portion thereof is
48 sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can
49 utilize the Work for it's intended use.
50
51
52 H. PUNCH LIST
53
Project No. Fellowship 1314 CB-2
1 A comprehensive list prepared by the Design-Builder prior to Substantial Completion to
2 establish all items to be completed or corrected. This list may be supplemented by the
3 Owner and/or Owner's Consultants. The punch list will be attached to the Certificate
4 for Substantial Completion.Upon completion of final punch list items,the project will be
5 considered finally complete and final payment shall be made by Owner.
6
7
8
9 I. TAXES
10
11 The Owner will provide a Sales Tax Exemption certificate.
12
13 J. PERMITS,FEES AND NOTICES
14
15 The Owner shall pay directly to the governing authority,the cost of all permanent utility impact
16 fees, capital recovery fees,utility assessments and similar non-construction related fees,unless
17 specifically indicated herein.
18
19 The Owner shall pay all fees to the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation(TDLR)for
20 document review and project inspections relative to the Elimination of Architectural Barriers Act.
21 The Design-Builder will submit the documents to the TDLR for review and approval.
22
23 The Design-Builder shall be responsible for obtaining all temporary utility charges, tap charges,
24 water meter charges and any other similar fees assessed by jurisdictional authorities having control
25 over this project related to the actual installation of building utilities and services.
26
27 The Design-Builder shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for all City and County Building
28 Permits, plan checking fees and on-site inspection fees. The Design-Builder shall verify all such
29 costs with the governing authority and include all such costs in the Base Proposal Amount.
30
31 K. AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS
32 OF THE WORK
33
34 If the Owner has objection to a person or entity proposed by the Design-Builder,
35 the Design-Builder shall propose another to whom the Owner has no objection.
36 The Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned
37 by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued.
38
39 L. SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
40
41 The Drawings and Specifications have been organized to facilitate work required by various
42 trades; however, each Subcontractor shall formulate their bid and provide their respective work
43 based on a complete set of Contract Documents.No allowance for time or cost shall be made by
44 the Owner for a subcontractor who bases their scope of work on a partial set of Contract
45 Documents.
46
47 M. FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
48
49 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum shall be paid by the
50 Owner to the Design-Builder upon the completion of the punch list items and receipt of the
51 applicable close-out documents.
52
53
54 N. ASBESTOS,LEAD OR PCBs CONTAINING MATERIALS
Project No. Fellowship 1314 CB-3
1
2 The Design-Builder and each subcontractor, sub-subcontractor and suppliers prior to final
3 payment,shall submit an original notarized statement on their letterhead certifying"to the best of
4 their information, knowledge, and belief asbestos, asbestos containing materials, and PCBs have
5 not been used or incorporated into the Work and lead or lead bearing materials have not been
6 incorporated into potable water systems." For the purpose of definition as used in this statement,
7 the term"potable water systems"includes,but is not limited to,those water systems for drinking
8 fountains, all sinks, showers, bath tubs, residential and commercial kitchen equipment, ice
9 machines,and hose bibs,as applicable to the project.
10
11 To the best knowledge of the Owner, the Design-Builder and his consultants, no products or
12 materials containing asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB)or other toxic substances have
13 been specified for this project. No products or materials containing asbestos or PCB are to be
14 incorporated in this project. In the event the Sub-contractors become aware that any products
15 or materials specified, ordered, scheduled for or already incorporated in the work on this
16 project, contain asbestos, or PCB, the situation shall be reported immediately to the Design-
17 Builder in writing.An acceptable, equal substitute for the product or material in question shall
18 be proposed by the Design-Builder and the product or material in question, if already onsite or
19 incorporated in the work, shall be removed from the site immediately and returned to the
20 supplier or manufacturer.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28 END OF SECTION
Project No. Fellowship 1314 CB-4
1 SECTION 01005
2
3 CODE SUMMARY
4
5
6 PART 1-GENERAL
7
8 1.1 BUILDING CODE ANALYSIS
9
10 A. Referenced Building Code: International Building Code, 2012 Edition, with City of College
1 1 Station,TX adopted amendments and Brazos County,TX requirements.
12
13 B. Occupancy Type
14 01 General Building:Type B(office building,equipped throughout with an automatic
15 sprinkler system)
16 The total building area is 11,814 SF.
17
18 C. Distance to Adjacent Property Line:
19 01 Northwest Property Line:46 feet
20 02 Northeast Property Line: 166 feet
21 03 Southwest Property Line:56 feet
22 04 Southeast Property Line: 139 feet
23
24
25 D. Construction Type:V-B
26 01 Allowable Area: 9,000 square feet per floor
27
28
29 E. Building Areas:
30 01 1st Floor Building Area: 5,912 SF
31 02 2°d Floor Building Area 5,902 SF
32 03 Total Building Area: 11,814 SF
33
34 F. Code/Life Safety Occupancy Loads:
35 01 Office Building:
36 Offices Code Load: 37
37 Conference/Meeting Rooms Code Load: 242
38 Total Code Load: 279
39 02 Code load used for all life safety considerations/calculations.
40
41 G. Actual Occupancy Loads:
42 01 Office Building:
43 First Floor Actual Load: 57
44 Second Floor Actual Load: 212
45 02 Actual load used for calculating plumbing fixtures and non-life safety
46 considerations: 269
47
48 H. Exit Width Capacity(first floor for total code occupancy load)
49 01 Egress required for a sprinkled building—number of occupants X 0.15
50 02 Total exit capacity 0.15"per person:269 x 0.15"=41 inches total capacity
51 03 Total exit capacity equals: 5 exits=252 inches
52
53 J. Maximum Travel Distance to Exits
54 01 First Floor to Building Exit: Code: 300 LF Actual: 87 LF
55 02 Second Floor to Building Exit: Code: 300 LF Actual: 100 LF
56
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01005- 1
1
2 K. Fire Resistance Requirements:Table 601 V-B Non-Sprinkled Sprinlded
3 01 Structural Frame 0 HR 0 HR
4 02 Exterior Bearing Walls 0 HR 0 HR
5 03 Interior Bearing Walls 0 HR 0 HR
6 04 Ceiling/Floor Construction 0 HR 0 HR111
7 05 Ceiling/Roof Construction 0 HR 0 HR
8 06 CMU Rated Partitions- 1 Hour at elevator shaft
9
10
1 1 2.2 WIND LOAD
12
13 A. The building is located within the jurisdiction of Texas Department of Insurance "Texas
14 Windstorm Insurance Association".
15 01 Zone: Inland II
16 02 Occupancy Classification:III
17 03 Importance Factor: 1.5
18 03 Exposure Classification:C
19 04 Wind Zone(per ASCE 7,Inland II-Basic Wind Speed @ 110 MPH @ 3 Sec.gust.
20
21 B. All systems and assemblies constructed as part of the building envelope shall comply with all
22 requirements of ASCE 7 (American Society of Civil Engineers) and Texas Department of
23 Insurance"Texas Windstorm Insurance Association".
24
25 3.0 MECHANICAL SYSTEM
26
27 A. The design will conform to the International Mechanical Code,2012 Edition. The HVAC system
28 will be a DX with separated condensers. The Zone system is reflective of the separated spaces.
29
30 4.0 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
31
3 2 A. The design of the electrical system will conform to the National Electrical Code,2011 Edition.
33
34 5.0 PLUMBING SYSTEM
35
36 A. The design of the plumbing system will conform to the International Plumbing Code, 2012
37 Edition
38 01 Male&Female WC's—Required: 1 per 25 for first 50;then 1 per 50 for remainder
39 over 50—7 total required; 11 Furnished(4 Male,6 Female& 1 Unisex)
40
41 02 Male&Female Lavatories—Required: 1 per 40 for first 80;then 1 per 80 for
42 remainder over 80—5 total required; 9 Furnished(4 Male,4 Female& 1 Unisex)
43
44 03 Drinking Fountains—Required: 1 per 100—3 total required; 4 Furnished(2 on 1St
45 Floor&2 on 2nd Floor)
46
47
48 END OF SECTION
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01005-2
1 SECTION 01010
2
3 SUMMARY OF WORK
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
13
14 B. The Project, of which the work of this Contract is a part, Woodlands Oaks
15 Church of Christ-New Worship Center.
16
17 C. Location: The site is located at The Woodlands in Montgomery County,Texas.
18
19 D. The Project consists of the construction of an addition to Woodlands Oaks
20 Church of Christ and related site facilities.
21
22 E. SCOPE AND PHASING:
23
24 This BASE BID of the project is to include all site, paving, and related
25 exterior work,Utilities,core and shell of the entire building as indicated on
26 the plans, Interior build out of the first floor. The second floor interior
27 build out will be bid included in alternate 1.
28
29 CORE AND SHELL is defined, for this project, as: including but not
30 limited to entire building envelope, all exterior wall assemblies,Misc. steel,
31 glass and glazing, roofing, all thermal insulation of perimeter walls and
32 roofs, damp proofing, required fireproofmg/stopping,masonry and siding,
33 perimeter doors and hardware, building foundations complete. All MEP
34 utilities in slab as indicated on the drawings. Interior Stud walls and
35 trusses shall be included in the core and shell portion of this project. The
36 fire sprinkler system shall be roughed in and included in the base bid (see
37 alt 1 for continuation).
38
39 INTERIOR BUILD OUT (REF: ALTERNATES 1) is defined, for this
40 project, as including but not limited to: acoustical batt insulation,drywall,
41 MEP above slab complete, casework, doors/frames/hardware, interior
42 glass/glazing, painting, flooring, ceilings, division 10-11 items, Elevator,
43 Fire suppression system. Additional parking is required to meet the City
44 requirements and shall be included in this alternate.
45
46
47
48
49
50
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01010- 1
1 PART 2-PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 MATERIALS
4
5 A. The work includes earthwork,concrete foundations,paving and flatwork, Misc.
6 steel framing/supports, metal roofing, wood trusses, wood deck, gyperete (2nd
7 floor), masonry and stud walls, hardware, glazing, cement siding, glazed
8 systems, casework, equipment, and interior finishes including painting and
9 wood finishes. Other trades as required as the drawings and specifications
10 indicate.
11
12 B. The work also includes mechanical, electrical, communication, and alarm and
13 signal systems.The Building is sprinkled(required with the Alternate#1).
14
15 C. Site work also includes underground utilities,concrete paving, site lighting,and
16 Landscaping and irrigation.
17
18 PART 3-EXECUTION
19
20 3.1 SCHEDULE
21
22 A. Completion Time: The Contractor and Construction Manager will state the
23 Finish Date in the Proposal.
24
25
26 END OF SECTION
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01010-2
4
1 SECTION 01020
2
3 ALLOWANCES
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
13
14 B. The following ALLOWANCES shall be included in the Base Proposal. These sums shall
15 be reconciled per Article 4.8 of the General Conditions.
16
17 1.2 CONDITIONS
18
19 A. The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract
20 Documents. These allowances shall cover the net cost of the materials and equipment
21 delivered and unloaded at the site, and all applicable taxes. The Contractor's handling
22 costs on site,labor,installation,overhead,profit and other expenses contemplated for the
23 original allowance shall be included in the Contractor's sum,and not in the allowance.The
24 Contractor shall cause the work covered by these allowances to be performed for such
25 amounts and by such persons as the Architect may direct, but he will not be required to
26 employ persons against whom he makes reasonable objection. If the cost, when
27 determined, is more than or less than the allowance, the Contract sum shall be adjusted
28 accordingly by Change Order, which will include additional handling costs on the site,
29 labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses resulting to the Contractor
30 from any increase over the original allowance. . Owner will not be obligated to pay the
31 cost of any work performed without prior written authorization.
32
33 B. Unexpended balance of allowance sums shall revert to the Owner in the final settlement of
34 the Contract.
35
36 PART 2-ALLOWANCES
37
38 2.1 ITEMS
39
40 A. CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE:
41 This sum is funds for unknown conditions.
42 Allow the sum of$20,000.00(Twenty Thousand Dollars).
43
44 B. TESTING ALLOWANCE:
45 This sum is funds for concrete testing and soil tests and any other tests the Owner may
46 approve.
lik 47 Allow the sum of$5,000.00(Five Thousand Dollars)
48
49
50 C. ADA/TDLR ALLOWANCE:
This sum is funds for ADA/TDLR issues that may arise,including and permitting and fees.
51 Allow the sum of$3,000.00(Three Thousand Dollars).
52
' 53
54 D. RERPODUCTION ALLOWANCE:
55 This sum is funds for printing plans for Bidding and Construct.
56 Allow the sum of$2,000.00(Two Thousand Dollars).
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01020- 1
1
2 J. ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING ALLOWANCE:
3 This sum is funds for light fixtures called out as'by allowance'.
4 Allow the sum of$3,000.00(Three Thousand Dollars).
5
6 K. GRAPHICS ALLOWANCE:
7 This sum is funds for Graphics:Room ID Signage,Building Lettering/Logo.
8 Allow the sum of$7,000.00(Seven Thousand Dollars).
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
1 �
k
t
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01020-2
1 SECTION 01030
2
3 ALTERNATES
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO
7 THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Instructions to Bidders for substitutions.
14
15 1.2 ALTERNATE PRICES
16
17 A. Contractor shall state,in the spaces provided in the Proposal Form,alternate prices for the work
18 described below. The responsibility of determining quantity of alternates rests with the
19 Contractor. The Base Proposal and Alternates shall include the cost of all supporting elements
20 required, so that no matter what combination of Base Bid and Alternates are accepted, that
21 portion shall be a complete entity in itself. Work for all Alternates shall be in strict accordance
22 with the Specification and applicable work as indicated on the Drawings.
23
24 B. Unless otherwise indicated, scope of work for each alternate shall include material and labor,
25 general conditions and all other costs associated with completing the work described.
26
27 C. Alternates are not listed in the order of priority.
28
29 D. Acceptance of alternates shall be at the sole discretion of the Owner.
30
31 13 UNIT PRICES
32
33 A. Contractor shall state, in the spaces provided in the Proposal Form, unit prices for the work
34 described below. The same unit price for each item shall be used to either add or delete the
35 described work if/as directed by the Architect during the progress of the Work.
36
37 B. Costs declared for Unit Prices shall be the gross amount used for adjustment,based on the actual
38 quantity of units directed to be adjusted.
39
40
41
42 PART 2—DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES
43
44
45 A. ALT. NO. 1: ADD INTERIOR BUILD OUT SECOND FLOOR &
46 ADDITIONAL PAVING-
47 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added to the Base
48 Proposal to provide the Interior build out of second floor, to include
49 the additional parking required, elevator, fire sprinkler system,
50 etc.. REF: Section 01010 Summary of Work for definition of interior
51 build out, and Drawings.
52
53
54
55
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01030- 1
1 B.ALT. NO. 2A: ADDITIONAL PARKING AREA
2 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted
3 to the Base Proposal to provide (9) Nine Additional parking
4 spaces to front of building, (not associated with alt #1).
5 REFERENCE SITE PLANS
6
7
8 C. ALT. NO. 2B: ADDITIONAL PARKING AREA
9 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted
10 to the Base Proposal to provide the Additional parking lot to back
11 of building, (not associated with alt#1). REFERENCE SITE PLANS
12
13
14 D. ALT. NO. 3A: FOLDING PARTITION AT OFFICE STAFF #1&2-
15 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the
16 Base Proposal to provide Folding panel wall and associated structural
17 bracing/supports. REF:Plan Details.
18
9
2
20 E. ALT. NO. 3B: FOLDING PARTITION AT MEETING ROOM #204-
21 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the
22 Base Proposal to provide the LED lighting to the pendant fixtures in
23 the Auditorium in lieu of CFL Bulbs REF: Electrical Specs for
24 Further Description.
25
26
27 F. ALT. NO. 4A: KITCHEN APPLIANCES ROOM 124-
28 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the
29 Base Proposal to furnish and install residential appliances in the
30 break room #124. REF:Architectural for equipment types.
31
32
33 G. ALT. NO. 4B: BREAKROOM APPLIANCES ROOM 211-
34 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the
35 Base Proposal to furnish and install residential appliances in the
36 break room #211. REF:Architectural for equipment types.
37
38
39 H. ALT. NO. 5A: LVT IN LIEU OF POLISHED CONCRETE AT FIRST FLOOR-
40 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the
41 Base Proposal to furnish and install LVT in lieu of Polished Concrete
42 at the first floor. REF:Architectural finish schedules.
43
44
45 I. ALT. NO. 5B: LVT IN LIEU OF VCT AT SECOND FLOOR-
46 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the
47 Base Proposal to furnish and install LVT in lieu of VCT at the second
48 floor. REF:Architectural finish schedules.
49
50
51
52
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01030-2
1 J. ALT. NO. SC: CARPET TILE IN LIEU OF BROADLOOM AT SECOND FLOOR
2 MEETING ROOM-
3 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the
4 Base Proposal to furnish and install Carpet Tile in lieu of Broadloom
5 at the second floor meeting room. REF: Architectural finish
6 schedules.
8
9 K.ALT. NO. 6: LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION-
10 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the
11 Base Proposal to furnish and install all landscaping and irrigations
12 per plans. REF:Plans
13
14 L.ALT. NO. 7: Premium Metallic Roofing-
15 This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added or deducted to the
16 Base Proposal to furnish and install all metal roofing panels and
17 associated trim in Metallic Kynar 500 color; Champagne in lieu of
18 galvalume. Gutters and downspouts to remain Galvalume
19
20
21 END OF SECTION
I
I
I
1
I
I
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01030-3
1 SECTION 01092
2
3 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO
6 THIS SECTION.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 The following is a list of typical trade organization and industry abbreviations:
11 M`
12 Acoustical Society of America ASA 1
13 Adhesive&Sealant Council,Inc. ASC
14 Air Conditioning&Refrigeration Institute ARI
15 Aluminum Association AA
16 American Association of State Highway Officials AASHO
17 American Concrete Institute ACI I 18 American Council of Independent Laboratories ACIL
19 American Hardboard Association AHA
20 American Hotdip Galvanizers Association AHGA
I
21 American Institute of Architects AIA
22 American Institute of Steel Constructors AISC
23 American Institute of Timber Construction AITC
24 American Iron&Steel Institute AISI
I
25 American National Standards Institute,Inc. ANSI
26 American Plywood Association PA
27 American Society for Testing&Material ASTM f
28 American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE
29 American Society of Heating,Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ASHRAE
30 American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASME
31 American Subcontractors Association ASA
32 American Woodworking Institute AWI
33 American Welding Society AWS
34 American Wood Preserver's Institute ASPI
35 Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association AAMA
36 Architectural Woodwork Institute AWI
37 Asphalt Institute AI
38 Associated General Contractors of America AGC
39 Brick Institute of America BIA
40 Building Research Institute BRI
41 California Redwood Association CRA
42 Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CLFM
43 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CRSI
44 Construction Specification Institute CSI
45 Door and Hardware Institute DM
46 Facing Tile Institute FTI
47 Federal Specifications FS
48 Flat Glass Marketing Association FGMA
49 Gypsum Association GA
50 Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association HPMA
51 International Conference of Building Officials ICBG
52 Joint Sealer Manufacturers Association JSMA
53 Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association MFMA
54 Metal Lath Association MLA
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01092- 1
1 National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NAAMM
2 National Association of Mirror Manufacturers NAMM
3 National Bureau of Lathing&Plastering NBLP
4 National Clay Pipe Institute NCPI
5 National Concrete Masonry Association NCMA
6 National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA
7 National Environmental Systems Contractors NESC
8 National Fire Protection Association NFPA
9 National Forest Products Association NFPA
10 National Hardware Lumber Association NH,A
11 National Ornamental Metal Manufacturers Association NOMMA
12 National Paint,Varnish and Lacquer Association NPVLA
13 National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NRMCA
14 National Roofing Contractors Association NRCA
15 National Society of Professional Engineers NSPE
16 National Woodwork Manufacturers Association,Inc. NWMA
17 Painting and Decorating Contractors of America PDCA
18 Perlite Institute,Inc. PI
19 Portland Cement Association PCA
20 Resilient Floor Covering Institute RFCI
21 Rubber and Vinyl Floor Council RVFC
22 Southern Building Code Congress SBC
23 Southern Forest Products Association SFPA
24 Southern Hardwood Lumber Manufacturing Association SHLMA
25 Steel Deck Institute SDI
26 Steel Door Institute SDI
27 Steel Joist Institute SB
28 Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC
29 Texas Accessibility Standards TAS
30 Tile Council of America,Inc. TCA
31 Underwriter's Laboratories,Inc. UL
32 Venetian Blind Institute VBI
33 Vinyl Fabrics Institute WI
34 West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCLIB
35 Western Red Cedar Lumber Association WRCLA
36 Western Wood Products Association WWPA
37
38
39 1.2 The following is a list of typical Contract Document abbreviations
40
41 Acoustical ACOUST
42 Air Handling Unit AHU
43 Alternate ALT
44 Aluminum ALUM
45 Bottom BOT
46 Building BLDG
47 Cast-In-Place CIP
48 Centerline CL
49 Ceramic Tile CT or CER TILE
50 Concrete CONC
51 Concrete Masonry Unit CMU
52 Continuous CONT
53 Corridor CORR
54 Diameter DIA
55 Dimension(s) DIM or DIMS
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01092-2
1 Door DR
2 Each EA
3 Electrical ELECT
4 Elevation ELEV
5 Equal EQ
6 Existing EXIST
7 Expansion Joint EJ or EXP JT
8 Exterior EXT
9 Floor FL
10 Floor Finish FF
11 Floor Drain FD lb
12 Finish or Finished FIN
13 Finish Floor FF or FIN FL IX '
14 Fixture FT
15 Floor FL
16 Flowline FL
17 Frame FR
I
18 Galvanized GALV
19 Gauge GA
20 General Contractor GC I 21 Grade GR
22 Gypsum Board GYP BD
23 Handicap HC
24 Hardware HW IIP
25 Height HT
26 Hollow Metal HM
27 Hot Dipped Galvanized HD GALV
28 Inside Diameter ID
29 Insulation INSUL
30 Interior INT
31 Lavatory LAV R
32 Light LT i
33 Manhole MH
34 Manufacturer MFGR or MFR
35 Markerboard MB
36 Masonry MAS o'°
37 Material MATL
38 Match Existing ME Pr
39 Maximum MAX ii i
40 Metal MTL
41 Minimum MIN
42 Not in Contract/Work by Others NICI ill
43 On Center OC
44 Outside Diameter OD
45 Overflow Roof Drain OD or ORD
46 Plastic Laminate PL or PLAST LAM
47 Radius RAD
48 Reflected Ceiling Plan RCP
49 Reinforcing REINF
50 Reinforced Concrete Pipe RCP
51 Required REQ
52 Refer RE
53 Restroom RR
54 Roof Drain RD
55 Roof Top Unit RTU
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01092-3
1 Room RM
2 Rough Opening RO
3 Sanitary Sewer SAN SWR
4 Schedule SCHED
5 Sidewalk SW
6 Similar SIM
7 Solid Core Plastic Laminate SCPL
8 Space SP
9 Stainless Steel SS
10 Storage STOR
11 Storm Sewer STM SWR
12 Suspended Acoustical Ceiling SAC
13 Tack Board TB
14 Temporary Bench Mark TBM
15 Thick THK
16 Top of Curb TC or TOC
17 Top of Grate TG or TOG
18 Top of Steel TS or TOS
19 Treated TRTD
20 Typical TYP
21 Urinal URIN or UR
22 Vinyl Composition Tile VCT
23 Vinyl Wall Covering VWC
24 Water Closet WC
25 Wood WD
26
27
28
29 END OF SECTION
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01092-4
1 SECTION 01200
2
3 PROJECT MEETINGS
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
6 TO THIS SECTION. ,
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
I
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Bidders for substitutions. I 13
14 B. Work Included:
15 01 Contractor participation in preconstruction conference.
16 02 Contractor administration of pre-installation conferences and progress
17 meetings.
18
19 C. Related Work:
20 01 Section 01420-Notification of Architect Requirements
I
21 1111
2 2 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
23
24 A. Architect will administer preconstruction conference for execution of Owner-Contractor
25 Agreement,and exchange preliminary submittals.
26
27 B. Architect will administer site mobilization conference at project site for clarification of
28 Owner and Contractor responsibilities, in use of site and for review of administration
29 procedures.
30
31 1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
32
33 A. Contractor shall convene pre-installation conferences with each sub-contractor prior to
34 commencing work of the sub-contractor.
35
36 B The purpose of the meeting will be to review the contract documents, submittals,
37 conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordinate with
38 related work.
39 01 It is the responsibility of the contractor/sub-contractor to resolve all unknown
40 issues, unclear issues, coordination issues, and assembly interface issues in
41 order to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
42
43 C. Require attendance includes,but is not limited to the following:
44 01 Contractor's superintendent
45 02 Architect's field representative
46 03 Relative sub-contractor
47 04 Sub-contractors providing adjacent and/or interfacing work.
48 05 Other sub-contractors whose work may be affected by the relative sub-
49 contractor.
50
51 D. Pre-installation conferences shall be scheduled a minimum of 48 hours in advance of the
5 2 meeting unless otherwise agreed to by all parties.
53
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01200- 1
1 E. Pre-installation conferences may be scheduled with multiple sub-contractors at the same
2 time to facilitate awareness of related work.
3
4 F. The contractor shall keep meeting minutes and distribute to all attendees within three
5 days after the meeting;or sooner if required to facilitate project scheduling.
6
7 1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS
8
9 A. Contractor shall schedule and administer all project meetings after mobilization
10 conference throughout progress of the work at bi-weekly intervals, plus any special
1 1 called meetings,and all preinstallation conferences.
12
13 B. Contractor shall make physical arrangements for meetings, preside at meetings, record
14 minutes,and distribute copies of minutes within two days to attendees,and those affected
15 by decisions made at meetings.
16
17 C. Required Attendance:
18 01 Contractor's Superintendent
19 02 Contractor's Project Manager
20 03 Architect's project Manager
21 04 Architect's Field Representative
22 05 Architect's Consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
23 06 Owner's Representative.
24
25 D. The primary purpose of the weekly progress meetings is to update the Owner of the
26 project status, progress, schedule and outstanding issues. It shall not be a venue for
27 resolving issues that can otherwise be resolved between the Contractor and Architect/
28 consultants;unless direct input from the Owner is required.
29 01 In as much as practical, meetings shall be scheduled on the same day and time
30 each week.Changes in the normal schedule must be agreed to by all parties.
31
32 E. Suggested Agenda: Review of work progress, status of progress schedule and
33 adjustments thereto, delivery schedules, submittals, maintenance of quality standards,
34 pending changes and substitutions,and other items affecting progress of work.
35
36 1.5 PROGRESS MEETING MINUTES
37
38 A. Progress meeting minutes shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be structured to
39 identify all discussion topics and action items by the initiating meeting and the eventual
40 outcome.
41
42 B. Meeting minutes shall be produced in a form acceptable to the Architect and should be
43 similar to the following:
44
45 C. Final,the Architect will be asked if he or she has instruction or comments.
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01200-2
lir
1 fit
2 Sample — Progress Meeting Minutes
3
4 PROGRESS MEETING MINUTES o
5 WOODLANDS OAKS CHURCH OF CHRIST
6 NEW WORSHIP CENTER a.
7
8 Burch Group Architects Project No. 1305 ,
9
10 Meeting No.: XXX Generated By: XXXXX
11XXXXX ,
12 Date: XX-XX-XX Contractor's File No.:
13 Start: XX:XX AM/PM
14 Finish: XX:XX AM/PM '
15
16 ATTENDEES:
17 Name Representing Title
18
I
19
20
21
22
23
24 etc.
25
26 Meeting Agenda
27 1. Review of construction activity for previous week / two weeks (since last
28 meeting)
29 2. Status of construction schedule and adjustments thereto.
30 3. Status of material delivery schedules and adjustments thereto.
31 4. Review of upcoming work(one or two week review).
32 5. Submittal Log review.
33 6. Maintenance of quality standards.
34 7. Review of pending changes and/or substitutions.
35 8. Review other items or issues affecting the work.
36 9. Review unresolved issues from previous meetings.
37
38 Old Business—Meeting No. XXX—XX-XX-20XX
Item No. Description Party Action Due
XXX.1 XXXXXXXXXX XXX XXX)OOXX
XXX.2 XXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXX
XXX.3 XXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXX
XXX.4 XXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXX
Etc.
39
40 New Business—Meeting No.XXX—XX-XX-20XX
Item No. Description Party Action Due
XXX.1 XXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXX
XXX.2 XXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXX
41
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01200-3
1 C. Each meeting with unresolved information or pending action items shall remain on the
2 meeting minutes, in the above format, through one meeting beyond resolution or
3 completion of the pending action of the item, where the item can be reviewed one
4 more time and ALL parties agree the item can be removed from the meeting minutes.
5
6 D. The last meeting shown on the meeting minutes shall relate to the most recent meeting
7 held and shall include ALL topics of discussion at that meeting.
8
9 E. Up-to-date meeting minutes shall be furnished to all attendees at the beginning of each
10 meeting.
11
12 F. This sample is created in Excel and an electronic copy shall be furnished to the
13 contractor upon request.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24 END OF SECTION
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01200-4
1 SECTION 01300
2
3 SUBMITTALS
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT,SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO THIS
7 SECTION. �.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Instructions to Bidders for substitutions.
14
15 B. Refer to General Conditions(AIA.A201)and Supplementary Conditions,section CB.
16
17 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
18
19 A. It is the responsibility of the contractor/sub-contractor/material supplier to provide materials
20 and work that conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
21
22 B. The function of the submittal process is to provide the contractor/ sub-contractor / material
23 supplier additional review/quality control of the materials/work proposed to be furnished for
24 the Work.
25
26 C. Prior to delivery to the Architect or Consultant,each submittal shall be thoroughly reviewed by
27 the party/sub-contractor generating the submittal,as well as the General Contractor.
28 01 Each reviewer shall document their review by affixing a stamp and signature, or a
29 signed review cover sheet to each submittal.
30 02 All corrections shall be clearly noted.
31 03 The Contractor shall determine whether the submittals are suitable to forward to the
32 Architect/Consultant,or return to the originator for revisions and re-submittal.
33 04 Submittals which do not display (at least) two prior reviews (submitter and general
34 contractor)shall be rejected and returned to the general contractor.
35
36 D. The Architect's / Consultant's review of submittals is only for review of the general
37 conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the
38 information given in the Contract Documents.
39 01 The Architect's / Consultant's review of submittals shall NOT be construed as
40 approval of the products,assemblies or work being submitted.
41 02 The Architect / Consultant shall not field verify any information requested on the
42 submittal.That is the responsibility of the Contractor.
43
44 E. Submit only what is proposed to be furnished. Where cut-sheets, etc. also contain information
45 on items not to be furnished, clea.r�indicate/identify/separate the specific items proposed to
46 be furnished from those which are not proposed to be furnished.
47 01 Where no such indication is made, it shall be understood the submittal is presenting
48 options to be selected by the Architect/Consultant at no additional cost to the Owner.
49
50 F. Submittals shall be rejected by the Architect/Consultant for any of the following:
51 01 Lack of required review stamps/cover sheets.
52 02 Apparent/obvious lack of review by the contractor/sub-contractor.
53 03 An inordinate amount of revisions already noted by the contractor/sub-contractor.
54 04 Incomplete or missing information.
55 05 Inclusion of other items not proposed to be furnished.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01300- 1
1
2 G. The Contract Documents in electronic format may be made available to the contractor/sub-
3 contractor for use provided the users execute a release form to the Architect/Consultant.Refer
4 to Section M for applicable forms to be executed and returned the relative party(Architect/
5 Consultant)prior to release of contract documents in electronic format.
6
7 H. All submittals shall be submitted with a cover sheet containing the following information:
8 01 Contractor's submittals number
9 02 Date of submission and dates of any previous submissions
10 03 Project title and Architect's project number
11 04 Relative specification section number
12 05 Names of Contractor,subcontractor,supplier,and/or manufacturer.
13 06 Signed and dated review stamp or comment sheet from the party / sub-contractor
14 generating the submittal
15 07 Signed and dated review stamp or comment sheet from the General Contractor.
16
17 I. Resubmission Requirements:
18 01 Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Architect or
19 Consultant and resubmit until reviewed without rejection or direction for re-submittal.
20 02 Clearly indicate the re-submittal by a capital "R" suffix to the submittal number(i.e.
21 original submittal:XXXXX-R-01,first re-submittal:XXXXX-R-02,etc.).
22
23 J. Failure to comply with the quality assurance requirements may result in immediate rejection
24 without review of the submittal. In such circumstances, no additional time shall be granted to
25 the Contractor for resultant delays.
26
27 PART 2-PRODUCTS
28
29 2.1 ELECTRONIC DELIVERY
30
31 A. Electronic delivery of paper submittals in PDF format is encouraged, but optional to the
32 Contractor.
33 01 Provide a single, electronic copy of submittals with all previous review comments /
34 mark-ups (submitter and Contractor) via email or other electronic means to the
35 Architect/Consultant.
36 02 Submittals shall be returned electronically to the General Contractor along with
37 review comments sheets/mark-ups.
38 03 Quantities retained and distributed shall be the responsibility of each party (i.e.
39 Contractor,Architect and/or Consultant).
40
41 B. Electronic submittals in PDF format shall be made in the same format(size)of the actual submittal
42 (i.e.8-1/2x11, 11x17,24x36,and/or 30x42).
43
44 C. Exceptions to required electronic submission include the following, and be submitted as hard
45 copies:
46 01 Steel shop drawings:to be submitted on full size,scalable sheets.
47 02 Bound MEP manuals/submittals in excess of 25 pages.
48 03 Final warranties.
49
50 2.2 HARD COPY DELIVERY
51
52 A. If the General Contractor elects to submit submittals in hard copy form, submittals shall be
53 provided based on the following:
54 01 Architect only: Submit the quantity required based on three(3) copies to be retained
55 by the Architect.All additional copies shall be returned to the Contractor.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01300-2
1 02 Architect's Consultant: Submit the quantity required based on one (1) copy to be
2 retained by the consultant and three (3) copies to be retained by the Architect. All
3 additional copies shall be returned to the Contractor.
4
5 B. Samples: submit the quantity required to be returned plus two(2)samples that will be retained
6 by the Architect or Architect's Consultant.
7 01 Prior to submitting actual samples, deliver documentation of the manufacturer,model
8 no./series/pattern/etc. and color if necessary to the Architect. Submission may be
9 waived if Architect already has complete samples of materials proposed to be
10 furnished.
11
12 C. Warranties: submit the quantity of the sample warranty required to be returned plus four (4)
13 copies that will be retained by the Architect or Architect's Consultant.
14 01 Upon Substantial Completion and as part of the close-out documents,provide one(1)
15 fully executed original for the Owner and one(1)copy for the Architect.
16
17 D. Owner's Record Set of Submittals
18 01 The contractor shall maintain a separate set of all final submittals to be delivered to
19 the Owner at project close-out.
20 02 Submittals shall be organized,in order,by spec section.
21
22 2.3 MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT DATA
23
24 A. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete printed data on each product;
25 including, but not necessarily limited to product cut-sheets, specifications, quality references,
26 MSDS sheets,and general information.
27
28 B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
29 01 When work is specified to comply with manufacturer's printed installation
30 instructions, submit copies of such instructions, including all requirements as they
31 specifically relates to the work required in this Contract.
32 03 Submission of generic details that do not depict actual conditions of this project shall
33 be rejected.
34 03 Contractor shall distribute copies to all parties providing interfacing work to the
35 completed installation/assembly.
36
37 C. Manufacturer's Test Reports: Where applicable, submit test reports and certifications
38 demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards and requirements.
39
40 2.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
41
42 A. Shop drawings shall be submitted with sufficient detail to fully describe the work included.
43 Partial sets,if submitted without prior approval from the Architect,shall be subject to rejection
44 and/or holding until subsequent shop drawings are submitted.
45
46 B. Details included in shop drawings shall depict actual project conditions related to the assembly.
47 Details depicting generic substrates or interfacing work shall be subject to rejection.
48
49 C. All dimensions indicated on the drawings are based on the specific models and manufacturers
50 of products,equipment,fixtures and miscellaneous items specified or used as a design basis.
51 01 If the Contractor uses an approved product by another listed manufacturer which is
52 different than the specific model and manufacturer listed in these specifications,then
53 the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the coordination of any dimensional
54 changes required, including structural, relocation of walls, equipment, fixtures,
55 ceilings and miscellaneous items.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01300-3
1 02 When dimensional changes are required in these situations, the Contractor shall
2 submit a proposed modification drawing to the Architect for approval prior to
3 proceeding with the work. All causes and effects of the dimensional change shall be
4 indicated on the Contractor's drawing submittal.
5
6 2.5 SAMPLES
7
8 A. Finish Samples: Submit full range of manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns for
9 Architect's selection.
10 01 Submit samples for selection of finishes in accordance with approved schedule,and in
11 such sequence as to cause no delay in the work or in the work of any other Contractor.
12 02 Prior to submission of samples, provide all relative information to the Architect,
13 including but not limited to manufacturer, model no. , series, patterns, colors, etc.
14 necessary to fully describe materials proposed to be furnished. At Architect's option
15 sample submittals may be waived if Architect already has samples of proposed
16 materials in the interiors library.Coordinate with Architect as required.
17
18 B. Selection of finishes from paper or digital representations shall not be accepted. Samples
19 requiring selection of a color, pattern or similar finish shall be submitted in one of the
20 following methods:
21 01 Whenever possible, submit actual material product samples (i.e. carpet, aluminum,
22 glass,plastic laminate,sealants,etc.)
23 02 Paint colors for pre-finished materials shall be submitted on actual samples of
24 substrate materials(i.e.paint on sheetmetal).
25 03 Manufacturer's standard color wheels or similar shall be acceptable for paint
26 selections for field painted items;however,the Architect may require to see/approve
27 an actual application of paint on the intended material in the field.
28
29 B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of the product, with integral parts and
30 attachment devices.Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work.
31
32 C. Submittals shall contain:
33 01 Date of submission and dates of any previous submissions
34 02 Project title and number
35 03 Contract identification
36 04 Names of Contractor,Supplier,Manufacturer
37 05 Identification of sample,with specification section number
38
39 D. Resubmission Requirements for Samples:
40 01 Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Architect and
41 resubmit until approved.
42 02 Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
43
44 E. Submit the number specified in the respective Specification section; minimum of two, one will
45 be retained by Architect. Reviewed samples may be used in the work if so indicated in the
46 specification section.
47
48 F. Selection of materials,finishes and color selections shall be finalized ONLY after samples of all
49 key items are received.Color selections of key items shall NOT be done piece meal.
50
51 2.6 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES AND WARRANTIES
52
53 A. Prior, and conditional to Contract Close-Out, provide original copies of all required
54 certificates,warranties and guarantees.Refer to other sections for specific requirements.
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01300-4
I
I
1 B. Submit required certificates and warranties in duplicate, with original signatures. Documents
2 shall be accompanied by the name of the manufacturer's/guarantor's contact name, address, I 3 phone number and fax number.
4
5 PART 3—EXECUTION
6
7 3.1 SUBMITTAL COORDINATION
8
9 A. Group or package submittals relative to the assembly which are dependent upon each other for
10 a thorough review(i.e.doors,frames and hardware).
11 01 Time periods for proper and complete submittal reviews which are contingent on or +
12 must be coordinated with separate but related submittals shall begin at the time of the
13 Architect's/Consultant's receipt of the last required submittal. Contractors are urged
14 to group submittals appropriately in this regard.
15
16 B. Finishes and samples shall NOT be selected piecemeal. Selection of finish samples will begin
17 only after receipt of all finish selection samples,including exterior and interior finishes.
18
19 C. No extensions of Contractor Time or Cost shall be allowed due to lack of submittal
20 coordination by the Contractor.
21
22 3.2 SCHEDULE
23
24 A. The Contractor shall schedule to complete the submittal process within a maximum of Sixty
25 (60)days after execution of the Owner—Contractor Agreement.
26
27 B. The Contractor shall formulate and provide a submittal schedule to the Architect within twenty
28 (20) days after execution of the Owner — Contractor Agreement, to allow for proper
29 coordination and scheduling reviews.
30
31 C. In formulating the submittal schedule,the Contractor shall allow the following review periods:
32 01 Architect—allow fourteen(14) calendar days response time, after Architect's receipt,
33 for all submittals made to and reviewed by the Architect.
34 02 Architect's Consultant — Allow twenty (20) calendar days response time, after ,
35 Consultant's receipt, for all submittals which must be reviewed by Architect's
36 Consultants.
37 03 All Consultant submittals shall be returned to the Architect for delivery to the
38 Contractor.
39
40 3.3 PROCEDURES
41
42 A. Transmit each item with approved form identifying project, contractor, subcontractor, major
43 supplier; identify pertinent drawing sheet and detail number and specification section number,
44 as appropriate.
45
46 B. Transmit Consultant and Engineering submittals directly to respective Consultant with a copy
47 of the transmittal sent to the Architect.
48
49 C. Sub-Contractor's / Supplier's Conveyance to the General Contractor: Each sub-contractor /
50 supplier shall be required to review their own submittal and apply a signed and dated stamp to
51 each submittal certifying review, verification of products, field dimensions, adjacent
52 construction work and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of
53 the work and Contract Documents.
54 01 Receipt of submittals without the sub-contractor / supplier review stamp shall be
55 automatically rejected without review and returned to the General Contractor.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01300-5
1
2 D. Contractor's Conveyance to the Architect / Consultant: The Contractor is required to
3 thoroughly review and check all submittals received from sub-contractors / suppliers. Upon
4 completion of review and checking, apply signed Contractor's stamp to each item submitted,
5 certifying that review, verification of products, field dimensions, adjacent construction work
6 and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and
7 Contract Documents.
8
9 E. If, in the opinion of the Architect / Consultant, the submittal indicates a lack of study or the
10 contractor's/ sub-contractor's review is incomplete, or indicate an inadequate understanding of
11 the work covered by the submittal,prior to submission to the Architect/Consultant,the submittal
12 will be returned, unchecked, to the General Contractor for correction of any / all of these
13 deficiencies for subsequent re-submittal. Additional service charges as outlined in Section 01410
14 may be charged by the Architect/Consultant in this event.
15
16 F. Revise and resubmit submittal as required;identify all changes made since previous submittal.
17
18 G. After review,distribute copies to all concerned parties.
19
20 H. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require
21 submittal and review of shop drawings, product data, samples or similar submittals until the
22 respective submittal has been reviewed by the Architect / Consultant without request for re-
23 submittal.
24
25 3.4 CLAIM NOTIFICATION
26
27 A. If the submitter or contractor issues submittals for which an additional cost is anticipated, the
28 submittal must clearly indicate such cost including all supporting information.
29 01 Lack of accompanying cost information known at the time of the original submittals
30 shall be grounds for disallowance of such cost.
31
32 B. Upon return of submittal(s)to the originator of the submittal(s),the submitter shall thoroughly
33 review all mark-ups and/or comments prior to proceeding with the work.
34
35 C. Based on the mark-ups and / or comments returned, the submitter shall have fifteen (15)
36 calendar days to submit a claim notification for additional costs the submitter may feel is
37 warranted by the mark-ups/and or comments of the Architect or Consultant.
38 01 The fifteen(15)calendar day period shall commence upon Contractor's receipt of the
39 submittal from the Architect.
40
41 D. In the absence of any claim notification within the specified time period, it shall be agreed the
42 submitter shall provide the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and the reviewed
43 submittal at no additional cost.
44
45 E. In the event a claim notification is submitted to the general contractor/construction manager,
46 the submittal process shall not be complete until all such claim notifications have been fully
47 resolved.
48
49
50 END OF SECTION
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01300-6
1 SECTION 01310
2
3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
6
7 PART 1 -GENERAL
8
9 1.1 DESCRIPTION
10
11 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
12
13 1.2 SUBMITTALS
14
15 A. Schedules:
16 01 Preliminary Analysis: Within fourteen days after receipt of Notice to
17 Proceed,submit a preliminary construction schedule for review.
18
19
20 PART 2-PRODUCTS
21
22 2.1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
23
24 A. Diagram: Graphically show the order of all activities necessary to complete the work
25 and the sequence in which each activity is to be accomplished.
26
27 B. Activities shown on the diagram shall include,but not necessarily be limited to:
28 01 Project mobilization.
29 02 Submittals and approvals of shop drawings and samples.
30 03 Phasing of construction.
31 04 Procurement of equipment and critical materials.
32 05 Fabrication and installation of special material and equipment.
33 06 Final clean-up.
34 07 Final inspection and testing.
35
36 2.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE LIMITATIONS
37
38 A. Work performed under this Contract shall be performed in accordance with the
39 following paragraphs so that the Owner can accept the project as substantially
40 complete as noted below.
41
42 B. All work may proceed immediately upon Notice to Proceed and continue
43 uninterrupted except as follows:
44 01 Substantial Completion
45
46 C. Certificates of Substantial Completion will be issued for any of the above mentioned
47 areas of work which are complete prior to the completion of the entire project.
48
49 END OF SECTION
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01310- 1
1 SECTION 01420
2
3 NOTIFICATION OF ARCHITECT REQUIREMENTS
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
11
_e 12 B. In general, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and / or Architect's Consultants
13 whenever there is need of clarification of interpretation of the Contract Documents.
14
15 C. The Contractor shall notify the Architect(and/or Architect's Consultant)48 hours in
16 advance of certain stages of construction. The Project Superintendent shall notify the
17 Architect's Field Representative on a regular basis of the ongoing work.These stages
18 shall include,but not necessarily be limited to the following:
19 01 02200-Clearing of site
20 02 02200-Stripping of top soil within limits of grading
21 03 02200-Excavation and placing(of each lift of)select fill material
22 04 02200, 15000, 16000 - Inspection and covering of any underground site
23 utilities(also notify Civil Engineer)
24 05 03300 - Drilling of footings and excavation of grade beams (also notify
25 Structural Engineer)
26 06 03300-Placing of all concrete(also notify Structural Engineer)
27 07 04200-Installation of masonry
28 08 05000 — Completion of Erection of Structural Steel (also notify Structural
29 Engineer)(if a Pre-Engineered Building notify Architect)
30 09 07100-Concealment of flashing
31 10 07200-Concealment of insulation
32 11 07500-Roofing and sheet metal work
33 12 07900,08800-Installation of building and glazing sealants.
34 13 09500-Installation of ceiling grid(also notify MEP Engineer)
35 14 09XXX-Installation of each type of finish flooring
36 15 09900-Painting and staining(each coat)
37 16 15000, 16000-Completion of roughing-in of plumbing,heating,air
38 conditioning and electrical work prior to concealment. (also notify MEP
39 Engineer)
40 17 16000-Installation of all electrical fixtures(also notify MEP Engineer)
41 18 15000 - Installation of heating, ventilating and air conditioning (also notify
42 MEP Engineer)
43 19 15000-Installation of plumbing fixtures(also notify MEP Engineer)
44 20 15000, 16000 - Any and all testing specified for equipment, mechanical,
45 electrical and plumbing systems(also notify MEP Engineer)
46
47 D. In addition to notifying the Architect, the General Contractor shall also notify the
48 Structural Engineer(48 hours)prior to the following stages:
49 01 Drilling and placing the first footings.
50 02 Pouring the first grade beams.
51 03 Structural steel framing completion.
52
53 PART 2-PROJECT MEETINGS
54
55 2.1 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
56
57 A. The Contractor shall contact the Architect at least ten(10)days prior to commencing
' 58 construction, in order to schedule a preconstruction meeting with the Architect and
59 Owner.This meeting must occur prior to commencement of any construction.
60
61 2.2 PROGRESS MEETINGS
62
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01420- 1
1 A. Contractor shall schedule and administer project meetings throughout progress of the
2 work.
3
4 B. Contractor shall make physical arrangements for meetings,preside at meetings,record
5 minutes, and distribute copies within two (2) days to the Architect, participants, and
6 those affected by decisions made at meetings.
7 C. Required Attendance: Job Superintendent, Project Coordination, Owner and
8 Architect as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
9
10 D. Suggested Agenda: Review of work progress, status of progress schedule and
11 adjustments thereto, delivery schedules, submittals, maintenance of quality standards,
12 pending changes and substitutions,and other items affecting progress of work.
13
14 2.3 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES
15
16 A. For each individual Specification section or each subcontractor, convene a
17 preinstallation conference prior to commencing work of that Section.
18
19 B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting or affected by work of that section.
20
21 C. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and
22 coordinate with related work.
23
24
25 END OF SECTION
26
1
p
I
I
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01420-2
1 SECTION 01501
2
3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1 -GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
13
14 B. Temporary facilities shall only be for the duration of construction, unless noted
15 otherwise, and all temporary facilities shall be completely removed at the completion
16 of the project. Any areas disturbed by the placement of temporary facilities shall be
17 repaired/replaced to a finished condition consistent with the surrounding finished area.
18
19 1.2 UTILITIES
20
21 A. The Contractor shall supply temporary job power and water hook-ups for site. The
22 Contractor shall provide all wiring, lamps, distribution of power and similar
23 equipment as required for construction,inspection,and testing of the project.
24
25 B. The Contractor is responsible for overloading or excess use, or any damage resulting
26 from overloading or excess use,or any damage resulting from his use of utilities.
27
28 C. The General Contractor shall provide temporary heat to prevent freezing, and
29 maintain proper temperatures to avoid damage to materials in the building. The
30 General Contractor shall provide and maintain such dependable source of supply,such
31 as heat,as may be necessary until the building is acceptable.
32
33 D. The Contractor will be required to provide temporary water and electrical connections
34 for field sprinkler systems after Substantial Completion of the fields. These
35 connections must be maintained through the duration of the Contract, or until
36 permanent connections are made.
37
38 1.3 FIELD OFFICE
39
40 A. The Contractor will be required to furnish a job trailer installed at a suitable location
41 (on site),for use by the Contractor and Architect.
42
43
44
45 1.4 SANITARY FACILITIES
46
47 A. Furnish temporary sanitary facilities and maintain in compliance with regulations of
48 State Department of Health and other authorities having jurisdiction.
49
50 1.5 STORAGE FACILITIES
51
52 A. Provide and maintain adequate weathertight lockable storage facilities, raised above
53 the ground,with sides and top enclosed.
54
55 B. Replace materials improperly stored and damaged by weathered conditions.
56
57 C. Remove storage facilities when materials are stored within the structure in
58 weathertight condition.
59
60 D. Allow for temporary freeze protection as needed.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01501 - 1
1
2 1.6 SIGNS
3
4 A. Within three weeks after receipt of Notice to Proceed, provide one project
5 identification sign and install at designated location at the site.
6
7 B. Fabricate the sign with sturdy wood framing and 3/4 inch thick exterior grade
8 plywood, with medium density overlay, and a minimum area of 64 square feet (4' x
9 16'or 8'x 8').
10 C. Project sign shall incorporate design layout as provided Burch Group Architects.
11
12 D. Prime wood surfaces and apply one coat of exterior house paint, in not more than
13 three distinct colors.
14
15 E. Provide required information in painted letters of contrasting colors, applied by a
16 professional sign specialist:
17 01 The official title of the Project as listed on Contract Documents.
18 02 The name of the Owner as listed on Contract Documents.
19 03 The names and titles of Architect and professional consultants.
20 04 Identification number of the Contractor.
21
22 F. Erect signs on 4" (102 mm) x 4" (102 mm) supports set firmly into the ground and
23 well braced. The bottom of the sign is to be a minimum of 4' above grade, unless
24 otherwise instructed by the Architect.
25
26 G. Other signs permitted at the site:
27 01 Warning signs.
28 02 Directional signs.
29 03 Identification signs at field offices.
30
31 H. Allow no other signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the
32 Owner.
33
34 I. Secure and pay for all sign permits as required by local authorities.
35
36 1.7 BARRIERS
37
38 A. Provide temporary barricades on all portions of the site adjacent to the construction
39 and accessible to the public.
40
41 B. Provide approved barriers around trees and plants designated to remain. Protect
42 against vehicular traffic, stored materials, dumping, chemically injurious materials,
43 water puddling and continuous running water.
44
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01501-2
1 1.8 SECURITY
2
3 A. Determine if and when watchmen are necessary for protection to the work, and
4 4 provide such services when necessary. Neither the provision of watchmen nor the
5 failure to provide watchmen shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility in event of
6 injury to persons or damage to property.
7
8 1.9 CLEANING
9
10 A. Trash Removal: Clear the building and site of trash at least once a week.When rapid
11 accumulation occurs,make more frequent removals.Remove highly combustible trash
12 such as paper and cardboard daily. Dumpsters will not be allowed to overflow and
13 should be emptied on a regular basis.
14
15 B. Disposition of Debris: Remove debris from the site and make legal disposition.
16 Locations for disposal shall be of the Contractor's choice within the above restriction.
17 No debris nor material may be buried or burned at the site. Take necessary
18 precautions to prevent accidental burning of materials by avoiding large
19 accumulations of combustible materials.
20
21 C. Final Cleaning: Thoroughly clean the work, including the removal of smudges,
22 marks, stains, fingerprints, soil, dirt, paint spots, dust, lint, discolorations, and other
23 foreign materials.
24
25 2.0 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES
26
27 A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously
28 available to render first aid at the site.
29
30 2.1 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
31
32 A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the
33 site; and provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all
34 areas of the project,and at specific areas of critical fire hazard.
35
36 B. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection
37 certificate attached to each extinguisher.
38
39 2.3 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
40
41 A. Provide adequate temporary roads and walks to achieve all-weather access into the
42 site from public thoroughfares, and within and adjacent to the site, as necessary to
43 provide interrupted access to field offices, work and storage areas. All temporary
44 access roads and walks shall be removed upon completion of permanent facilities, or
45 completion of construction.
46
47 B. Provide adequate parking space for personnel and employees at the site, located to
48 avoid interference with traffic, work or storage areas, or with materials-handling
49 equipment.
50
51 C. Grade and provide drainage facilities to assure runoff of rainwater and to avoid
52 blockage of flow from adjacent areas.
53
54
55
56 END OF SECTION
57
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01501-3
1 SECTION 01530
2
3 TREE PROTECTION,PRESERVATION AND TREATMENT
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
6 TO THIS SECTION.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 WORK INCLUDED
15
16 A. Work Included
17 01 Trimming Operation
18 02 Root Pruning Trenching Operation
19 03 Tree protection Fencing Installation
20 04 Root Stimulation/Fertilization Treatment
21 05 Signage Installation
22 06 Repair Operations
23
24
25 B. Site preparation work shall not begin in any area where tree preservation and
26 treatment measures have not been completed.
27
28 C. Site improvements shall be staked by the Contractor in order to facilitate location of
29 trenching and fencing operations.
30
31
32 D. Any roots exposed by construction activity shall be pruned flush with the ground and
33 covered with backfill as soon as possible. If exposed roots are not to be covered with
34 backfill within 24 hours, cover with a mulch or material in order to reduce soil
35 temperature and minimize water loss due to evaporation.
36
37 E. Any work, excavation or grading required within protected root zone areas shall be
38 limited to 3 inches cut or fill,with no roots over 3/4 inch diameter being out,and done
39 by hand or with approved equipment and root protection.
40
41 1.3 IMPLEMENTATION
42
43
44 A. A temporary protective fence shall be installed completely around the existing
45 trees to remain what lay within the area of construction. The location of the
46 protective fence shall be verified with Architect. The protected area shall not be used
47 for any reasons, including material, vehicular, and equipment storage or vehicular
48 traffic and parking.
49
50 B. Trimming Operation:
51 01 The Architect and Owner shall be notified of all trimming.
52 02 Trees to be trimmed will include only trees affected by construction and
53 those requiring maintenance in the preservation areas.
54 03 Trees to be trimmed will be designated flagged in the field.
55 04 Trees to be removed shall be designated by Architect.
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01530- 1
1 05 A list of the trees to be trimmed and the prescribed tree treatment will be
2 provided by the Arborist.
3 06 Trimming shall consist of the following methods:
4 a. Class IV - Crown Reduction Pruning (reference National Arborist
5 Association Standards for Pruning of Shade Trees 1988). Special
6 trimming procedure to reduce crown of trees up to 30 percent, to
7 prevent impact and stress of preservation trees. Corrective pruning
8 and removal of all deadwood larger than 1 inch diameter will be
9 required.
10 b. Removal of all vines from trees.
11 c. Removal of designated and or hazardous trees. All stumps shall be
12 ground down 6 inches below grade.
13 d. All chips produced from the trimming operation shall be left on site
14 for Owners use, unless otherwise directed. Chips will be blown
15 onto or spread over preservation areas.
16 07 All wood not chipped shall be hauled from site. No burning will be allowed
17 on site.
18
19 C. Root Pruning Trenching Operation:
20 01 Trenching areas shall be designated and exact locations will be marked in the
21 field.
22 02 Trenching depth shall be 2 foot minimum.
23 03 Where excavation over 3 inches in depth is to occur within the root zone area
24 of a preserve tree,make a clean cut(a minimum of 2 feet deep)between the
25 designated disturbed and undisturbed root zone area, with a trenching
26 machine,in order to minimize damage to the undisturbed root zone.
27 04 Trench shall be backfilled and compacted immediately after trenching.
28
29 D. Tree Protection Fencing Installation:
30 01 Tree protection fence-the exact locations will be marked in the field by the
31 Architect.
32 02 No access to fenced areas shall be permitted without prior approval by the
33 Architect.
34 03 Contractor shall provide maintenance and repair of fence during site work
35 construction.
36 04 Fence shall be removed after completion of site work construction, unless
37 otherwise notified.
38
39 E. Fertilization Treatment:
40 01 All preservation trees shall be treated,as designated by the Architect.
41 02 Injection of a liquid mix of 50 percent Doggett XL Injecto feed and 50
42 percent "Maxicrop" into the root zone area of trees shall consist of the
43 following method:
44 a. Mix one pound of"Maxicrop"per 100 gallons water with Doggett
45 XL Injecto Feed per label instructions in tank with agitation
46 capability.
47 b. Inject the mixture on a 3 foot square grid at 5 gallons per 100 square
48 feet.
49 c. Injection pressure shall be 100-150 psi as soil conditions warrant.
50 d. Depth of injection will be 12 inches.
51 03 Mix approved wetting agent by label directions with mixture in order to
52 provide better distribution and penetration of materials into soil.
53
54 F. Repair Operations:
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01530-2
1 01 If any damage to preservation trees should occur beyond what is expected
2 during the construction period, the Architect and Arborist shall appraise the
3 damage and order the repair by the Contractor or responsible party.
4 02 Trees lost due to contractor's negligence during the construction period shall
5 be appraised by the Arborist and the Owner compensated or replacement
6 trees provided.
7
8
9 ENI)OF SECTION
10
11
12
13
14
Project No. Fellowship 1314 01530-3 ,
I
1 SECTION 01710
2
3 GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATES AND CLOSE-OUT
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT,SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO THIS
7 SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATES AND CLOSE-OUT
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. The Contract requires the General Contractor to warrant ALL materials and work provided/
14 furnished for a period of one (1) year following the date of Substantial Completion. The
15 Contractor shall furnish the general one year warranty in writing to be attached to the
16 Certificate for Substantial Completion. The one year general warranty shall include all labor,
17 material and delivery costs required to correct defective material or installation during the
18 Warranty period.
19
20 B. In addition to the General Contractor's one-year warranty, other required guarantees shall be
21 submitted to the Architect in duplicate prior to application for final payment. Unless specified
22 otherwise in their respective sections or below, all guarantees shall be for a period of one year
23 from the date of Substantial Completion as evidenced by the Architect's Certificate of
24 Substantial Completion. All guarantees shall include all labor, material and delivery costs
25 required to correct defective material or installation.Guarantees include but are not limited to:
26
27 01 Roofing(2 Years No Dollar Limit Total/Non-Prorated Systems Warranty)
28 02 Glazing(2 Years)
29 03 Dampproofing and Waterproofing(2 Years)
30 04 Sealants(2 Years)
31 05 Plastic-faced Wood Doors(life of the doors)
32 06 Painting and Staining(2 Years)
33 07 Carpeting(10 Years)
34 08 Toilet Accessories(2 Years)
35 09 Mechanical Systems(as specified)
36 10 Electrical Systems(as specified)
37 11 Plumbing Systems(as specified)
38
39 C. Refer to Instructions to Bidders for substitutions.
40
41 1.2 PUNCH LIST
42
43 A. Refer to Section:CB Supplemental Conditions.
44
45
46 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
47
48 A. Refer to Section:CB Supplemental Conditions.
49
50 1.3 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT
51
52 A. Refer to Section:CB Supplemental Conditions.
53
54 1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS:
55
56 A. Upon Substantial Completion,the Contractor shall be furnished,at no charge,a complete set of
57 electronic files in PDF Format.
58
59 B. Upon request, the Architect and/or Consultants shall assist the Contractor with understanding
60 the structure and composition of the electronic files to facilitate the generation of the Record
61 Drawings.
62
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01710- 1
1 C. The Contractor shall modify the title block on each/ every sheet to include only the project
2 name, project address, school district, consultants name and address, date and clearly identify
3 the set as"Record Drawings".
4
5 D. All Record Drawing work shall be performed in a professional manner, neat and legible and
6 shall maintain the format/structure/composition of the original Contract Document drawings.
7
8 E All modifications, additions, deletions and revisions made to the project during the
9 construction phase shall be reflected on the Record Drawings; and shall include, but not
10 necessarily limited to:
11 01 All as-built dimensions(different than original dimensions)
I
12 02 All as-built conditions relative to underground plumbing, sanitary and storm piping
13 installations, natural gas piping and electrical conduits; shown accurately to within
14 twelve inches(12").
15 03 All as-built conditions relative to ductwork installations; shown accurately to within I 16 six inches(6").
17 04 All as-built conditions relative to HVAC water piping installations; shown accurately
18 to within six inches(6").
19 05 All as-built conditions relative to underground electrical conduit installations; shown
20 accurately to within six inches(6").
21 06 All approved CPR's resulting in a physical change in the Work.
22 07 All RFI's resulting in a physical change in the Work.
23 08 All AEA's resulting in a physical change in the Work.
24 09 All Minor Changes resulting in a physical change in the Work. ft
25 10 All Construction Change Directives resulting in a physical change in the Work.
26
27 F. All modifications shall be represented by accurately depicting the revised modifications /
28 configurations.
29
30 G. Upon completion of all revisions to the Record Drawings, the drawings shall be copied to a
31 disc maintaining the exact folder/file structure originally furnished to the Contractor.
32
33 H. As a condition of Contract Close-Out, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner one (1)
34 complete set of black & white Record Drawings, and two (2) CD ROMs containing the
35 electronic version of the Record Drawings ( weight paper of approved by the Burch Group
36 Architects).
37
38
39
40
41 END OF SECTION
42
Project No.Fellowship 1314 01710-2
1 SECTION 02010
2
3 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 APPLICABILITY
15
16 A. Report is provided for proposer's general information only. Architect and Owner shall
17 not be held responsible for accuracy of data contained in the geotechnical report.
18
19 B. Proposers shall visit and acquaint themselves with existing conditions and make any
20 additional investigations they deem necessary to properly propose work and satisfy
21 themselves as to existing subsurface conditions. Such investigations shall be performed
22 only under time schedules and arrangements approved in advance by the Architect.
23
24 C. No additional amount will be made available to the successful proposer for work arising
25 from failure to examine site or subsoil conditions.
26
27 D. The geotechnical report is not a part of the Contract Documents.
28
29 E. Copies may be examined at the Architect's office.
30
31
32
33
34 END OF SECTION
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Project No. Fellowship 1314 02010- 1
1 SECTION 02011
2 p
3 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND D:[VISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 THE FOUNDATION INVESTIGATION REPORT
15
16 A. The report contained in the following pages was prepared by HTS Inc. Consultants,
17 based on soil borings taken at the project site in September 16,2011.
18 •
19 B. The boring plan, results of laboratory tests, and description of stratum for each test
20 hole are enclosed in this Section.
21
22 C. A complete copy of this report is available for review at Burch Group Architect's
23 office.
24
25 1.3 SOIL CONDITIONS
26
27 A. The conditions indicated in the report were known to exist at the location shown on
28 the date the tests were performed; however, these boring logs are for the Contractor's
29 consideration only. The Contractor shall visit the site and fully acquaint himself with
30 the existing conditions, and be prepared to complete all work required by the
31 documents.
32
33 .
34 END OF SECTION
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 02011- 1 ,
1
1 SECTION 02200
2
3 EARTHWORK
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
14
15 B. Scope of Work
16 01 Clearing and stripping of portions of the site which are to receive
17 improvements,preserving vegetation to remain.
18 02 Stockpiling of stripped topsoil in an approved location.
19 03 Filling and grading of the area around the building, improvements using
20 previously stripped topsoil,and any additional topsoil that must be purchased
21 and delivered to the site.
22 04 Providing stable and compact subgrade below the buildings, paving, and
23 sidewalks.
24 05 Excavating for foundations.
25 06 Placing and compaction of select fill general fill under improved areas to
26 conform to elevations designated on the drawings.
27
28 C. Related Work
29 01 Section 02010—Geotechnical Report
30 02 Section 02110—Site Clearing
31 03 Section 02160—Trench/Excavation Safety
32 04 Section 02214—Finish Grading
33 05 Section 02220—Trenching and Backfilling
34 06 Section 02500—Concrete Paving and Flatwork
35 07 Section 02720—Site Drainage
36 08 Section 02930-Sodding
37
38 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
39
40 A. Testing Laboratory Services - Test results shall meet or exceed the standards
41 referenced.
42
43 B. Proposers shall examine the job sit conditions and be informed of all existing site
44 conditions.
45
46 C. The Contractor will be required to establish, maintain and be responsible for all
47 reference points, hubs, grades, elevations, lines, and surface measurements. If any
48 discrepancies in the survey information furnished in the documents are found, the
49 Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and await instructions before
50 proceeding.
51
52 1.3 REFERENCES
53
54 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
Project No.FC 1314 02200- 1
1 01 ASTM D698-78, Test for Moisture Unit Weight Relations of Soils and Soil
2 Aggregate.
3 02 ASTM D2922, Tests for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in place by
4 Nuclear Methods.
5 03 ASTM D1557, Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
6 Mixtures.
7
8 PART 2-MATERIALS
9 '
10 2.1 STRUCTURAL/SELECT FILL MATERIAL t
11
12 A. Structural / select fill shall be lean clay, free from vegetation or other objectionable
13 matter, reasonably free from lumps of the earth, and when tested in accordance with
14 standard testing laboratory procedures shall meet the following requirements:
15 01 The liquid limit shall not exceed 35.
16 02 The plasticity index shall not be less than 8,and not more than 20.
17 03 Sand shall not be blended with clay to form select fill.
I
18 04 Select fill limits shall not extend beyond the boundaries of the outside face of
19 the building foundation.
20
21 B. Structural / select fill shall be used to construct 100% of the building pad, including
22 below adjacent paved/concrete areas,including the following:
23 01 Service Yard
24 02 Main covered walk and entry concrete flatwork I 25 03 Sidewalks/concrete flatwork directly adjacent to the building foundation
26
27 C. Structural/select fill minimum amounts and thicknesses:
28 01 Building pad:Reference Structural Details II
29 02 Service Yard: Same as building pad.
30 03 Main covered walk and entry concrete flatwork: 12"
31 03 Sidewalks/concrete flatwork directly adjacent to the building: 12"if outside
32 the limit stated in the structural details.
33
34 2.2 NON-STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL IN FLATWORK AREAS
35
36 A. Non-structural fill placed in areas of proposed site flatwork shall be silty clay, free
37 from vegetation or other objectionable matter, reasonably free from lumps of the
38 earth,and when tested in accordance with standard testing laboratory procedures shall
39 meet the following requirements:
40 01 The liquid limit shall not exceed 49.
41 02 The plasticity index shall not be less than 10 nor more than 30.
42
43 B. Non-Structural fill shall be used in flatwork areas including the following areas::
44 01 Main covered walk and entry concrete flatwork: 12"
45 03 Sidewalks/concrete flatwork directly adjacent to the building
46
47 C. Non-structural fill material shall be used to achieve rough grades in unimproved areas.
48
49 2.3 TOPSOIL
50
51 A. Topsoil previously stripped and stockpiled may be used provided it meets provisions
52 of this paragraph/section.
53
Project No.FC 1314 02200-2
1 B. Contractor shall treat existing/previously stripped topsoil to remove all undesirable
2 vegetation, weeds and similar material not conducive to finish grading work and
3 planting of new material/grass.
4
5 C. The Contractor shall furnish all additional topsoil that may be required to provide
6 finish elevations.
7
8 D. Topsoil fill material shall be free of debris, stumps, roots and stones larger than 3/4
9 inch diameter. Earth/clay balls shall be broken down to a maximum 1-1/2"diameter
10 size.
11
12 E. Topsoil must be suitable for rapid grass growth and shall contain a minimal amount of
13 clay.
14
15 F. Topsoil shall be a proportional, homogeneous blend of fertile native soil, sand and
16 organic matter/compost specifically blended for rapid grass growth with minimal to
17 no clay.
18
19 G. Samples of topsoil shall be submitted to the Architect and Owner for approval prior to
20 installation.
21
22 H. During finish grading,provide a minimum of 3"of topsoil over all areas disturbed by
23 construction activities.
24
25 PART 3-EXECUTION
26
27 3.1 PREPARATION
28
29 A. Unknown Utilities and Obstacles:
30 01 Prior to the start of excavation,coordinate with the state utility locate service
31 (Texas 811),local municipalities,and utility districts,as well as the Owner to
32 identify and locate known underground utilities and potential obstructions.
33 02 If any unknown or uncharted utilities or objects which would be utilities are
34 encountered during excavation, promptly notify the Architect and Owner
35 before proceeding.
36 03 Do not proceed until all conflicts are fully resolved.
37
38 B. Clearing and Stripping:
39 01 Remove brush, vegetation, debris, and surplus materials from the job site.
40 Removal of any other remaining impediments as may be necessary to
41 properly execute the scope of this Contract shall be included herein. Adhere
42 to State and local code and subdivision requirements for the disposal of trees
43 and shrubs removed from the site.
44 02 Do not remove trees or shrubs indicated to remain or not noted to be
45 removed. Vegetation damaged, removed, killed, or constricted from normal
46 growth patterns shall be replaced with a comparable item, or the full
47 replacement amount credited to the Owner.
48 03 Strip topsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches from the entire areas proposed
49 for improvements , and stockpile in approved locations as directed by the
50 Owner where it will not interfere with building or utility operations.
51 04 Strip and stockpile topsoil before excavating is begun.
52 05 Stripped topsoil, if free from clay, weeds, large stones and debris, and
53 meeting the requirements specified for topsoil may be used for finished
54 grading and filling.
55
Project No.FC 1314 02200-3
1 C. Protection of Trees:
2 01 Where trees are indicated to remain, stop topsoil stripping at drip line to
3 prevent main root system damage.
4 02 In all construction areas, provide approved barricades around the drip lines
5 of trees and shrubs, to protect them from construction operations until
6 Substantial Completion,or until barricade removal is directed by Architect.
7 03 Replace damaged trees and vegetation designated to remain with vegetation
8 of equal kind and size. Follow supplier's recommended procedures for
9 planting necessary replacement vegetation,and per direction of the Architect.
10
11 D. Grubbing:
12 01 Grub areas required for roadways, paving, and construction to a minimum
13 depth of 18 inches below the existing grade.
14 02 When encountered,remove entire main roots and stump roots.
15 03 Tree stumps should be grubbed to a minimum depth of 3 feet within paving
16 areas.
17
18 E. Excavating:
19 01 Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated and required,plus sufficient
20 space to permit erection of forms,and select fill.
21 02 Footing: Floor and wall excavations shall be finished level. Protect bottom
22 of excavation from frost. Shore and brace excavations,protect all slopes and
23 earth banks, and provide sheet piling, if necessary, to prevent cave-in.
24 Remove shoring and piling before backfilling is completed, but not until
25 permanent supports are in place.
26 03 Grading: Contractor shall control the grading around building so that ground
27 is pitched to prevent water from running into the excavated areas of building
28 or damaging other structures. Furnish all pumping equipment and
29 accessories required to keep excavated spaces clear of water during
30 construction. If a foundation excavation must remain empty through a shut-
31 down period, cover with boards and building paper, and clean out
32 immediately prior to placing concrete. If any subgrade should be damaged
33 due to flooding, damaged area shall be removed and filled with select fill.
34 Placement and compaction of select fill shall meet the requirements for
35 placing and compacting of select fill.
36
37 F. Preparation of Building and Paving Subgrade:
38 01 Unstable Areas: After the topsoil has been removed and stockpiled in an
39 approved location and the subgrade has been grubbed and cut to proper
40 elevation,proof roil the exposed subgrade with a 20-ton pneumatic-tire roller
41 to identify areas of pumping soils. Excavate all pumping soils down to firm
42 ground and replace the excavated soils with structural fill on non-structural
43 fill as appropriate for the area. Placement and compaction of fill in unstable
44 areas shall meet the requirements for placing and compacting of fill as
45 subsequently specified.
46 02 Following proof-rolling, scarify and compact the top 6 inches of existing
47 subgrade to a dry density not less than 95%, nor greater than 98% Standard
48 Proctor Density. Should the cut elevation be below the grubbing depth,
49 scarify and compact the top with 6 inches of new subgrade to a dry density
50 not less than 95%, nor greater than 98% Standard Proctor Density. Water
51 contents of the compacted soils shall be in the range of the optimum moisture
52 content to 4 percent above the optimum moisture content,inclusive.
53 03 In areas where paving subgrade is on select fill,subgrade preparation may be
54 performed as specified.
55
Project No.FC 1314 02200-4
1 04 The subgrade shall be compacted using a roller or other approved methods
2 which will assure bonding of layers of fill material.
3 05 Should the subgrade, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability,
4 density, or finish before the pavement structure is placed, it shall be re-
5 compacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor.
6 06 Preparation of Subgrade In Inclement Weather: The Contractor may
7 encounter difficulty in densifying/preparing the surficial soil depending on
8 weather conditions. If inclement weather causes the surficial soils to become
9 unsuitably wet,the Contractor may exercise one of the following options:
10 a. Adequately dry the surficial soils by discing these materials.
11 b. Dry the surficial soils by blending hydrated lime or fly ash with the
12 unsuitably wet soils.
13 c. Remove the unsuitably wet soils and replace the wet soil with select
14 fill or non-structural having an acceptable moisture content.
15 This option will be entirely up to the Contractor. No extra will be paid by
16 the Owner.
17
18 3.2 PLACEMENT
19
20 A. Select Fill:
21 01 Use under all building slabs, paving, sidewalks or other improved areas
22 requiring fill,and to replace unstable subgrade.
23 02 Provide and place select fill when existing subgrade is in satisfactory
24 condition,as determined by the testing laboratory.
25 03 Place under laboratory control, in layers of not more than 8 inches in loose
26 thickness, at moisture contents at or above optimum, and compacted to
27 densities of at least 95% of Standard Proctor Density, as determined by
28 ASTM D698 test procedure and at moisture contents within the range of the
29 optimum moisture content to 4 percent above the optimum moisture content,
30 inclusive.
31 04 Compaction of the select fill shall be accomplished by means of roller or
32 other approved methods which will assure bonding of layers of fill material.
33
34 B. Earth Fill:
35 01 Use in open areas which do not receive constructed improvements.
36 02 Refer to Section 02214-Finish Grading
37
38
39 PART 5-TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
40
41 A. Testing laboratory services shall be paid by the Owner.
42 B. Test types and frequencies are outlined in the specifications and in the geotechnical
43 report.
44 C. The Contractor is responsible for contacting the testing laboratory when a constructed
45 product is ready for testing.
46 D. Coordinate the above with the Geotechnical Engineer.
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54 END OF SECTION
Project No.FC 1314 02200-5
1 SECTION 02214
2
3 FINISH GRADING
4 ter
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
14
15 B. Scope of Work:fine grading to meet required finish elevations indicated on the
16 Drawings;distribution of top-soil over the site;and coordination with installation of
17 sodding and landscaping.
18
19 C. Related Work:
20 01 Section 02010—Geotechnical Investigation
21 02 Section 02110—Site Clearing and Grubbing
22 03 Section 02200—Earthwork
23 04 Section 02930-Hydo-Mulch Seeding
24 05 Section 02932-Sodding
25
26 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
27
28 A. The Contractor will be responsible to maintain and control the grading around the
29 building so that the grade is pitched to prevent water from entering the building and/or
30 accumulating in the graded areas throughout the progress of the work.
31
32 B. Utilities and other remaining obstacles shall be properly identified prior to
33 commencement of the final grading.
34
35 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
36
37 A. Testing Laboratory Services. Test results shall meet or exceed the standards.
38
39 B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
40 01 ASTM D698-78, Test for Moisture Unit Weight Relations of Soils and Soil
41 Aggregate
42 02 ASTM D2922, Tests for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in place by
43 Nuclear Methods
44 03 ASTM D1557, Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
45 Mixtures
46
47 1.4 SCOPE OF WORK
48
49 A. Work under this section consists generally of the following operations:
50 01 Disc the existing and / or filled subgrade to a depth of 6 inches using a
51 landscape scarifier,.
52 02 Remove all roots, rocks, stumps, trash and all construction debris prior to
53 rough grading.
Project No.FC 1314 02214- 1
R
1 03 Following the removal of all foreign materials,and when the rough grading is
2 completed, provide and place previously stripped material or silty or sandy
3 clay material in the amounts required to bring the rough grade to within 2
4 inches of finish grade.
5 04 Assure bonding of layers of fill material by discing in compliance with the
6 specifications.
7 05 Spread 2 inches of topsoil over graded areas after rough grading has been
8 completed and approved.
9 06 Topsoil previously stripped and stockpiled may be used,provided it meets all
10 requirements for topsoil(re:section 02200).
11 a. The Contractor shall furnish all additional topsoil that may be
12 required to provide finish elevations.
13 b. Existing topsoil and additional topsoil fill material shall be free of
14 debris,stumps,roots and stones larger than 3/4 inch diameter.
15 c. Samples of topsoil shall be submitted to the Architect and Owner
16 for approval prior to installation.
17 d. Topsoil must be suitable for rapid grass growth with little to no clay.
18 07 Final and fine grading shall be done using a tractor pulled landscape rake and
19 hand raking, removing all debris immediately prior to landscaping/ hydro-
20 mulching. The final graded ground surface shall be relatively smooth,free of
21 organic material and all construction material debris; and in suitable
22 condition to commence landscaping work.
23
24 PART 2-PRODUCTS
25
26 2.1 MATERIALS
27
28 A. Refer to Section 02200—Earthwork for description of fill and topsoil materials.
29
30 PART 3-EXECUTION
31
32 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
33
34 A. Preparation:
35 01 Upon completion of grading and prior to placement of topsoil,Contract shall
36 thoroughly remove all construction debris, weeds, foreign plants, rocks 3/4"
37 diameter or larger,and other non-soil materials.
38 02 Remove by hand or hand rake where necessary.
39
40 B. Inspection:
41 01 The Contractor, prior to placing any topsoil, shall contact the Architect and
42 Owner when the grading is complete and all foreign materials have been
43 removed, to review these areas for compliance with the contract
44 requirements.
45 02 Prior to placement of any topsoil, the Architect and Owner will review with
46 the Contractor the areas designated complete and ready for final grading.
47 03 The topsoil installation shall proceed immediately when the designated areas
48 have been reviewed and determined acceptable.
49 04 The Contractor shall contact the Architect and Owner to review the areas
50 when the topsoil has been placed, debris removed, and all final grading has
51 been completed. This review shall occur prior to any sodding, seeding,
52 hydromulching, and/or other landscaping operations proceeding within these
53 designated areas.
Project No.FC 1314 02214-2
1 05 Any construction materials,discovered or uncovered during and/or after the
2 landscaping/sodding operations,shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
3 to remove and replace each area to its finished condition.
4
5 3.2 INSTALLATION
6
7 A. Work under this section consists generally of the following operations:
8 01 Disc the existing and / or filled subgrade to a depth of 6 inches using a
9 landscape scarifier.
1003 Place topsoil material in the amounts required to bring the rough grade to
11 within 2 inches of finish sodded grade; and within 1" of areas to receive
12 hydromulch.
13 04 Assure bonding of layers of fill material by discing in compliance with the
14 specifications.
15 07 Final and fine grading shall be done using a tractor pulled landscape rake and
16 hand raking,removing all debris immediately prior to landscaping/sodding/
17 hydro-mulching. The final graded ground surface shall be relatively smooth,
18 free of organic material and all construction material debris; and in suitable
19 condition to commence landscaping work.
20 11,
21 B. Solid Sodded Areas
22 01 Grading at areas to receive solid sodding shall account for nominal thickness
23 of root base/soil included in the solid sod blankets.
24 02 Grading at solid sodded area at building perimeter shall result in top of grass
25 blanket soil flush with the bottom of the brick ledge,sidewalks and flatwork;
26 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
27 03 Sodding shall not impede the drainage of water off or over sidewalks and
28 flatwork.
29 04 Where solid sodding adjoins areas of hydro-mulched sodding, grade area to ..
30 provide a level transition from one sodded area to the other after grass /
31 hydromulch is established and fully rooted.
32
33 3.3 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
34
35 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protecting and maintaining completed
36 finish grading prior to the start of sodding and landscape work by the Owner.
37
38 B. Damage caused by surface run-off,construction vehicular traffic,use of equipment or
39 other Contractor controlled activities shall immediately be repaired and restored to
40 originally accepted state.
41
42
43 END OF SECTION
1
1
Project No.FC 1314 02214-3
1 SECTION 02282
2
3 TERMITE CONTROL
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DMSION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
14
15 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
16
17 A. Comply with all applicable governmental standards for use and storage of these
18 materials. Use these chemicals for this Work only. Unauthorized use of these chemicals
19 is strictly forbidden.
20
21 B. Subcontractors Qualifications
22 01 Applicator shall be bonded to perform this type of work.
23 02 Where local licensing is available or required, applicator shall be licensed to
24 perform this type of work.
25
26 1.3 SUBMITTALS
27
28 A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for all products proposed to be furnished,
29 including copy of EPA registration and MSDS sheets.
30
31 B. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions,
32 including application strengths/rates for all areas to be treated(i.e.building pad directly
33 below slab,grade beams,etc.).
34 01 Submit actual quantities(gallons)to be furnished for each application.
35
36 C. Affidavit: Submit a signed affidavit immediately following application of termite
37 treatment, attesting the specification compliance of the chemicals,their proportions,and
38 application.
39
40 1.4 WARRANTY
41
42 A. Warranty the Work specified herein for five years against becoming unserviceable or
43 causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming
44 materials or workmanship.
45 01 The warranty shall include a one (1) year damage guarantee for repair /
46 replacement of any damaged building materials caused by termites.
47 02 The warranty shall include an additional four(4)year service guarantee against
48 termite activity within the affected area.
49
50 PART 2-MATERIALS
51
52 A. Poison Diluent:Portable water
53
54 B. Treatment Chemical/Products:
55 01 Premise PreConstruction
Project No. Fellowship 1314 02282- 1
1 03 Other equal product containing the specified chemical(s) as approved by the
2 Architect.
3
4 C. Provide color additive for a visual indication of areas treated.
5
6 D. Only one product shall be used for all termite control treatment.
7
8 PART 3-EXECUTION
9
10 3.1 APPLICATION
11
12 A. Quantities of Working Solution: Shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for this
13 specific application.
14
15 B. Procedures
16 01 Notify the supervising authority before commencing work.
17 02 Do not apply poison to soils that are excessively wet. 11118 03 Apply solution immediately prior to placing vapor barrier or waterproofing
19 membrane.
20 04 In the event of rain prior to placement of concrete, re-apply solution in
21 accordance with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.
22
23 C. Upon completion of the entire slab-on-grade area, furnish the required affidavit and
24 warranty.
25
26
27
28
29
30 ENI)OF SECTION
31
32
33
t
1
Project No. Fellowship 1314 02282-2
1 SECTION 02500
2
3 CONCRETE PAVING AND FLATWORK
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO
7 THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
14
15 B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
16 01 Section 02200—Earthwork
17 02 Section 02214—Finish Grading
18 03 Section 03300—Cast-In-Place Concrete
19
20 1.2 REFERENCES
21
22 The current editions of the following documents govern the work,except where more restrictive items are
23 specified.
24
25 A. Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges by Texas Highway
26 Department.
27
28 B. Texas Department of Transportation
29
30 1.3 SUBMITTALS
31
32 A. Manufacturer's specifications and other data for all materials proposed to be furnished as
33 required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
34
35 B. Concrete mix designs.
36
37 C. Complete shop drawings indicating layout and location of all proposed pavement joints for the
38 Architect's approval.
39
40 D. Complete shop drawings indicating layout and location of proposed saw cut in between EP for
41 the Architects approval.
42
43 E. Manufacturer's installation instructions for all products propose to be furnished.
44
45 F. Samples:Full range of manufacturer's standard colors available for colored concrete.
46
47 PART 2-PRODUCTS
48
49 2.1 PAVING/CONCRETE MATERIALS
50
51 A. Compacted Sub-Base:as specified in Section 02200 and 02240.
52
53 B. Concrete Material:
54 01 Refer to section 03300 for general provisions of concrete material.
55 02 Aggregate shall be limestone or hard rock at paving.
Project No.FC 1314 02500- 1
1 03 All concrete used for paving shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000
2 PSI.
3 04 All concrete used for sidewalks and concrete flatwork shall have a minimum
4 compressive strength of 3000 PSI.
5
6 C. Forms: steel, wood, or other suitable material(s) of size and strength to resist movement
7 during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal.
8 01 Use straight forms free from distortion and defects. Use flexible spring steel forms
9 or laminated boards to conform to radius bends as required.
10 02 Form Coating: a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface
11 surface of concrete.
12
13 D. Reinforcing Bars: deformed billet steel bars.
14 01 Comply with provisions of Section 03300
15 02 Chairs: W.H.C. Products, Inc. - Series "G"; or Aztec "Castle" with sand plates.
16 Use type with sand cushion pads where concrete is on grade.
17
18 E. Construction Joints
19 01 Metal Keyway:tongue and groove joint, 5" wide, 24 gauge, galvanized with 18
20 gauge stake pins;Heckman Building Products,Model 95-50;or approved equal.
21
22 F. Flexible Expansion Joints
23 01 Expansion Joints - Flexible:Asphalt impregnated fiberboard, '/2" wide in sizes
24 required. All joints shall be sealed continuous with an approved paving joint sealer.
25 a. To be installed continuously at all flatwork-to-building conditions.
26 02 Cap sealant: Comply with Fed. Spec. TT-S- 00227E "Two Component", 100%
27 Urethane(light grey).All joints shall be sealed continuous.
28
29 G. Load Transfer Units
30 01 Sidewalks: 3/4 inch thick redwood form with 1/4 inch deep removable top strip,
31 1/2"x 10" steel reinforcing bars at 15 inches O.C.. +/-with bond breaker sleeve on
32 one side.
33 a. To be installed continuously at all parking lot-to-sidewalk conditions,
34 wheather shown or not.All others to be installed per plans.
35 02 Paving: 3/4 inch thick redwood form with 1/4 inch deep removable top strip, 3/4"x
36 12" steel reinforcing bars at 12 inches O.C.. +/- with bond breaker sleeve on one
37 side.
38 03 Provide custom size as required for full depth of paving and sealant depth as
39 required by sealant manufacturer.
40
41 H. Decorative Wood Joints: Where indicated in the drawing, provide construction heart grade
42 redwood joints conforming to AASHO-M-90. Provide sizes indicated on the drawings. Do
43 not install adjacent to curbs.
44
45 I. Tooled Joint: Scored 1/4"wide x 1/4"the thickness of the concrete in depth.
46
47 J. Concrete Materials:Comply with the requirements of Section 03300 for concrete materials,
48 admixtures,curing materials,and others as required.
49
50 K. Integral Coloring Admixture:Integral Color by Bomanite Corporation,synthetic oxide
51 pigment,meeting ASTM C979 and C494;or approved equal.Color as selected by Architect
52 from full range of manufacturer's colors.
53 01 Provide at all areas indicated on the drawings to be integral colored concrete.
54
55 L. Colored Concrete:Equal to Bomanite Color Hardener.Color as selected by Architect from full
56 range of manufacturer's colors.
57 01 Provide at all ramps as required by Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas
58 Department of Licensing and Registration"Texas Accessibility Standards".
Project No.FC 1314 02500-2
1
2 2.2 TACTILE WARNING SURFACE MATERIALS
3
4 A. Composition: Composite shell cast-in-place tactile warning surface units shall be
5 manufactured using a matte finish exterior grade homogeneous (uniform color throughout
6 thickness of product) glass and carbon reinforced polyester based SMC composite material.
7 Truncated domes must contain fiberglass reinforcement within the truncated dome for
8 superior structural integrity and impact resistance. A matte finish will be required on the
9 tactile warning surface for superior slip resistance performance superior to that offered by a
10 gloss finish.Use of tactile warning surface products employing coatings or featuring layers of
11 material with differing composition, performance, or color properties is expressly prohibited
12 under this Section.
13
14 B. Color: Brick Red conforming to Federal Standard 595B Table IV, Color No. 30109. Color
15 shall be homogeneous throughout the composite shell cast-in-place tactile warning surface
16 unit.
17
18 C. Domes: Square grid pattern of raised truncated domes of 0.2 inches nominal height, base
19 diameter of 0.9 inches, and top diameter of 0.45 inches. For superior wheelchair mobility,
20 truncated domes shall have a center-to-center (horizontally and vertically) spacing of 2.35
21 inches,measured between the most adjacent domes on square grid.
22
23 D. Configuration: Composite shell cast-in-place tactile warning surface unit sizes shall be as
24 indicated on the Contract Drawings. For superior load bearing capacity, tactile warning
25 surface units shall feature internal embedment ribs at 3"(nominal) on center maximum. The
26 field area shall consist of a non-slip textured surface with a minimum static coefficient of
27 friction of 0.80, wet and dry. At a minimum, tactile warning surface product thickness shall
28 measure 0.20"(nominal).
29
30 E. Cleaning materials used on site shall have code acceptable low VOC solvent content and low
31 flammability.
32
33 F. The Specifications of the concrete, sealants and related materials shall be in accordance with
34 the Contract Documents and the guidelines set by their respective manufacturers.
35
36 G. Tactile warning surface is required at the base of all accessibility ramp connecting to vehicular
37 traffic areas.Refer to Drawings.
38
39 H. Design is based on ADA Solutions Inc. Cast-In-Place Tiles; or equal. Product must meet all
40 requirements of Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Texas Accessibility Standards
41 (TAS).
42
43 PART 3-EXECUTION
44
45 3.1 SITE CONDITIONS
46
47 A. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades, and
48 verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
49 In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installat-
50 ion in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
51
52 B. Remove all loose material from compacted sub-base immediately prior to placing concrete.
53
54 C. Verify that forms have been set to the grades and lines required and that they are rigidly
55 braced and secured.
Project No.FC 1314 02500-3
1
2 3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
3
4 A. Do not place concrete in contact with frozen earth. Do not commence concrete placement
5 unless temperature is at least 35°F(2°C)and rising,or slabs until the temperature rises above
6 40°F.
7
8 B. Discontinue concrete placement when air temperatures exceed 95°F.
9
10 C. Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection is provided.
11
12 3.3 INSTALLATION—PAVING/CONCRETE
13
14 A. Joints
15 01 Construct expansion and construction joints true-to-line with face perpendicular to
16 surface of concrete.
17
18 B. Unless specifically shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall locate joints in accordance
19 with the following schedule: II
20 01 Sidewalks: maximum distance between load transfer joints shall be 4 times the side-
21 walk width. Provide scored joints in between expansion joints in equal intervals+/-
22 the width of the sidewalk.
II
23 02 Pavement Areas: load transfer joints shall be placed in each direction,in regular and
24 evenly spaced intervals, to create pavement sections not to exceed 625 sq. ft. in a
25 maximum size ratio of 1:1.5.Layout of proposed joint pattern must be approved by
26 the Architect prior to installation.
27 03 Construction joints: obtain approval of Architect for locations and types of all
28 proposed construction joints.
29 04 Do not install joints which create wedge shaped edges at the perimeter of the
I
30 pavement sections.Minimum angle allowed shall be 60 degrees.
31 05 Isolate all catch basin and inlet grates with flexible expansion joints set in a diamond
32 shape approximately 12"beyond the edge of the grate frame.
33 06 Install flexible expansion joints at all locations where flatwork or pavement is
34 poured against a building foundation or other structural footing/beam.
35 07 Tool all joints and edges to a clean rounded form using proper joint tools.
36
I
37 C. Concrete Placement
38 01 General: Comply with the provisions as specified in Section 03300.
39 02 Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation. If interrupted for more than
I
40 60 minutes,place a construction joint.
41
42 D. Finishing
111,
43 01 All concrete flatwork and sidewalks shall receive a light broom finish,perpendicular
44 to the run of the sidewalk. r
45 02 All concrete pavement shall receive a medium broom finish,parallel to the direction
46 of drainage
I
47
48 E. Colored Concrete
49 01 While concrete is still in the plastic stage of set apply Bomanite Color Hardener prior
50 to application of pattern. Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer,evenly to the
I
51 surface of the fresh concrete by the dry-shake method.Apply in two or more
52 shakes,floated after each shake and troweled only after the final floating.
53 02 While concrete is still in its plastic state,apply the tool/texture pattern to the surface
54 of the concrete. Saw cut the slab in a 12'-6 X 15'pattern. Properly tamp tools into
55 the surface to achieve the required texture,with uniformity of pattern.Utilize bond 1
56 breaker to keep tools from sticking to fresh concrete.
Project No.FC 1314 02500-4 I
I
1 03 Release material shall be applied to the troweled surface prior to imprinting.
2 04 Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing.
3 Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4 05 Apply secondary stain treatment per approved mock-up or as scheduled to achieve
5 design.
6 06 Apply finish sealer per approved mock-up or as specified to achieve design
7 required.
8 07 Apply Bomanite recommended Colorwax in accordance with manufacturer's printed
9 instructions in colors to match the colored concrete selected.
10
11 F. Curing
12 01 Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with the requirements of
13 Section 03300.
14 02 Forms shall remain in place not less than 24 hours after concrete placing.
15
16 G. Repairs and Protection
17 01 After form removal, clean ends of joints and point up any minor honey combed
18 areas. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete,as directed by the Architect.
19 02 Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of Work. Exclude traffic from
20 pavement for at least 7 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted,
21 maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of
22 materials.
23 03 Sweep all concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and all
24 other foreign materials just prior to final inspection.
25
26 3.4 INSTALLATION—TACTILE WARNING SURACE
27
28 A. Contractor will not be allowed to install curb ramps until all submittals have been reviewed
29 and approved by the Engineer.
30
31 B. Tactile warning surface product shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions.Follow the
32 TCLR latest criteria.
33
34 C. To the maximum extent possible,the tactile warning surface units shall be oriented such that
35 the rows of in-line truncated domes are parallel with the direction of the ramp. When
36 multiple tactile warning surface units regardless of size are used,the truncated domes shall be
37 aligned between the tactile warning surface units and throughout the entire tactile warning
38 surface installation.
39
40 D. In accordance with TDLR, Chapter 68.102 (Elimination of Architectural Barriers latest
41 edition),tactile warning surface product shall be located so that the edge nearest the curb line
42 is 6" minimum and 10" maximum from the curb line. This allows wheelchair users to gain
43 momentum before traveling over the truncated domes and it provides visually impaired
44 pedestrians additional time to react to the tactile warning surface or advanced warning before
45 they reach the street.
46
47 E. The tactile warning surface units shall be tamped or vibrated into the fresh concrete to ensure
48 that there are no voids or air pockets,and the field level of the tactile warning surface unit is
49 flush to the adjacent concrete surface or as the Drawings indicate to permit proper water
50 drainage and eliminate tripping hazards between adjacent finishes.
51
Project No.FC 1314 02500-5
B
1 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING-CONCRETE
2
3 A. Protect concrete paving and flatwork from damage during construction period.In the event of
4 damage,make all necessary repairs and/or replacements required.
5
6 B. Clean and prep concrete paving and curbs prior to striping and painting. Adhere to paint
111
7 manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.
8
9 C. Prior to final acceptance, thoroughly clean all paving and concrete work. Remove all tire
10 tracks, rust stains, oil stains, dirt, excessive sealant, and other debris form the finished
11 surface.
12
13 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING—TACTILE WARNING SURFACE
14
15 A. Protect tactile warning surface unit against damage during construction period to comply with
16 tactile warning surface unit manufacturer's specifications.
17
18 B. During and after the tactile warning surface unit installation and the concrete curing stage, it
19 is imperative that there are no walking, leaning or external forces placed on the tactile
20 warning surface unit to rock the tactile warning surface unit, causing a void between the
21 underside of the tactile warning surface unit and the concrete.
22
23 C. As necessary, while the Project remains under construction, protect tactile warning surface
24 units against damage from rolling loads following installation by covering with plywood or
25 hardwood.
26
27
28 END OF SECTION
Project No.FC 1314 02500-6
1 SECTION 02720
2
3 SITE DRAINAGE
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DMSION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SCOPE
15
16 A. Work Specified Elsewhere:
17 01 Finish Grading-Section 02214
18
19 1.3 SUBMITTALS
20
21 A. Product Data: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the
22 performance, fabrication procedures, product variations and accessories for grating
23 and frames.
24
25 B. Refer to Civil Drawings
26
27 PART 2-PRODUCTS
28
29 2.1 MATERIALS
30
31 A. Storm Drainage Pipe:
32 01 12" Maximum Diameter: As shown on Civil Engineering drawings,
33 polyvinyl chloride(PVC)ASTM E 3034,SDR 35.
34 02 12" - 36"Diameters: As shown on Civil Engineering drawings; corrugated
35 high-density polyethylene (PE, AASHTO-M294-871 (Hancor, Inc., ADS
36 N12,Hi-Q pipe).
37 03 Concrete Sewer Pipe: Only where specifically designated on the Civil
38 Engineering drawings. Shall be tongue and groove pipe conforming to
39 ASTM C14 for un-reinforced concrete pipe, and ASTM C76 Class III for
40 reinforced concrete pipe. All concrete pipe 12 inches in diameter and larger
41 shall be reinforced. Concrete sewer pipe larger than 12" shall be rubber
42 gasket conforming to ASTM C443.
43
44 ASTM C14-79, Specifications for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, Culvert
45 Pipe
46
47 ASTM C76-79, Specifications for Reinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain,
48 Culvert Pipe
49
50 Texas Department of Highways Specifications for Sewer Construction with
51 all amendments.
52
53 B. Gratings, Covers and Frames: Cast iron manufactured by McKinley, Neenah or
54 Vulcan. Dimensions as shown on drawings. All gratings to have slots. All grates in
55 traffic areas shall be vehicular H-1 loading rated.
Project No.FC 1314 02720- 1
r
1
I1
2 C. Mortar: Mix one part Portland Cement to two parts sharp clean mortar sand, with a
3 minimum amount of water. PP
4
5 D. Joints:
6 01 PVC Pipe: Factory pre-molded compression type, vulcanized, high grade
I
7 elastomeric compound joint meeting requirements of ASTM D3212.
8 02 Polyethylene Pipe: Gasketed coupling bands conforming to requirements of
9 AASHTO M294.
10 03 Joint Primer and Compound: Shall be Blackjack Asphalt Primer No. 041
I
11 and Talcote Cold Plastic No.052 sewer joint compound.
12 04 Box culvert joints shall be sealed with Ramneck.
13 05 R.C.P. shall have rubber gasket joints conforming to ASTM C443. Damaged I 14 pipe will be rejected.
15
16 E. Inlets and Manholes: I 17 01 All standard storm sewer manholes, inlets, and junction boxes shall be
18 constructed complete including the furnishing, adjusting to grade, and
19 installation of manhole casting and cover. The sidewalls of manholes, inlets
20 and junction boxes shall be constructed of poured-in-place concrete or brick
I
21 masonry. The bases of all storm sewer structures shall be poured in-place
22 concrete.
23 02 Precast boxes for storm sewer inlets may be used as an option. Precast boxes
24 shall be as manufactured by Brooks Products,Inc.,Monroe-Ferrell Pipe Co.,
25 Brookshire Concrete Products or Advanced Precast Concrete.
26
27 F. Concrete Design: If not shown otherwise, use a minimum of 3,000 psi, 28-day
28 compressive strength, 1 1/2 inch maximum size aggregate.
29
30 PART 3-EXECUTION
31
32 3.1 INSTALLATION
33
34 A. General: Bedding, backfilling and installation of pipe and construction of
35 appurtenances shall be in accordance with Texas Department of Highways"Sewer
36 Construction",including amendments,revisions,and drawings.
37
38 B. Pipe Installation: P
39 01 Refer to Civil Engineer drawings,general construction notes,related detailed
40 information,and reference specification. r"
41 02 Foreign material of organic nature and large rocks shall be replaced with
42 cement stabilized sand. I 43 03 The Contractor shall fix the grade elevation using laser equipment.
44 04 Drainage pipe bedding shall conform Texas Department of Highways
45 Specification, including all amendments and revisions.
I
46 05 Pipes which are not under paving may be bedded and backfilled with select
47 excavated material (Class B) free of clay lumps, organic material or other
48 deleterious material. Trench backfill may be in 12 inch loose layers, and
49 compacted equal to the density of the surrounding soil. Water tamping may P
50 not be used.
51 06 Where the pipe is under paved areas, as shown on the drawings, the trench
52 will be backfilled with cement stabilized sand to within 1 foot of the bottom k
53 of the pavement. The remaining 1 foot shall be backfilled with select
54 excavated material.
Project No.FC 1314 02720-2
1 07 Begin trench excavation at the lower end of the line and proceed upgrade to
2 protect the work from possible flooding, unless job conditions prohibit. If
3 the trench is over-excavated,bring the bed to grade and compact with cement
4 stabilized sand.
5 08 Pipe sections shall be positioned on the uniform bedding and then connected
6 in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not allow
7 rocks or foreign material to be trapped between couplings and pipe.
8 09 Tongue end of pipes shall be installed pointing in the direction of drainage
9 flow.
10 10 Backfilling shall not commence until the Architect has inspected the work.
11 Backfilling shall be carefully tamped with 6 inch layers, moistening as
12 required for proper compaction.
13 11 Cooperate with mechanical trades where storm pipe and cast iron pipe meet.
14 Contractor shall comply with Harris County requirements for the connection
15 to the existing storm sewer main and detention ponds.
16
17 C. Concrete Sewer Pipe:
18 01 Foreign material of organic nature and large rocks shall be replaced with
19 cement stabilized sand.
20 02 Excavation necessary to receive the work shall be made to the proper depth
21 by Contractor, and all piping shall be laid on a compacted 4 inch cement
22 stabilized sand bed.
23 03 Begin trench excavation at the lower end of the line and proceed upgrade to
24 protect the work from possible flooding, unless job conditions prohibit. If
25 the trench is over- excavated, bring the bed to grade and compact with
26 cement stabilized sand.
27 04 Pipe sections shall be positioned on the uniform bedding and then connected
28 in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not allow
29 rocks or foreign material to be trapped between couplings and pipe.
30 05 Tongue end of concrete pipes shall be installed pointing in the direction of
31 drainage flow.
32 06 Field apply asphalt primer to both surfaces at each joint of concrete pipe.
33 07 Apply cold plastic sewer joint with joint compound and smooth off excess.
34 08 Backfilling shall not commence until the Architect has inspected the work.
35 Backfilling shall be carefully tamped with 6 inch layers, moistening as
36 required for proper compaction. Backfill material shall be of cement
37 stabilized sand to 6 inches over pipe and select fill to grade. All backfilling
38 should be in accordance with City of Houston Class "AA" (under-paving)
39 and Class"A"(not under-paving)requirements.
40 09 Cooperate with mechanical trades where storm pipe and cast iron pipe meet.
41 10 Contractor shall comply with City Code requirements for the connection to
42 the existing storm sewer Main.
43
44 D. Grating Installation: Cast in grating frames. Form both inner and outer concrete walls
45 if precast boxes are not used. Cut pipes flush to inner face of walls.
46
47
48 END OF SECTION
49
Project No.FC 1314 02720-3
1 SECTION 02930
2
3 HYDRO MULCH SEEDING
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. This Section is not a part of the Landscaping Allowance.
14
15 B. Refer to site plan for Hydro Mulch Seeding limits.
16
17 C. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
18
19 D. Stand of Grass: 20 growing plants per square foot.
20
21 1.2 SCOPE
22
23 A. All improved areas including lawn,planting,landscaping areas,
24 B. Refer to Alternates-Section 01030
25 C. Refer to Section 01561 -Storm Water Pollution Protection Plan
26
27 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
28
29 A. Source Quality Control: Producer's test for purity and germination of seed,dated within
30 nine months of sowing.
31
32 B. Comply with recommendations of"Official Method of Analysis",Association of Official
33 Analytical Chemists.
34
35 C. Deliver fertilizer to site in bags or other convenient containers, each fully labeled
36 conforming to applicable State fertilizer laws, and bearing name, trade name or
37 trademark,and warranty of producer.
38
39 D. Do not perform seeding when wind exceeds 15 MPH,or when excessively wet or dry.
40
41 E. Restrict foot and vehicular traffic from seeded areas after planting to end of established
42 period.
43
44 F. Immediately after seeding, erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect
45 seeded areas from traffic until grass is established.
46
47 1.4 SUBMITTALS
48
49 A. Test Reports: Results of seed purity and germination tests.
50
51 B. Certificates: Manufacturer's certification that materials meet specification requirement.
52
53 1.5 WARRANTY
54
55 A. Provisional Acceptance: Planting reviewed as being in accordance with specifications.
Project No.FC 1314 02930- 1
1
2 B. Guarantee Period: Guarantee stand of grass for 90 days after provisional acceptance.
3
4 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S MAINTENANCE
5
6 A. The Contractor's maintenance of new sodding / hydro-mulch areas shall consist of
7 watering at least once every week until the Owner contractually takes possession of
8 the site or until the planting density/requirements have been met,whichever is later.
9
10 B. Protect sodding/ hydro-mulch areas at all times against damage of all kinds for the
1 1 duration of Maintenance Period. Any plants damaged or injured, because sufficient
12 protection was not provided,shall be treated or replaced by the Contractor,as directed
13 by Owner,at no additional cost to the Owner.
14
15 1.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
16
17 A. Work under this section will be accepted by the Owner upon satisfactory completion
18 of all work,including maintenance,but excluding replacement of plant material under
19 the warranty period.Upon final acceptance,the Owner will assume responsibility for
20 maintenance of the work.
21
22 B. Hydro-mulch sodding shall be deemed acceptable to transfer to the Owner when it
23 meets the above conditions and additionally has achieved a minimum 95% coverage
24 of all areas to which it was applied. All areas shall remain the responsibility of the
25 Contractor until this condition is met.
26
27 PART 2-PRODUCTS
28
29 2.1 MATERIALS
30
31 A. Seed
32
33 All seed must meet the requirements of U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and
34 Regulations as set forth in Federal Seed Act and Texas Seed Law.Type of seed,purity
35 and germination requirements,rate of application and planting dates are as follows:
36
37 Application Rate
38 Type Pounds per Acre Planting Date
39 15 to Oct 1
40 Hulled Common Bermuda 50 lbsApril
41
42 C. Hydroseed mixture shall include wood fiber, specifically made for hydroseeding,mixed
43 with water. Mix wood fiber according to manufacturer's specifications. Rate of
44 application shall be 3,000 pounds per acre.
45
46 PART 3-EXECUTION
47
48 3.1 INSPECTION
49
50 A. Check that preceding work affecting ground surface is completed.
51
52 B. Verify that soil is within allowable range of moisture content.
53
54 C. Soil is to be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before seeding.
Project No.FC 1314 02930-2
1
2 3.2 HYDRO-MULCHING
3
4 A. Preparation
5 01 After designated areas have been completed to lines,grades and cross-sections
6 shown on drawings,perform seeding.
7 02 Cultivation of seed-bed will not be required in loose sand where depth of sand
8 is 4 inches or more.
9 03 Maintain cross-section previously established throughout process of cultivation;
10 do any necessary reshaping prior to any planting of seed.
11
12 B. Location
13 01 As noted in Paragraphs 1.5 and 2.1,A.
14
15 C. Application
16
17 01 Perform seeding as described in Section 3.2,A.
18 02 Seeding which is extended beyond most favorable planting season for species
19 designated shall be done only when conditions are favorable,or when alternate
20 or corrective measures have been taken.
21 03 Hydraulically spray slurry on ground to form a blotter-like ground cover
22 uniformly impregnated with grass seed. This application will allow absorption
23 of moisture,thus allowing rainfall or mechanical watering to percolate to\
24 04 Keep mulch moist by daily application of water(if necessary), for a minimum
25 of ten days or until the seeds in the mulch have germinated and rooted in soil.
26
27 3.3 MAINTENANCE
28
29 A. The hydro mulch seeding shall be adequately watered until established. Any areas
30 damaged by erosion or areas that do not have an acceptable turfing shall be redone to the
31 satisfaction of the Architect.
32
33 B. Maintenance Period
34
35 01 Maintain new seeding for 30 days from time of provisional acceptance.
36 02 Reseed during this period.
37 03 Repair damage to other plants or lawns during maintenance period.
38 04 Seed,water,and mow as specified.
39
40 3.4 CLEANING
41
42 A. Remove barriers and signs from project site at termination of establishment period.
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
■
Mgr
I
Project No.FC 1314 02930-3 P
P
1
2 SECTION 03300
3
4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
5
6
7 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DMSION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11 1.1 REFERENCES
12
13 A. American Concrete Institute:
14 01 Detailing Manual
15 02 ACI 301
16
17 B. U.S.Federal Specifications:
18 01 Fed.Spec.SS-S-158
19 02 Fed.Spec.SS-S-164
20
21 C. American Society for Testing and Materials:
22 01 ASTM C33-379,Concrete Aggregates
23 02 ASTM C94,Ready Mix Concrete
24 03 ASTM C150,Portland Cement
25 04 ASTM C309,Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
26 05 ASTM A185,Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
27 06 ASTM A704, Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete
28 Reinforcement
29 07 ASTM A615,Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
30 08 ASTM C31,Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
31 09 ASTM C260,Specifications for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
32 10 ASTM C494,Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
33 11 ASTM C309,Liquid Membrane-Curing
34
35 D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(including latest
36 revisions)
37 AASHTO-M-213-74
38
39 E. Portland Cement Association: Joint Design for Concrete Highway and Street
40 Pavement,Concrete-Typical Pavement Sections and Jointing Details.
41
42 1.2 DESCRIPTION
43
44 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
45
46 1.3 SUBMITTALS
47
48 A. Tests and Certifications:
49 01 Before starting any work under this section, make all required arrangements
50 with the testing agency. The testing laboratory shall test and furnish certified
51 reports on proposed cements,aggregates,mixing water and admixtures.
52 02 Submit proposed design mixes for each type of concrete using previously
53 tested and approved materials.
54 03 Furnish certified reports of each proposed mix for each type of concrete.
55 03 Proportion mixes by laboratory trial batch or field experience methods,using
56 materials to be employed in the work for each class of concrete required,and
57 report to the Architect.
58 04 Refer to section 01410—Testing Laboratory Services for on-site procedures
59 and testing requirements.
60 05 Furnish ready mix delivery tickets.
61
62
Project No.FC 1314 03300-1
. 1111111111.1mw Vi "Iv
p
1 B. Shop Drawings
2 01 Required for all reinforcing steel. Show bending diagrams, splicing and laps
3 of rods,shapes,dimension and details of bar reinforcement and accessories.
4 02 Submit drawings showing location of all proposed construction and control
5 joints, keying / keyways, water stops, openings, depressions, trenches,
6 sleeves, inserts, and other items affecting reinforcement and placement of
7 concrete.
8 03 Placement sequence schedule may be combined with Item 02.
9 04 Unless shown on the Sit Plan,submit proposed layout for all expansion joints
10 in paving,flatwork and sidewalks.
11
12 C. Manufacturer's Information:
13 01 Manufacturer's data and specifications for all products proposed to be
14 furnished.
15 02 Manufacturer's complete installation procedures / instructions for all
16 products proposed to be furnished.
17
18 D. Actual Samples of Proposed Materials:
19 01 Plastic chair supports
20 02 Slab membrane(s)and tape(s)
21 03 Water stops
22 04 Stains:full range of manufacturer's available color selections
23
24 1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
25
26 A. Do not place concrete in contact with frozen earth. Do not commence concrete
27 placement unless temperature is at least 35°F (2°C) and rising, or slabs until the
28 temperature rises above 40°F.
29
30 B. Discontinue concrete placement when air temperatures exceed 95°F.
31
32 C. Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection is provided.
33
34 1.5 SCOPE
35
36 A. Refer to Alternates- Section 01030.
37
38 PART 2-PRODUCTS
39
40 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
41
42 A. Joint Sealant:
43 01 Sonneborn
44 02 Pecora
45 03 Tremco
46 04 W.R.Meadows
47
48 B. Reinforcing Chairs:
49 01 W.H.C.Products,Inc.
50 02 Aztec
51 03 No other substitutions
52
53 C. Water-stops(also refer to structural drawings):
54 01 Henry Company—Synko-Flex
55 02 Durajoint—Seal-Tite
56 03 Vinylex Corporation—Blue Stop
57
58 D. Manufacturers:Vapor Retarder i Slab Membrane
59 01 W.R.Meadows—10 Mil
60 02 Stego Industries—Stego Wrap system
61 04 Carlisle
62
Project No.FC 1314 03300-2
1
2 E. Manufacturers:Vapor Barriers
3 01 W.R. Meadows — Premoulded Membrane Vapor Seal with Plasmatic Core
4 (PMPC)system
5 02 Reef Industries—Griffolyn Vaporguard system
6 03 Alumiseal Corporation—Zero Perm system
7
8 E. Below Grade Waterproofing:Refer to Section 07111
9
10 F. Curing Compound:
11 01 Nox-Crete-Cure&Seal 100-300 E
12 02 Sonneborn—Kure-N-Seal
13 03 Shepler's—Shep-Cure 309 Rez All
14 03 W.R.Meadows—Vocomp-20
15
16 G. Wet Curing Blankets
17 01 Griffolyn Reef Industries—Transguard 4000
18 02 Raven Industries—ConKure
19
20 H. Concrete Color Pigment(Stain):
21 01 Davis Colors
22 02 New Riverside Ochre Co.,Inc.
23 03 L.M. Scofield
24
25 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
26
27 A. Concrete:
28 01 General:
29 a. Ready-mixed concrete,ASTM C-94
30 b. Comply with ACI 318.
31 c. Concrete must be approved by Architect through design mix and
32 cylinder test of testing laboratory.
33 02 Cement: Type 1,ASTM C-150,unless approved otherwise by the Architect.
34 Use one brand of cement for entire project.
35 03 Admixtures:
36 a. Approval necessary from Architect and testing laboratory
37 b. Calcium Chloride:Not permitted in floor slabs
38 c. Color Pigment: At areas indicated on drawings provide pigment at
39 5 pounds per 94 pound sack of cement. Follow manufacturers
40 recommendations.
41 04 Aggregates:
42 a. Comply with ASTM C-33.Aggregate shall be limestone at paving.
43 b. Maximum size not larger than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension
44 between forms of the member for which concrete is to be used. Not
45 larger than three-fourths of minimum clear spacing between
46 reinforcing bars.
47 c. Maximum 1 1/2 inches in building slabs.
48 05 Strengths:
49 a. 5 sack/3000 psi/28 days: all concrete including grade beams,
50 footings,slabs,pavements,walks
51 b. Strength recommendations on structural drawings supersede when
52 they are greater than specified here.
53 c. REF STRUCTURAL FOR USE OF FLYASH
54 06 Water:Drinking quality
55 07 Slump:
56 a. Reinforced foundation walls and footing—5-1/2 inch max.
57 b. Slabs,beams,columns and reinforced walls-6 inch max.
58 c. Pavement—5-1/2 inch max.
59
60 B. Metal Reinforcement:
61 01 Bars:
62 a. General: Conform to ACI Publication 315,latest edition.
63 b. Comply with ASTM A615,Grade 60.
Project No.FC 1314 03300-3
1 c. #3 bars comply with ASTM A615,Grade 40
2 02 Mesh:
3 a. Conform to ASTM A185
4 b. Shall be type which is fabricated and delivered to job site in flat
5 sheets. Rolls of mesh shall not be acceptable.
6
7 C. Joints:
8 01 Construction Joint(Building Slab):
9 a. Standard type permanent galvanized keyed contraction expansion
10 joints,with 5 stakes per 10 feet of joint length.
11 b. Joint may be left in place when concrete is placed on each side
12 simultaneously. Remove when mold as edge form prior to
13 subsequent concrete placement.
14 02 Expansion Joint:
15 a. Fiber Joint Filler: 3/4 inch thick, pre-molded asphalt impregnated
16 rigid fiber board. Comply with AASHTO M-213-74 or redwood.
17 b. Cap sealant: Comply with Fed. Spec. TT-S- 00227E "Two
18 Component", 100%Urethane(light grey)
19 03 Tooled Joint: Scored 1/4"wide x 1/4"the thickness of the concrete in depth.
20 04 Saw-Cut Joint: 1/8"wide x 3/4"to 1"deep.
21
22 D. Waterstops
23 01 Asphalt based,non-hydrophilic/non-expanding waterstop.
24 02 Continuous,flexible,moldable strip with protective wrapping.
25 03 Size: 1"wide x 3/" deep.
26 04 Design based on Henry Company SF302 Synko-Flex Waterstop;or equal.
27
28 E. Curing Compound: Water based, dissipating curing compound for freshly placed
29 concrete.
30 01 Comply with ASTM C 309 Type 1.
31 02 Minimum 18%solids.
32 03 Meets all VOC emission requirements.
33 04 Coordinate requirements of finish flooring manufacturer's to assure
34 compatibility with finish flooring to be applied over slab surfaces.
35
36 F. Wet Curing Blankets
37 01 ASTM C-171 for moisture retention and daylight reflectivity.
38 02 ASTM D5261 -minimum weight:42 lbs/1000 SF.
39 03 ASTM D5199—minimum thickness:40 mil
40 04 ASTM D4833—minimum puncture strength: 55 lbs.
41 05 ASTM D4533—minimum trapezoidal tear:40 lbs
42 05 ASTM E1347—minimum light reflectance:77%
43
44 F. Accessories:
45 01 Form Ties: Adjustable length and type which will not leave holes larger than
46 1 inch in diameter in the face of the concrete. Ties shall be such that when
47 forms are removed, no metal will be within 1 inch of the finished concrete
48 surface. The holes must be patched.
49 02 Chairs and Spacers: 'W.H.C. Products, Inc. - Series "G" or Aztec "Castle
50 Chair". Heavy-duty plastic-type sized to support all slab steel to proper
51 height. Use type with sand cushion pads where concrete is on grade.
52
53 G. Cardboard Carton Void Forms:
54 01 Wax impregnated,trapezoidal shape.
55 02 Use only if/where indicated on the structural drawings.
56
57 2.3 SLAB MEMBRANES
58
59 A. Vapor Retarder Membrane:
60 01 High strength, flexible, polyolefin resin based, Low-Permeance geo-
61 membrane vapor retarder system.
62 02 Meeting or exceeding all requirements of ASTM El 745,Class A.
Project No.FC 1314 03300-4
1 03 Maximum permeance rating of 0.025 per ASTM E 96.
2 04 Thickness: 10 mils minimum regardless if lesser thickness(es) meet
3 performance/permeance specs.
4 05 Seam Tape:High density polyethylene tape with pressure sensitive adhesive;
5 minimum 4 inches wide. Seam tape shall be same thickness as vapor retarder
6 membrane.
7 06 Penetration Boots: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and
8 pressure sensitive tape per manufacturer's instructions.
9 07 Vapor Retarder / Slab Membrane shall be a complete system including but
10 not limited to membrane, joint tape / sealant, and penetration boots as
11 supplied by the manufacturer.
12
13
14 PART 3-EXECUTION
15
16 3.1 PREPARATION
17
18 A. General:
19 01 Clean all mixing and transportation equipment; remove debris from forms;
20 wet forms thoroughly; remove ice or other coatings from reinforcement
21 which might hinder good bond; remove water from place of deposit; and
22 check reinforcement.
23
24 B. Accessories: Install anchor bolts, slots, dove-tail anchor slots, boxes, sleeves and
25 other required devices. Provide all such items not specified to be provided by other
26 trades.
27 01 Provide temporary supports to maintain accessory location/position during
28 concrete placement and initial finishing. Remove temporary supports as
29 required.
30
31 C. Coordination:
32 01 Unless specifically shown or allowed in other specification sections and/or
33 drawings, no horizontal runs of conduit, piping or other work shall be
34 allowed within the slab.
35 02 All underground conduit runs(if allowed)shall be trenched/installed within
36 the building pad, a minimum 6"below the slab. Refer to electrical drawings
37 and specifications.
38 03 Exception to 02: Only conduit runs to floor mounted or recessed receptacles
39 at finish floor may be made within the slab provided all following conditions
40 are met:
41 a. 3/4" maximum conduit size allowed to be laid directly on the slab
42 membrane at the bottom of the slab.
43 b. Length of conduit run is minimized to turn up at the nearest
44 available building component (partition, furring, etc.) to allow
45 conduit to be concealed above the slab.
46 c. Such installations are not specifically excluded in other sections or
47 drawings.
48 04 All penetrations through concrete grade beams and elevated beams shall be
49 sleeved.
50 05 Coordinate with other contractors/trades as required for proper installation
51 of interfacing work; and monitoring of such work during placement and
52 finishing of concrete. All interfacing work displaced during concrete
53 placement will be required to be moved to proper location.
54
55 D. Subgrade:
56 01 Prior to placement of slab membrane,inspect the building pad/subgrade and
57 verify that all foreign objects have been removed.
Project No.FC 1314 03300-5
1 02 Verify that the subgrade is level, compacted and evenly graded. Hand rake
2 where required.
3 03 Remove all material that could potentially puncture or stress the slab
4 membrane.
5
6 3.2 INSTALLATION
7
8 A. Forms:
9 01 Conform to the shapes. lines and dimensions of the members as shown on the
10 drawings, except as modified under Earthwork - Section 02200 of these r.
11 specifications.
12 02 Care shall be taken to assure that formwork does not stain concrete surfaces.
13 03 Slab Block-Outs:
14 a. Diamond configuration at paving drains and building slabs.
15 b. Coordinate with concrete joints,verify with Architect.
16 04 Slope exterior concrete slabs away from building and slope interior slabs to
17 floor drains. Verify all slopes with Architect prior to start of concreting.
18 05 Forms:
19 a. Grade beams shall be formed to the sizes indicated on the drawings.
20 b. Where carton forms are not required,the contractor may omit forms
21 of grade beams provided the grade beam is widened 1 1/2 inches on
22 each side in contact with the earth,
23 c. The top 12 inches (minimum) of the outside faces of exposed
24 perimeter grade beams must be formed. Unformed perimeter grade
25 beams shall not be lowed above the surface of finish grading.
26 d. If forms are used, then the widening of the grade beams are not
27 required.
28 06 Carton Forms
29 a. Where carton forms are required,both sides of the grade beam shall
30 be formed.
31 b. Fasten carton form in place to eliminate movement/shifting during
32 concrete placement.
33 c. Take all necessary precautions to keep carton forms dry prior to -•
34 concrete placement. In the event they become wet, remove and
35 replace with dry,rigid forms. I
36 07 Slab Recesses and Sloped Surfaces
37 a. Accurately fbrm all slab recesses to depths indicated on the
38 Drawings.
39 b. Where Drawings indicate slab(s) to slope, accurately form sloped
40 areas and screed to provide a uniform slope.
41 c. Contractor shall have the option to form recessed and sloped areas a
42 minimum of 2 inches deeper than indicated and top recess at a later
43 date to finished elevations.
44 08 Form Removal:
45 a. Ensure safety of the structure
46 b. In no case shall the supporting forms or shoring be removed until
47 the members have acquired sufficient strength to support their
48 weight and the load thereon.
49
50 B. Slab Membrane:
51 01 Install membrane systems in strict accordance with manufacturer's
52 recommendations and requirements,and in accordance with ASTM E-1643.
53 02 Install Vapor Retarder membrane system below all building slabs /
54 foundations on grade unless noted otherwise.
55 03 Install Vapor Barrier membrane system below all building slabs/foundations
56 on grade at all built-up wood finish flooring systems (gymnasiums, stages,
57 etc.) and below all poured urethane finish flooring (gymnasiums, etc. Refer
58 to plans for finish flooring and coordinate as required.
59 04 Start membrane at grade beam perimeter and provide continuous coverage
60 and separation between subgrade and underside of concrete slabs and beams.
61 05 Lay out membrane in as full sheets as possible, minimizing the amount of
62 joints/seams.
Project No.FC 1314 03300-6
1 06 Lap joints/ seams 4 inches minimum and seal continuously with membrane
2 manufacturer's system joint tape covering full laps in accordance with
3 manufacturer's instructions.
4 07 Cut membrane accurately around sleeves, pipe, conduit and other
5 penetrations and install penetration boot per manufacturer's standards and
6 recommendations. Seal 100% to ensure maximum water barrier
7 effectiveness.
8 08 Thoroughly inspect slab membrane and seal all membrane punctures before,
9 during and after placement of other work on top of membrane; and before
10 and during placement of concrete.
11
12 C. Reinforcing:
13 01 Cleaning Reinforcement: Free from rust, scale or other coatings which will
14 destroy or reduce the bond.
15 02 Placing Reinforcement:
16 a. Place accurately and adequately secure in position.
17 b. Reinforcement in all concrete slabs shall be held in proper locations
18 by use of plastic chairs spaced a maximum distance of 48 inches
19 o.c.,unless noted otherwise.
20 03 Coverage of Reinforcement: The metal reinforcement shall be protected by
21 the thickness of concrete indicated on the plans.
22 a. 3 inch: Concrete deposited against ground without use of forms.
23 b. 2 inch: Bars more than 5/8 inch diameter where concrete is exposed
24 to the weather,or exposed to the ground but placed in forms.
25 c. 1-1/2 inch: Bars 5/8 inch diameter where concrete is exposed to the
26 weather,or exposed to the ground but placed in forms.
27 d. 3/4 to 1 inch: In slabs and walks not exposed to the ground nor to
28 the weather, not less that 3/4 inch. Increase coverage and slab
29 thickness at auditorium seating to miss seat anchors. Refer to
30 Structural Drawings.
31 e. Not less than 1 1/2 inches in beams, girders and columns not
32 exposed to the ground nor to the weather.
33 f. 1 1/2-1 3/4 inches from top: Paving
34 04 Mesh: Locate as shown on the drawings. Place on chairs. During concrete
35 placement,verify that mesh is pulled up into concrete pour.
36
37 D. Waterstops
38 01 All non-rigid waterstops shall be installed in a continuous keyway cast into
39 the (receiving) concrete. Keyways shall be formed with 2x4's with canted
40 sides to form a trapezoid shape.
41 02 Concrete to receive waterstops shall be dry and free of contaminates.
42 03 Where required,prime concrete in accordance with manufacturer's standards
43 and recommendations.
44 04 Install waterstops in continuous lengths,firmly adhered to receiving concrete
45 surface.
46 05 Overlap at splice joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards and
47 recommendations.
48 06 Leave protective wrapping in place until ready to cover with fresh concrete.
49
50 E. Joints:
51 01 Construction Joints:
52 a. Floor slabs shall be formed using metal screed joints. Verify
53 locations of all control joints not indicated on the drawings with the
54 Architect,in ample time to avoid construction delay.
55 b. Use at cold joints in building.
56 02 Contraction Joints: Refer to Structural drawings.
57 03 Expansion Joints:
58 a. Where walks and paving terminates against curbs or buildings, and
59 at sides adjacent to curbs building or walls,whether detailed or not.
60 Verify locations with the Architect if either redwood or asphalt
61 impregnated fiber with sealant cap.
62 04 Tooled Joints:Provide scored lines on exterior concrete slabs and walks.
63 05 Saw Cut of the Slab: Shall be 1-1/2"or otherwise marked on the drawings.
64
Project No.FC 1314 03300-7
1 F. Concrete:
2 01 Batching,Mixing and Delivery Equipment: Use transit mixed concrete from
3 approved batching and mixing plant. Batch, mix and transport concrete to
4 the site in accordance with provisions of ASTM C94.
5 02 Inspection: Examine all areas and conditions under which the work of this
6 section will be performed. Correct any conditions detrimental to the
7 approved completion of the work. Do not proceed until all such conditions
8 are corrected.
9 03 Concrete Placement(general):
10 a. Place concrete in compliance with practices and recommendations
11 of ACI-304,and as specified herein.
12 b. Do not deposit concrete on concrete which has hardened sufficiently
13 to form seams or planes of weakness within the section.
14 c. Where a section cannot be placed continuously, provide
15 construction joints.
16 d. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete which is being integrated
17 with fresh concrete is still plastic.
18 e. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final location to
19 avoid segregation due to re-handling and flowing. Do not subject
20 concrete to any procedure which might cause segregation.
21 f. Screed concrete which is to receive other construction to the proper
22 level,to avoid excessive skimming and grouting.
23 g. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or
24 does not meet the required quality control limits, or which has been
25 contaminated by foreign materials.
26 04 Placement Schedule: Place concrete in conformance with a placement
27 schedule to ensure even distribution of loads.
28 a. Alternate placement to allow for shrinkage.
29 b. Where construction joints are shown or required, alternate panels,
30 allowing a minimum of 7 days curing time prior to placing adjacent
31 panels.
32 05 Conveying:
33 a. Handle concrete from point of delivery and transfer to conveying
34 equipment to the location of final deposit as rapidly as practicable,
35 and by methods which prevent segregation and loss of mix
36 materials.
37 b. Provide runways for wheeled conveying equipment from delivery
38 point to location of final deposit.
39 c. Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipment, including chutes
40 and tremies, free from hardened concrete, debris, water and other
41 deleterious materials.
42 d. Pumps may be used only if they can pump the designed mix. Do
43 not add fine aggregate or water to the mix to satisfy needs of a
44 pumping device.
45 e. Use chutes or tremies for placing concrete where a drop of 10'-0" or 0,
46 more is required.
47 06 Slab Placement:
48 a. Moisten subgrade the evening before and immediately prior to
49 placement of all paving slabs.
50 b. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,
51 within the limits of any construction joints, until the placing of a
52 panel or section is completed.
53 c. Consolidate concrete during placement by use of the specified
54 equipment, thoroughly working concrete around reinforcement and
55 into corners.
56 d. Consolidate concrete placed in beams and girders of supported slabs
57 and against bulkhead of slabs on grade, as specified for formed
58 concrete structures.
59 e. Consolidate concrete in remainder of slabs by vibrating bridge
60 screeds,roller pipe screeds or other methods not required.
61 f. Limit time of vibrating consolidation to prevent bringing an excess
62 of fine aggregate to the surface.
63 g. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straight edge, and then
64 strike off.
Project No.FC 1314 03300-8
I
1 h. Use bullfloats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free from
2 bumps and hollows.
3 i. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface; do not disturb the slab
4 surfaces prior to start of finishing operations.
5 07 Cold Weather Placing: Comply with ACI-306 to protect all concrete work
6 from physical damage and reduce strength caused by frost, freezing actions,
7 or low temperatures. Place no concrete against frozen earth.
8 08 Hot Weather Placing: Prepare aggregates, mix water and other ingredients,
9 and place, cure, and protect concrete in accordance with the requirements of
10 ACI-305.
11 09 Consolidation:
12 a. Consolidate all concrete footings,piers,grade beams,paving,etc.in
13 accordance with provisions of ACI-309.
14 b. Consolidate each layer of concrete immediately after placing,using
15 internal concrete vibrators supplemented by hand-spading,rodding
16 or tamping.
17 c. During all phases of operation,maintain a frequency of not less than
18 10,000 vibrations per minute per internal vibrator.
19 d. Provide adequate number of units and power source at all times.
20 Maintain spare units on hand to ensure adequacy.
21 e. If, in the opinion of the Architect,the equipment is not adequate to
22 accomplish proper consolidation, he may order delay in further
23 placement until adequate equipment is made available.
24 f. Maintain vibrators to assure peak efficiency at all times during
25 placement.
26
27 G. Wet Curing:
28 01 All interior slab areas shall be water cured for a minimum of five(5)days.
29 02 Cover entire area(s) with wet curing blankets as soon as possible after
30 placing and finishing the concrete without marring the surface.
31 03 Wet blankets in accordance with manufacturer's standards and
32 recommendations.
33 04 Maintain wetness of blankets by suitable means(sprinklers, drip hoses, etc.)
34 for a minimum of five(5)days prior to removal.
35
36 H Curing Compound:
37 01 Apply at all exterior concrete surfaces.
38 02 Apply complete covering of curing compound as soon as concrete is finished
39 in strict accordance with manufacturer's standards and recommendations
40 03 Coordinate with other trades as required to assure compatibility with any
41 finishes to be applied over concrete surfaces.
42
43 I. Finishes—Grade Beams and Vertical Surfaces:
44 01 Exposed surfaces of all concrete walls and grade beams shall receive a
45 rubbed finish,unless otherwise noted. Immediately after forms are removed,
46 grout pits and recesses and rub with carborundum stone to a smooth finish,
47 free from marks or honeycomb to the Architect's satisfaction. Finish exterior
48 surface 2 inches below finish grade.
49 02 Rubbed finish shall be of the finest workmanship, with uniform texture and
50 color.
51 03 Prepare samples for approval of Architect.
52 04 Protect all rubbed finish against damage during construction period.
53 Immediately before requesting final acceptance of work,the Contractor shall
54 remove protection and do such touch up and rubbing as necessary to leave
55 rubbed surfaces in perfect condition.
56 05 Miscellaneous Vertical Surfaces: Finish all vertical surfaces, including but
57 not limited to curbs, risers, low walls and stringer, while concrete is strong
58 enough to stay in place without forms yet green and able to be finished to a
59 homogeneous appearance.
60
61 J. Finishes—Interior Slabs
62 01 Spreading of dry cement for finishing is not permitted.
63 02 Flooding floor is not permitted during finishing. A limited, light/ sprinkled
64 application of water shall be permitted.
Project No.FC 1314 03300-9
p
1 03 Interior slabs to receive direct applied finish flooring (VCT, ceramic tile,
2 carpet, poured urethane, thin-set flooring, etc.): provide smooth, hard steel
3 troweled surface.
4 04 Interior slabs to receive thickset/mud-bed finish flooring(mud-set terrazzo,
5 thick-set quarry tile, etc.): floated, smooth finish. Coordinate exact
6 requirements with flooring applicator. See Alternate 1 Section 03305.
7
8 K Exterior Concrete Slabs:Refer to section 02500—Concrete Paving and Flatwork
9
10 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
11
12 A. Testing Laboratory:Perform the appropriate tests upon notification by the Contractor.
13 Refer to Section 01410-Testing Laboratory Services.
14
15 B. Tolerances:
16 01 Build flatwork true to plane within 1/4 inch of a 10 foot length.
17 02 Floor slabs used for concrete panel casting, or under wood, elastomeric, slip
18 resistant, resilient flooring, terrazzo, or thin set ceramic tile must be true to
19 plane within 1/8 inch of a 10 foot length.Verify any additional requirements
20 with the surfacing installer.
21 03 Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings, the finished floor slab shall not
22 vary more than 1/8 inch from the required finish floor slab elevation at any
23 point.
24
25 3.4 PATCHING AND CLEANING
26
27 A. After forms are removed, remove projecting fins, bolts, form ties, nails, etc., not
28 necessary for the work,or cut back 1 inch from the surface. Where, in the Architect's
29 opinion, surface defects occur, such as honeycombing, repair the defective areas as
30 directed by the Architect. Joint marks and fins in exposed work shall be smoothed off
31 and cleaned as directed by the Architect.
32
33 B. Repair defects in concrete work per ACI-301, Chapter 9, and as directed by the
34 Architect. Chip voids and stone pockets to a depth of 1 inch or more as required to
35 remove all loose material. Voids, surface irregularities, chipped areas, etc., shall be
36 filled by patching, gunite or rubbing, as directed by the Architect. Repaired surfaces
37 shall duplicate appearance of unpatched work.
38
39 C. Clean exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete to
40 the approval of the Architect.
41
42 D. Reinforce or replace any deficient work as directed by the Architect, and at no
43 additional cost to the Owner.
44
45 3.5 CLEAN-UP
46
47 A. In addition to the requirements of General Conditions, clean up all concrete and
48 cement work on completion of this portion of the work, except protective coating or
49 building papers shall remain until floors have completely cured or until interior
50 partitions are to be installed.
51
52
53 END OF SECTION
54
55
Project No.FC 1314 03300- 10
1 SECTION 03360
2
3 CONCRETE FINISHES
4
5
6
7 PART 1-GENERAL
8
9 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
10
11 A. Drawings and general provision of the Contract including General and Supplementary
12 Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections,apply to this section.
13
14 1.2 SUMMARY
15
16 A. Section Includes:
17
18 1.Lithium hardener,sealer and densifier for concrete.
19
20 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
21
22 A. Product Data:For each type of product indicated.
23
24
25 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
26
27 A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
28 testing agency,for concrete floor topping.
29
30 B. Field quality-control test reports.
31
32 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
33
34 A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077
35 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
36
37 B. Mockups: Place concrete floor topping mockups to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,
38 bonding,texture,tolerances,and standard of workmanship.
39
40 1. Build mockups approximately 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) in the location indicated or, if not
41 indicated,as directed by Architect.
42 2. If Architect determines that mockups do not meet requirements, cast others until mockups
43 are approved.
44 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of
45 Substantial Completion.
46
47
48
49
50 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
51
52 A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
53 manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other
54 components,and application.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 03360- 1
1 B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration
2 from moisture or other detrimental effects.
3
4 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
5
6 A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
7 temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other
8 conditions affecting concrete floor topping performance.
9
10 1. Place concrete floor topping only when ambient temperature and temperature of base slabs
11 are between 50 and 86 deg F(10 and 30 deg C)
12
13 B. Close areas to traffic during topping and application and, after application, for time period
14 recommended in writing by manufacturer.
15
16 PART 2—PRODUCTS
17
18 2.1 CONCRETE SEALER AND HARDENER
19
20 A. Surface Treatment: Colorless, odorless, water-based, Micro Lithium surface treatment that
21 penetrates and seals by reacting chemically with the concrete surface forming a clear, dense,
22 durable and hard inorganic topical surface layer.
23
24 01 Design Basis:Design is based upon Luma-Hard by Luma Concrete Systems.
25 02 Physical Properties:
26 a.Form:Clear,pale green,water-based solution.
27 b.Total Solids: 16%
28 c.Active Ingredients: 100%of total solids.
29 d. Specific Gravity: 1.11
30 e.pH: 11.0
31
32 PART 3—EXECUTION
33
34 3.1 EXAMINATION
35
36 A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of finish.
37 Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
38 conditions are corrected.
39
40 B. Verify that base concrete slabs comply with finish and surface profile requirements indicated
41 on the drawings.
42
43 3.2 APPLICATION
44
45 A. Start floor topping application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
46
47 B. Finish solution may be applied to newly installed concrete immediately after final finish trowel.
48 If applied by a factory or"certified contractor" or "licensed applicator", it may be used as a
49 curing compound.
50
51 C. After the finish troweling operation, use a low pressure or HVLP sprayer to apply finish
52 solution to form an even, consistent, monolithic glistening sheen, and to insure complete
53 saturation of the surface. Apply enough finish solution to keep the surface wet for 20 minutes.
54 Let the surface dry,usually 1 to 2 hours.
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 03360-2
1 3.3 PROTECTING AND CURING
2
3 A. Floor is ready for traffic and use when dry.Typical drying time is 1 to 2 hours.
4
5 B. For optimal hardening and performance results,manufacturer recommends that the surface not
6 be sanded or polished. Treated surfaces will exhibit a slight satin sheen and reduce water
7 absorption.
8
9 C. Maximum strength and resistance will develop over 7 days.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 END OF SECTION
Project No.Fellowship 1314 03360-3
SECTION 03540
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO THIS
SECTION.
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Description of Work: Work of this section includes underlayment for interior finish flooring
and is not limited to the following:
1. Maxxon Gyp-Crete Floor Underlayment covering normal project conditions and
applications.
B. Refer to Instructions to Bidders for substitutions.
1.12 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratory Fire Resistance Volume 1
www.ul.com
B. ASTM C472M Compressive strength of gypsum concrete
C. ASTM F2419 Standard Test Method for Installation of Thick
Poured Gypsum Concrete and Preparation of
Surface to Receive Resilient Flooring
D. Finished Floor Goods Procedures Maxxon Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor
Goods to Maxxon Underlayments
www.maxxon.com
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit sale sheets Gyp-Crete Sales Sheet,Acousti-Mat Ultimate Sound Control
Systems,Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments, and Maxxon's
Building Conditions Guide with project materials clearly identified for each required product or
system.
B. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified
requirements.
C. Certification of compatibility with rigid insulation specified in Building Insulation - Section
07210.
D. Manufacturer's certificate that product contains no asbestos. 1
Project No.Fellowship 1314 03540- 1
SECTION 03540
E. Manufacturer's installation instructions; including shop drawings where necessary to detail
special conditions.
1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Gyp-Crete Floor Underlayment
i) Compressive strength up to 2,200 psi
ii) Density 110 pounds per cubic foot
2. Sound Control—2009 International Building Code: Section 1207.2 & .3
i) Minimum Sound Transmission Class, 50 STC (45 if field tested)—Section 1207.2
(1) ASTM E90 and E336
ii) Minimum Impact Insulation Class, 50 IIC (45 if field tested)—Section 1207.3
(1) ASTM E492 and E1007
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Standards:
1. All materials,unless otherwise indicated, shall be manufactured by Maxxon Corporation and
shall be installed in accordance with its current printed directions and by a Maxxon Corporation
Authorized Applicator.
2. Underlayment mix shall be tested for a slump using a 2" (i.d.)x 4" (50 mm x 101 mm)cylinder
resulting in a patty size of 8 1/2" (216 mm)plus or minus 1 inch(25 mm)diameter.
3. Compressive strength tested in accordance with ASTM C 472M.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and protected from damage and
exposure from the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the
premises.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Before,during and after installation of product,building interior shall be enclosed,with adequate
ventilation and heat maintained at a temperature above 50 °F(10 °C) to allow for drying of
product.
PART 2-GENERAL
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Maxxon Corporation,Hamel,MN.Telephone: (800) 356-7887
2.2 MATERIALS
Project No.Fellowship 1314 03540-2
SECTION 03540
A. Proprietary products/systems: Poured flooring underlayment and topping products, including the
following:
1. Gyp-Crete Floor Underlayment
B. Maxxon Floor Primer:
1. Material Standard: Comply with specifications outlined in manufacturer's Design and
Installation Guide for wood.
C. Mix Water:
1. Material Standard: Potable, free from impurities and from a domestic source.
D. Sand Aggregate:
1. Sand shall meet Maxxon Sand Specification 101.
E. Maxxon Overspray Primer Sealer:
1. Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon Overspray according to
manufacturer's specifications.
F. Maxxon Acrylic Primer Sealer(Alternate to Overspray):
1. Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon Acrylic according to
manufacturer's specifications.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:
1. Installation shall not begin until the building is enclosed, including roof, windows, doors, and
any other apertures.
2. Wood substrate shall be structurally sound,properly fastened, and dry. Contractor shall clean
subfloor to remove mud, oil,grease,and other contaminating factors before arrival of the
authorized applicator.
3. Wood substrate:
i) The wood subfloor must be adequate to withstand live and dead loads with a deflection t
limitation of L/360.
ii) Wood should be agency approved 23/32"(1.8cm)T&G subfloor sheathing.
3.2 REQUIREMENTS '
A. Leak Prevention:
1. Fill cracks and voids in subfloor where leakage of slurry could occur.
B. Priming subfloor:
1. Prime substrate according to manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Application:
1. Install in accordance with reference standards and manufacturer's instructions.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 03540-3
SECTION 03540
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Mixing Proportions:
1. General Requirements: Mix proportions and methods shall be in strict accordance with product
manufacturer recommendations.
B. Application:
1. (Optional)Acousti-Mat Installations: Install Acousti-Mat following manufacturer's
recommendations and specifications
2. Pour floor topping to recommended thickness. Immediately spread and screed product to a
smooth surface. Expansion joints in all types of work shall be brought through the
underlayment.
i) Minimum Maxxon Underlayment Depth:
Substrate Depth of Pour
Wood 3/" (1.9 cm)
Acousti-Mat LP %z"(1.3 cm)
Acousti-Mat LPR 3/"(1.9 cm)
Acousti-Mat I 3/a"(1.9 cm)
Acousti-Mat II 1"(2.5 cm)
Acousti-Mat II HP 1"(2.5 cm)
Enkasonic 1"(2.5 cm)
Enkasonic HP 1"(2.5 cm)
Acousti-Mat 3 1 'h" (3.8 cm)with Maxxon Reinforcement
or Maxxon CSM(Crack Suppression Mat)
Acousti-Mat 3 HP 1 '/s"(3.8 cm)with Maxxon Reinforcement
or Maxxon CSM(Crack Suppression Mat)
C. Drying:
1. The general contractor must provide and maintain correct environmental conditions to keep the
building clean and dry,and protect against infestation of moisture from a variety of potential
sources. The general contractor must supply mechanical ventilation and heat if necessary to
remove moisture from the area until the Gyp-Crete is dry.
2. Protection from Heavy Loads: During construction,place temporary wood planking over Gyp-
Crete wherever it will be subject to heavy wheeled or concentrated loads.
3.4 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF GLUE DOWN FLOOR GOODS
A. Sealing:
1. Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon Overspray or Maxxon Acrylic
according to the Maxxon Corporation's specifications. Any floor areas where the surface has
been damaged shall be cleaned and sealed regardless of floor covering to be used. Where floor
goods manufacturers require special adhesive or installation systems,their requirements
supersede these recommendations.
2. Maxxon UWR can be used over Maxxon underlayments in low traffic areas such as utility
rooms, storage rooms and closets,as a protective surface.
B. Moisture Testing:
Project No.Fellowship 1314 03540-4
U
SECTION 03540
1. ASTM F2170 Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete. Follow the
respective floor goods manufacturers' recommendations for relative humidity requirements.
When manufacturer does not have a relative humidity requirement,refer to Maxxon's
Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments brochure
C. Finished Floor Goods:
1. There are many reference standards for the installation procedures and recommendations for
finished flooring applications over gypsum underlayments. These include instructions of the
manufacturers of the finished flooring, adhesives and thin-set as well as national agency
reference standards. The national standards are listed below:
Floorm 1.e j-; eference,Standard
Resilient ASTM F2419
Ceramic Tile TCNA F180
Wood NWFA Instructions
See Maxxon Corporation's Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon
Underlayments brochure for guidelines for installing finished floor goods. This procedure is not a
warranty and is to be used as a guideline only.
END OF SECTION
p
, I
Project No.Fellowship 1314 03540-5
1 SECTION 04200
2
3 UNIT MASONRY
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11
12 1.1 DESCRIPTION
13
14 A. Refer to Section AB and Section AF for substitutions.
15
16 B. Refer to Section AF for Pre-Qualified Sub-Contractors.
17
18 1.2 SCOPE
19
20 A. Refer to Section 01030—Alternates
21 B. Provide all masonry work as indicated on the Drawings, including CMU and Rock
22 Veneer. Reinforced CMU as structural note denote.
23 C. Provide all masonry reinforcing and ties as specified here-in.
24 D. Provide water repellant application to exterior veneer masonry.
25
26 1.3 REFERENCES
27
28 A. American Society for Testing and Materials
29 ASTM A153,Zinc Coating(Hot Dip)on Iron&Steel Hardware
30 ASTM C67,Sampling&Testing Brick&Structural Clay Tile
31 ASTM C90,Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
32 ASTM C652,Hollow Brick(Hollow Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)
33 ASTM C744
34 ASTM C140
35 CRSI,"Manual of Standard Practices"
36
37 1.4 SUBMITTALS
38
39 A. Product Data: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the
40 performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories for all
41 products proposed to be furnished..
42
43 B. Samples
44 01 Each type of finished Stone to be provided in quantities sufficient to show
45 range of color where applicable.
46 02 Samples of CMU ties proposed to be furnished.
47 03 Samples of full range of actual mortar color selections. Paper or digital
48 samples are not acceptable.
49 04 Sample of mortar deflector proposed to be furnished.
50
51 C. Sample panel: Sample panel shall be 4' long x 4' high panel showing selected color
52 range and texture, bonding, mortar color, joint shape, and quality workmanship.
53 Include a brick expansion joint. Sample panel shall remain at the jobsite until all
54 masonry is completed.
55 01 Panel shall be"L" shaped(4' x 4')with wood stud/sheathing back-up wall
56 on one side and Rock back-up on one side.Coordinate as required with other
57 trades.Install vapor barrier on the sheathing.
58 02 Once accepted by the Architect, the sample panel shall be the standard by
59 which installed is judged.
60
61 1.5 INSTALLATION CONFERENCE: Refer to Section 01420 - Notification of Architect
62 Requirements
63
Project No.Fellowship 1314 04200- 1
,
F
1
2 1.6 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
3
4 A. Architect may require tests and inspections as necessary to verify quality and strength
5 of brick materials, mortar., grout, and workmanship. Laboratory tests of materials,
6 mortar,and grout will be made per ASTM standard procedures.
7
8 B. Owner will select Testing Laboratory and Owner will pay for all work required by
9 Testing Laboratory.
10
11 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND PROTECTION
12
13 A. Deliver and store materials in dry protected areas off ground. Keep free of stain or
14 other damage before, during and after installation. Replace any damaged material at
15 no cost to Owner.
16
17 1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
18
19 A. Cold Weather Protection:
20 01 No masonry shall be laid when the temperature of the outside air is below
21 40° F, unless protection measures are employed and pre-approved by the
22 Architect.
23
24 B. Protection measures for cold weather erection include maintaining space and masonry
25 unit temperatures of at least 40°F for 48 hours,prior to and after erection.
26
27 1.09 WARRANTY
28
29 A. Warrant the work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or
30 causing an objectionable appearance, resulting from either defective or
31 nonconforming materials and workmanship. t
32
33 B. Defects shall include,but not be limited to the following: w'
34 01 Noticeable deterioration of unit or mortar finish.
35 02 Chalking or dusting excessively.
I
36 03 Changing sheen in irregular fashion.
37
38 PART 2-PRODUCTS
39
I
40 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
41
42
43 A. Stone Veneer
I
44 Type 01 Stone:$200/Ton allowance for stone,delivered
45 Type 02 CMU:4"Split face veneer
46
47 B. Masonry Reinforcing,Anchors and Ties
48 01 Heckmann Building Products(basis of design)
I
49 02 Dayton Superior/Dur-O-Wal
50 03 Wire-Bond
51 04 Hohmann&Barnard(HB)
52
I
53
54
55
56 2.2 MATERIALS
I
57
58 A. Masonry Veneer-Stone Veneer:
59 01 Sizes: Size will vary from the face Stone X 3"thick.
60 02 Colors:
61 a. Color will be selected by the Architect
62 03 Provide solids and shapes as required(all colors) I
63
Project No.Fellowship 1314 04200-2
4
1 B. Masonry Veneer-CMU:
2 01 Size:4"x 8"x 16"
3 02 Color:704 split face block(by Headwaters)
4 03 Shapes:full,halfs,and corners as required
5
6
7
8 C. Mortar:
9 01 Materials for Mortar:
10 a. Hydrated Lime:ASTM C-207,TYPE"S"
11 b. Portland Cement:ASTM C-150,Type 1.
12 c. Water:Clean and potable
13 d. Sand:ASTM C-144
14 02 Mix Design:(Proportions by volume)
15 a. Type:ASTM C-270,Type"S"
16 b. Proportions: 1 part cement, 1/2 part hydrated lime and 4-1/2 parts
17 sand to provide a compressive strength of 1800 PSI in 28 days.
18 c. Mixing: Thoroughly machine-mix for at least 5 minutes after all
19 material is in mixer.
20 d. Do not use calcium chloride
21 b. Compressive Strength: 1800 psi at 28 days
22 03 Materials for Mortar:
23 a. Hydrated Lime:ASTM C-207,TYPE"N"
24 b. Portland Cement:ASTM C-150,Type 1.
25 c. Water:Clean and potable
26 d. Sand:ASTM C-144
27 04 Mix Design:(Proportions by volume)
28 e. Type:ASTM C-270,Type"N"
29 f. Proportions: 1 part cement, 1 part hydrated lime and 6 parts sand to
30 provide a compressive strength of minimum 750 PSI in 28 days.
31 g. Mixing: Thoroughly machine-mix for at least 5 minutes after all
32 material is in mixer.
33 h. Do not use calcium chloride
34 05 Mortar Colors:
35 a. Concrete Masonry Units: Use standard cement color.
36 b. Stone: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range
37 of colors — minimum of 12. Submit sample to Architect for
38 approval.
39 06 Grout
40 a. Grout in cavities of CMU shall consist of one part Portland Cement,
41 2-1/2 parts sand, two parts pea gravel, and adequate water to
42 produce a concrete of approximately ten inches of slump. The grout
43 will have compressive strength of 2,500 psi in 28 days. REF
44 structural for locations
45 b. Grout the cavities with reinforcing solid without any voids. Do not
46 over vibrate the steel.
47
48 D. Reinforcement/Tie Systems:
49 01 General: Reinforcement used in all wythes shall be hot-dipped galvanized
50 after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153.
51 02 At Solid Multiple Wythe Masonry Walls And Single Wythe Masonry Walls
52 & Double Wythe Masonry Walls Without Insulation Board: Use #9 gauge
- 53 truss type reinforcing. Pre-fab corners and tees shall be used at all wall
54 corners and intersections; width shall be 2" less than nominal thickness of
55 walls. Provide configuration(s) for single and multiple wythes as
56 recommended by the manufacturer. Equal to Dur-O-Wal "Single or Multi
57 Wythe Truss".
58 03 At Double Wythe Cavity Walls With Insulation Board: Use #9 gauge truss
59 type with 3/16" adjustable pintle wall ties. Width of truss reinforcement shall
60 be 2 inches less than the nominal thickness of wall. 3/16" wall tie eye
61 sections welded at 16" o.c. extended as required for insulation thickness.
62 Pre-fab corners and tees shall be used at all wall corners and intersections.
63 Equal to Dur-O-Wal"Dur-O-Eye".
64 04 At All Veneer Masonry Walls with wood Stud Partitions Back-up Wall —
65 With Rigid Insulation: Hot-dip galvanized, two-piece adjustable veneer
Project No.Fellowship 1314 04200-3
1 anchor consisting of L-shaped plate and 3/16"diameter wire tie to extend to
2 3/4 inch from outside face of veneer. Tie shall be a Equal to Hohmann &
3 Barnard HB-200 series two-piece adjustable ties.
4 05 At All Veneer Masonry Walls with wood Stud Partitions Back-up Wall —
5 Without Rigid Insulation: Triangular tie and screw on anchor strap. Tie
6 shall be a 3/16" diameter triangle wire tie and shall be extend to 3/4 inch
7 from outside face of veneer. Equal to Hohmann& Barnard (HB) DW10HS
8 series or Hohmann&Barnard HB-200 series two-piece adjustable ties.
9
10 06 Control Joint Anchor: Equal to Heckman No. 351 anchor at brick veneer,
11 and No.350 at block walls. p
12 07 Cast Stone: Equal to Heckman No. 152 and 152A, located as per
13 manufacturer's recommendations.
14
15 E. Masonry Cleaning Products:
16 01 Cleaning materials for the purpose of removing excess mortar,job dirt and
17 normal job stains from light colored brick and tile units which are not subject
18 to metallic stains shall be Sure Klean® 600 Detergent manufactured by
19 Prosoco.,Irving,Texas;or approved equal.
20 a. Specific Gravity: 1.117
21 b. pH: 0.3(1:6 dilution)
22 c. Flash Point: None
23 d. Freeze Point: -30°F(-34.4°C)
24 e. Wt/Gal.: 9.3 lbs.
25
26 02 Cleaning materials for purposes of removing excess mortar, job dirt and
27 normal job stains from brick and tile units which are subject to metallic
28 oxidation stains shall be Sure Klean® Vana Trol® manufactured by ProSo
29 Co.,Irving,Texas; or approved equal.
30 a. Specific Gravity: 1.117
31 b. pH: 0.3(1:6 dilution)
32 c. Flash Point: None 0:
33 d. Freeze Point: -30°F(-34.4°C)
34 e. Wt/Gal.:9.3 lbs. ik
35
36 03 Cleaning material for removal of excess mortar and job dirt from brick,
37 concrete, tile and stone surfaces shall be Enviro Klean® Mortar & Grout
I
38 Remover manufactured by ProSo Co.,Irving,Texas;or approved equal.
39 a. Flash Point: None
40 b. Specific Gravity: 1.00
41 c. pH: 1.6(dilute 1 pound of powder to 1 gallon of water) 11142
43 04 Consult masonry supplier/manufacturer to confirm proper selection of
44 cleaning detergent to minimize reaction from metallic or other mineral
45 deposits.
I
46
47 F. Masonry Water Repellant Sealant:
48 01 Water Repellant Sealant materials shall be Sure Klean® Weather Seal
49 Siloxane PD manufactured by Prosoco,Irving,Texas;or approved equal.
I
50 a. Solids:7.0%
51 b. Specific gravity:0.998
52 c. Flash point:>200 degrees f(>93 degrees c)(astm d 3278
53 d. Voc:203 grams/liter(astm d 3960)
I
54 e. Freeze point:32 degrees f(0 degrees c)
55
56
57
I
58 PART 3-EXECUTION
59
60 3.1 PREPARATION OF MATERIALS
61 I 62
63
Project No.Fellowship 1314 04200-4
1 A. Stonework: Dampen Stone before laying in a manner consistent with the nature of the
2 Stone,the mortar,and the weather conditions.
3
4 B. Mortar and Grout:
5 01 Use suitable containers for material measurement. Measuring sand by the
6 shovel is not acceptable.
7 02 Mix a minimum of 5 minutes
8 03 Consistency will completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout
9 04 Use within 2-1/2 hours of initial mixing.
10 05 Mortar or grout shall not be used if curing has progressed to yield a stiff
11 consistency.
12
13 D. Reinforcement:
14 01 Reinforcement shall be free from lose rust and other coatings that would
15 reduce the bond.
16 02 Cut accurately to length and bend by such methods as will prevent injury to
17 the material.
18 03 Straighten out kinks or bends.
19
20 3.2 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES STRUCTUAL
21
22 A. Maximum Variation from Plumb:
23 01 In lines and surfaces of columns,walls and at rises:
24 a. 1/4" in 10'(1:480)
25 b. 3/8"in 20'(maximum)
26 c. 1/2"in 40'(1:960)
27 02 For external corners,expansion joints and other conspicuous lines:
28 a. 1/4" in 20'(maximum)
29 b. 1/2"in 40'(1:960)
30
31 B. Maximum variation from level:
32 01 1/4"in any bay or 20'
33 02 1/2" in 40'(1:960)
34
35 3.3 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES VENEER OR EXPOSED SURFACES
36
37 A. Maximum variation from Plumb and Plane.
38 01 Lay up masonry plumb and in straight line to Architect's approval. Rejected
39 wall will be torn down and re-laid without compensation.
40
41 3.4 INSTALLATION
42
43 A. Contractor shall use all means necessary to assure all masonry work is adequately
44 braced at all times during erection.
45
46 B. General:
47 01 Do not use chipped Stone.
48 02 Use masonry saws to cut and fit exposed units.
49 03 Lay units plumb,true to line,and with level courses accurately spaced within
50 allowable tolerances.
51 04 Do not furrow bed joints.
52 05 Stop off horizontal run by racking back in each course; toothing is not
53 permitted.
54 06 Adjust units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic.
55 07 If units are displaced after mortar has stiffened, remove, clean joints and
56 units and re-lay with fresh motor.
57 08 When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry:
58 a. Remove loose masonry units and mortar
59 b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying
60 fresh mortar.
61
62 C. Metal Door Frames Anchored to Masonry: Fill jamb frames solid with mortar as
63 work progresses. Install masonry anchors, securing to frame and adjacent vertical
64 reinforcement.Fill head frame solid with mortar prior to installing lintel units.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 04200-5
1
2 D. Lintels and Bond Beams: Provide reinforced unit type, except where steel lintels are
3 shown. Use reinforcing bars as shown on the drawings. With concrete, completely
4 fill in lintel block and bond beams. Provide 8 inch bearing at end of lintels.
5
6 E. Partitions Tops: Allow space at top of horizontal spanning walls for compressible
7 joint back-up and sealant as specified in Sealant section. Anchor top of walls to deck
8 or structure.
9
10 F. Stone Ledge and Through Wall Flashing:
11 01 Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections which might
12 puncture or otherwise damage flashing material.
13 02 Place through-wail flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar.
14
15 G. Mortar Beds:
16 01 Place mortar in a manner which will result in the development of adequate
17 bond between the masonry and the reinforcement.
18 02 Lay units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical/head joints in
19 all courses. w.
20 03 Provide sufficient mortar on ends of masonry unit to fill head joints.
21 04 Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent
22 masonry units in place.
23 05 Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting in place.
24 06 Where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started
25 to set,remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar.
26
27 H. Weepholes:
28 01 Provide weepholes in head joints in first course immediately above all
29 flashing at all exterior Stone walls.
30 02 Leave head joint free and clean of mortar.Provide a temporary strip of rope
31 at each weep to be removed upon completion of panel.
32 03 Spacing:30 inch a.c.maximum
33 04 Keep weepholes and area above flashing free of mortar droppings.
34
35 I. Cavity:
36 01 The level to which brick cavities shall be free of excess mortar shall be as
37 established and approved on the masonry mock-up wall. Keep masonry
38 cavity clean and free of excess mortar.
39 02 Carefully lay first course at stone ledge and lintels, making sure that cavity is
40 clean of all excess mortar which my impede the flow of moisture through
41 weep holes.
42 03 As work progresses, trowel and remove all protruding fins in cavity flat on
43 inner surface of the wythe brick cavity.
44 04 Take all necessary precaution to not allow excess mortar to drop within
45 cavity from the inner surface of the wythe.
46 a. Use wood strips with attached wire pulls or other suitable means to
47 collect all loose mortar below the course being laid.
48 b. Remove all mortar and clean the device at regular intervals while
49 mortar is still elastic and able to be removed without disturbing
50 masonry already laid above it.
51 05 Cavities shall be inspected and excess mortar within the masonry cavity shall
52 be grounds for removal and replacement of masonry if no other practical
53 means is available to remove excess mortar;all at contractor's expense.
54
55 J. Mortar Joints and Patterns:
56 01 Lay rock in pattern existing rock.
57 03 Provide flush joints where concealed from view and where dampproofing is *"
58 scheduled.
59 04 Provide standard concave tooled joint where masonry is exposed to view for
60 stone.
61 05 All mortar joints to be of consistent size.
62 06 Refer to the drawings for paver patterns.
63
64 K. Reinforcement/Tie Systems:
65 01 General:
Project No.Fellowship 1314 04200-6
1 a. Completely embedded in mortar or grout
2 b. All reinforcement consisting of bars or wire 1/4 inch or less in
3 diameter, embedded in the horizontal mortar joints, shall have no
4 less than 5/8 inch mortar coverage from the exposed face.
5 c. Veneer anchors at sheathing covered wood stud exterior walls shall
6 be attached on outside face of sheathing using cadmium plated sheet
7 metal screws. Spacing shall be 16 inch o.c.horizontally and 16 inch
8 o.c.vertically.Rock shall be in code plus minus of 16"each way,
9 d. Veneer anchors back up shall be the same as paragraph "D" above,
10 except anchors shall be attached directly to wood stud with
11 cadmium plated sheet metal screws.
12
13
14 L. Corners: Connect corners with No. 9 galvanized wire or corrugated tie using one tie
15 for each 4 inches of nominal wall thickness.
16
17 M. Expansion Joints/Control Joints:
18 01 The mortar joint which stops at the expansion joint cavity shall be struck
19 flush with the masonry unit, producing a continuous flat surface for the
20 sealant to adhere to.
21 02 Place masonry control joints as indicated on the drawings. If not indicated,
22 place joints at 20'-0" O.C. maximum. Coordinate with Architect for exact
23 locations.
24 03 Provide control joints at structural columns to isolate movement from
25 continuing or intersecting walls and columns.
26
27 N. Sealant Joints:
28 01 Allow for sealant joints around outside perimeters of exterior doors,window
29 frames and other wall openings.
30 02 Uniform depth:3/4 inch
31 03 Uniform width: not less than 1/4 inch and not more than 1/2 inch.
32 04 Provide sample for Architects approval.
33 05 Refers to drawing for locations and details of accent joints.
34
35 3.4 CLEANING
36
37 A. At completion of the work,fill and retool holes in joints of exposed masonry surfaces
38 with mortar. After pointing has set and hardened, clean exposed masonry surfaces
39 with cleaning agent recommended for each type of masonry used. Leave masonry
40 clean,free of mortar daubs and with tight mortar joint throughout. After brickwork is
41 set, protect all edges and corners from damage. The cleaning shall be in accordance
42 with manufacturers printed instructions for type of cleaning agent used.
43
44 3.4 MASONRY WATER REPELLANT SEALER
45
46 A. Upon completion of cleaning all masonry surfaces, apply the masonry water repellant
47 sealant material to all masonry surfaces using a low pressure
48
49 B. Application:Before applying,read"Protect"and"Precautionary Measures"sections
50 in the Manufacturer's Product Data Sheet for Weather Seal Siloxane PD. Refer to the
51 Product Data Sheet for additional information about application of Weather Seal
52 Siloxane PD. Do not dilute or alter.Water repellant must be used at all interior
53 and exterior masonry locations.
54
55 C. Vertical Application Instructions
56 01 For best results,apply protective treatment "wet-on-wet"to a visibly dry and
57 absorbent surface.
58 02 Alternate Application Methods
59 a. Spray: Saturate from the bottom up,creating a 4"to 8"(15 to 20
60 cm)rundown below the spray contact point.Let the first application
61 penetrate for 5-10 minutes.Re-saturate.Less will be needed for the
62 second application.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 04200-7
1 b. Brush or roller: Saturate uniformly.Let protective treatment
2 penetrate for 5 to 10 minutes.Brush out heavy runs and drips that
3 don't penetrate.
4 c. Dense Surface Application Instructions
5 Apply ina single,saturating application with no run down.Back
6 roll all runs and drips to ensure uniform appearance.DO NOT
7 OVER APPLY.One application is normally enough.Always test.
8 03 Horizontal Application Instructions
9 a. Saturate in a single application.Use enough to keep the surface wet
10 for 2 to 3 minutes before penetration.
11 b. Brush out puddles until they soak in.Treated surfaces dry to touch
12 in 1 hour.C.Protect surfaces from rainfall for 6 hours following
13 treatment.Many surfaces need several days to develop full water
14 repellency.
15
16 3.5 PROTECTION
17
18 A. Cover over all unfinished work at night against the elements with plastic sheet,
19 building paper, heavy canvas or other material approve by Architect to prevent water
20 from entering cavities.
21
22
23 END OF SECTION
p
p
1
i
p
Project No.Fellowship 1314 04200-8
p
1 SECTION 05500
2
3 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16 A. American Institute of Steel Construction
17
18 B. American Welding Society
19
20 C. American Society of Testing Materials
21
22 D. American Iron and Steel Institute
23
24 1.3 SUBMITTALS
25
26 A. Comply with Section 01300.
27
28 B. Shop Drawings:
29 01 Complete shop drawings for the Architect's approval. Show all layouts,
30 sizes, methods of construction and installation, including sizes and types of
31 all fastening devices.
32 C. Samples as noted.
33
34 1.4 SCOPE
35 A. Refer to Alternates-Section 01030
36
37 PART 2-PRODUCTS
38
39 2.1 MATERIALS
40
41 A. Structural Steel: Comply with ASTM A36
42
43 B. Welding: Comply with American Welding Society Code.
44
45 C. Bolts:
46 01 Comply with ASTM A307
47 02 Size:3/4 inch,unless otherwise noted.
48
49 D. Anchors:
50 01 Expansion Bolts:
51 a. Rawl Calk-Ins or Arrow Series 4000, 1/4 inch or less.
52 b. Rawl Multi-Calks - greater than 1/4 inch. Top shall be 1/2 inch
53 below concrete surface.
54 02 Molly Screw Anchors:
55 a. In walls 1/16-5/8 inch thick,use"S" length
56 b. In walls 5/8-1 1/4 inch thick,use"L"length
57 c. In walls 1 1/4- 1 3/4 inches thick,use"XL" length.
58
Project No.Fellowship 1314 05500- 1
1 E. Shop Priming:
2 01 Shop coat any ungalvanized ferrous metal with primer.
3 02 Clean iron and metal to be primed of scale, dirt and dust by steel scrapers,
4 wire brushers or sandblasting. Remove oil and grease with petroleum
5 naptha.
6 03 Thoroughly work paint into all joints by brush. Overall application of brush
7 or spray coat of red lead primer per Fed. Spec.TT-P-86.
8 04 Give any painted built-in portions one field coat of primer on all abraded
9 parts after installation.
10
11 F. Galvanized Metal:
12 01 Comply with ASTM A123.
13 02 General: Galvanized all steel sections which are fully or partially exposed to
14 weather, regardless if they are scheduled to receive a finish coat of paint or
15 not.
16 03 Galvanized items to be painted shall be primed as outlined in Painting and
17 Staining Section.
18 04 Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
19 05 Silicone protective coating shall not be used at galvanized items scheduled to
20 receive paint.
21
22 G. Aluminum:
23 01 Extruded sections from alloy 6063-T52, meeting the requirements of ASTM
24 B221
25 02 Clear anodized finish samples to be submitted for approval on each item.
26 Submit sample of finish weld.
27 03 Custom fabricate as shown on the drawings. Grind all welds smooth and
28 flush to match adjoining exposed surfaces. Provide cast wall brackets -
29 Julius Blum#376
30 04 All fasteners shall be stainless steel with tamper proof bolts and no pop
31 rivets. Provide flush counter sunk heads.
32 05 All pipe rails shall be schedule 40 and have welded connections with
33 male/female splice connections, and have a completely smooth flush finish.
34 All corners and angles shall be custom prefabricated. All splices shall occur
35 at supports.
36 06 Handrail&Guardrail Manufacturers:
37 a. Alumfab,Inc.
38 b. Architectural Art Manufacturing,Inc.
39 c. Julius Blum&Co.,Inc.
40 d. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh
41 e. McNichols. "`
42 f. Crane Veyor Corp.
43 g. Daniel Industrial Metals Inc. ''
44 h. Poma Corp.
45 i. Rippel Architectural Metals,Inc. r
46 j. Superior Aluminum Products
47 k. R&B Wagner,Inc. •
48 07 Exterior rails shall be all welded construction
49 08 Provide clear epoxy coating where aluminum is in direct contact with r
50 concrete(only)
51 r
52 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS
53
54 A. The following is a list of the principal miscellaneous metal items to be furnished under
55 this section. This list is offered only as a guide and Contractor shall thoroughly check
56 Drawings for other miscellaneous metals.
57
58 01 All items exposed to the exterior shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
59
60 B. Pipe Bollard/Guard Post: Provide and install schedule 40 steel pipe bollard/guard
61 post, in fixed and/or removable configuration as detailed on the drawings. Fill with
62 concrete after installation.Hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
I
63
64
f
p
Project No.Fellowship 1314 05500-2
0
F
1
2 C. Handrails&Brackets:
3 01 Exterior Steel Handrails furnish and install 1 1/2 inch diameter schedule 40
4 steel pipe rails & posts galvanized and brackets shall be wall type or floor type
5 sleeves as indicated.
6
7 02 Interior Steel Handrails shall have matching plate with 4 screws into the
8 flange. In concrete the post shall be in recessed in sleeves. Include all other parts
9 required for finished installation. All work shall be in accordance with codes and
10 access standards. Handrails shall be Painted with a high gloss finish.
11
12 D. Foot Scrapers: Fabricate from steel shape as shown on drawings.Weld joints and grid
13 smooth.Hot dip galvanize after fabrication.
14
15 E. Signs: NA
16
17 F. Steel Ladders and Loose Lintels - Fabricate from steel shapes as shown; weld joints
18 and grind smooth.Hot dip galvanize after fabrication.
19
20 G. Masonry Anchors at Steel Columns: Fabricate from 5/16 inch diameter steel,
21 galvanized after fabrication;field weld to columns,space not more then 24 inches o.c.
22 vertically to coincide with horizontal mortar joint elevations. Refer to Structural
23 drawings.
24
25 H. Expansion Joint Covers:Anodized extruded aluminum expansion joint covers,
26 01 Design is based on Conspec Systems(C/S)Group expansion joint covers.
27 02 Floor-to-floor model GFT-200.
28 03 Floor-to-wall model GFTW-200.
29 04 Wall-to-wall model AFW and model AFWC.
30 05 Other approved manufacturers providing equal products include Pauling
31 Corp.,D&B,M&M Systems and Balco.
32
33 I. Access Doors: 2'-0" x 3'-0" unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified in
34 Divisions 15 and 16. Standard type flush steel doors for wallboard or masonry
35 construction in sizes and locations as shown on the drawings. Provide one at each
36 restroom plumbing chase wall if not indicated on drawing.Provide one 2'x 2'ceiling
37 access panel at each restroom with solid gyp board ceiling. Locations as indicted by
38 the Architect's field representative.
39 01 Acceptable Manufacturers:
40 a. Bar-Co.
41 b. Cesco Products
42 c. J.L.Industries
43 d. Karp Associates
44 e. Milcor Inc.,Nystrom Inc.
45 f. Williams Brothers Corp.
46
47 J. Frame Supports: Construct frame supports for all aluminum entrances and storefront/
48 curtain walls as detailed and required for a rigid assembly of the aluminum framing.
49
50
51 L. Miscellaneous Angles: Sizes and shapes as detailed.Use specified galvanized steel for
52 angles at exterior conditions.
53
54 M. Below and Above-Ceiling Supports: Construct of Unistrut members or as approved
55 by Architect to size and shape detailed. All work shall be accurate to +/-1/8 inch.
56 Provide supports complete with fastenings to structure for overhead equipment.
57
58
59 O. Trench Covers and Frames: Balco Type TST Series interior trench frame and cover
60 suitable for insertion of VCT finish flooring. Aluminum plate shall be minimum 1/4
61 inch thick with a recessed design to accept VCT floor tile. Frame shall be set 1/8 inch
62 above concrete floor so that the finished top is flush with the finished VCT floor.
63 01 Additional Acceptable Manufacturers:
64 a. Architectural Art Manufacturing
65 b. MM Systems Corp.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 05500-3
1
2 P. Ceiling Hung Equipment Supports: Provide supports and trim as indicated at in
3 drawings.
4
5 Q. Miscellaneous Items: Miscellaneous metal items and their related components are not
6 necessarily individually described. Miscellaneous items not described shall be
7 furnished and installed in accordance with the intent of the drawings and
8 specifications,and as required to complete the work.
9
10 R. Ladders will be as detailed.Anchor to floor with angles.Round rungs will be 3/"and
11 the side of the ladders will 3"X 3/8".
12II I
13 PART 3-EXECUTION
14
15 3.1 INSTALLATION I
16
17 A. Separate all dissimilar metals.
18
19 B. Where welding is exposed to view, welds shall be executed neatly then ground
20 smooth. Pits and blemishes are not acceptable.
21
22 C. For manufactured items,adhere to printed manufacturer's installation instructions.
23
24 D. Refer to Painting Section for items that are to receive paint.
25
26
III
27 END OF SECTION
28
I
Project No.Fellowship 1314 05500-4
1 SECTION 05520
2
3 METAL HAND RAILS
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
13
14 B. Steel pan type stairs and landings, with integral handrails and balusters,plats, angles,
15 hangers,struts and welds for securing to building structure.
16
17 C. Related Work:
18 01 Section 03300-Exterior Concrete Slab
19 02 Section 09900-Painting
20
21 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22
23 A. Reference Standards:
24 01 ASTM A53-Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe
25 02 FS TT-P-86-Paint,red-lead base,ready mixed
26
27 1.3 SUBMITTALS
28
29 A. Refer to Section 01300.
30
31 B. Shop Drawings:
32 01 Indicate construction details, sizes of metal sections, thicknesses of metals,
33 profiles, attachments, dimensions and field joints, method of support from
34 structure,work to be built-in or provided by other sections and finishes.
35 02 Indicate welded connections, both shop and field, using standard AWS
36 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
37
38 1.4 WARRANTY
39
40 A. Warrant the work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or
41 causing an objectionable appearance, resulting from either defective or
42 nonconforming materials or workmanship.
43
44 B. Warrant that all assemblies,components,and parts specified comply with the Contract
45 Documents and local restrictions, and are compatible with each other, adjoining
46 substrates,materials,work,and other conditions of installation and expected use.
47
48 PART 2-PRODUCTS
49
50 2.1 MATERIALS
51
52 A. Pipe: Welded and seamless steel type,ASTM A53,type S,schedule 40,plain finish
53
54 B. Bolts,Nuts and Washers:High strength steel type,ASTM A325
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 05520- 1
1 C. Welding Materials: Applicable AWS D1.1,type required for materials being welded.
2
3 D. Primer: Red lead,FS TT-P-86
4
5 E. Wire mesh panel inserts: Plain Steel, 2" square opening, .25"wire diameter,Welded
6 wire mesh by McNichols,or Equal
7
8 2.2 GENERAL FABRICATION
9
10 A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.
11
12 B. Fabricate integral railings and component connections capable of resisting a lateral
13 force of 150 lbs.minimum,at any single point,without permanent set or damage.
14
15 C. Fit and shop assemble sections inlargest practical sizes.
16
17 D. Accurately form and fit components and connections. Grind exposed edges and welds
18 smooth and flush.
19
20 E. Accurately form components required for proper anchorage of stairs, landings and
21 integral railings to each other and to building structure.
22
23 F. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to prime
24 painting. Allow to dry thoroughly before applying priming materials.
25
26 G. Shop prime in two coats having a total dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Do not prime
27 surfaces to be field welded or cast in concrete.
28
29 2.3 STEEL PIPE RAILING SYSTEM GALVANIZED
30
31 A. Posts: 1 1/4 inch standard steel pipe members of welded construction.
32
33 B. Rails: 1 1/4 inch standard steel pipe rails of welded construction.
34
35 C. Brackets and Mounting: Steel of sizes required or as noted on drawings.
36
37 D. Sleeves shall be installed in concrete or saw cut the concrete with a concrete saw.
38
39 E. Finish: Shop primed
40
41 F. Wire mesh panel inserts with 2" square openings as shown on drawings by
42 McNichols,or Equal
43
44 PART 3-EXECUTION
45 p
46 3.1 ERECTION
47
48 A. Erect handrails square, level,plumb and free from distortion or defects detrimental to
49 appearance and performance.Comply with ADA
50
51 B. Provide necessary anchors, plates, and sleeves as required for connecting handrail to
52 the structure.McNichols cast handrail wall brackets,or equal.
53
54 C. Ensure alignment with adjacent construction. Coordinate with related work to ensure
55 no interruption in installation.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 05520-2
1
2 D. Perform necessary cutting and altering for the installation of work of other sections.
3 Do not perform any other additional cutting without the review of the Architect.
4
5 E. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding. Hide bolts and
6 screws whenever possible. If bolts and screws are not hidden, use flush countersunk
7 fastenings, unless indicated otherwise. Make mechanically fastened joints flush
8 (hairline or better). Grind welds smooth and flush.
9
10 F. Install wire mesh panel inserts as shown on drawings.
11
12
13 END OF SECTION
Project No.Fellowship 1314 05520-3
1 SECTION 06100
2
3 ROUGH CARPENTRY
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO THIS SECTION.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Supplementary Condition for substitutions.
13 B. Related work 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies
14
15 1.2 SUBMITTALS
16
17 A. Comply with section 01300
18 B. Product Data:Wood Treatment Materials
19
20 1.3 STANDARDS AND GRADING
21
22 A. All lumber used structurally shall be graded and marked with grade and trademark of
23 a lumber grading organization approved by the Architect,except that a certification of
24 grade from such a grading organization may be accepted in lieu of grade and
25 trademarks when approved by the Architect. Trademark of manufacturer shall also
26 appear on each piece.
27
28 B. Each piece of plywood used structurally shall carry the American Plywood
29 Association trademark.
30
31 C. Grading Rules: Conform with all applicable requirements of American Lumber
32 Standards "Simplified Practice Recommendations R-16" and to grading rules of
33 manufacturer's association under whose rules the lumber is produced.
34
35 D. Reference Standards: (Conform with all requirements)
36 01 Southern Pine Council(SPA)
37 02 U.S.Dept.of Commerce Product Standards
38 03 American Wood Preservers Assoc. Standards(as they apply)
39 04 Architectural Woodwork Institute"Quality Standards"
40 05 Western Wood Products Association Manual
41
42 PART 2-PRODUCTS
43
44 2.1 MATERIALS
45
IF
46 A. Lumber:
47 01 Treated No.2,S4S Southern Yellow Pine
48 a. Alkaline Copper Quaternary(ACQ).Comply with
49 AWPA Standards
50 b. Use for blocking, stripping, grounds, cants and miscellaneous wood
51 items in contact with concrete, roofing, all exterior wall locations
52 and where exposed to the weather. Use as treated blocking at all
53 conditions where cement siding,soffits and soffits are shown
Project No.Fellowship 1314 06100- 1
1 02 No. 2, S4S Southern Yellow Pine: Use for framing,blocking, stripping and
2 miscellaneous concealed interior lumber not exposed to concrete, roofing
3 weather or moisture,when FRS lumber is not required by building code.
4 03 Fire Retardant No, 2, S4S Southern Pine: Lumber shall be pressure-
5 impregnated with non-combustible fire retardant chemicals in accordance
6 with U.L. FRS Fire Hazard Classification. All lumber must be dried
7 following treatment in accordance with AWPA Standard C-20. Use for
8 framing, plates and blocking in all walls and partitions where required by
9 building code or noted on drawings.
10 B. Plywood:
11 01 General: Comply with APA Standards
12 02 APA A-D, Group 1 Interior used where appearance of only one side is
13 exposed to view for interior locations.
14 03 Exterior plywood, Group 1, APA rated sheathing. Use where miscellaneous
15 plywood is exposed to concrete or weather.
16 04 Fire Retardant Treated Plywood - Identical to "C.03" with pressure-
17 impregnated non-combustible fire retardant chemicals in accordance with
18 U.S. FRS Fire Hazard Classification, AWPA Standards C-27. Use when
19 required by building code or noted on drawings.
20 05 Underlayment:
21 a. APA rated Sturdi-floor,exterior grade,tongue and groove edges.
22
23 C. Rough Hardware:
24 01 Fasteners used in ACQ treated material shall be hot-dipped galvanized
25 fasteners complying with ASTM A153 and connectors complying with
26 ASTM A653; or Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel fasteners and
27 connectors,as recommended by the treatment manufacturer.
28 02 Nails, Spikes, and Staples: Hot-dipped galvanized for exterior locations,
29 high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior
30 locations: Size and type to suit application.
31 02 Bolts,Nuts,Washers,Lags,and Screws: Medium carbon steel;size and type
32 to suit application.Hot-dipped galvanize for exterior locations,high humidity
33 locations,and treated wood.Plain finish for other interior locations.
34 03 Fasteners: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion
35 shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry and concrete. Bolts
36 or power activated type for anchorage to steel.
37 04 Reference Structural for"Simpson"hardware and fasteners.
38
39 D. Treated Wood Isolation:
40 01 All ACQ treated material shall be installed with an isolation sheet between
41 the wood and adjacent metal surface. Provide 15 lb. asphalt impregnated
42 building felt or other isolation material as recommended by the treatment
43 manufacturer.
44
45 E. Telephone/Technology Board
46 01 Use grade stamped DFPA,grade A/D.
47 02 Provide 4' x 8' sheets of 3/4 inch plywood for telephone boards in
48 mechanical;telephone rooms where needed.
49 03 Where exposed,paint as scheduled in Section 09900
50
51
52
53
54
55 PART 3-EXECUTION
Project No.Fellowship 1314 06100-2
k
1
2 A. Blocking Locations:
3 01 Provide wood blocking at all built-in work, in walls for anchoring cabinets,
4 and other locations as indicated on the drawings. ..
5
6 C. Wood Framing:
7 01 Reference Structural for wall framing and accessories.
8 02 Framing and blocking shall be accurately cut and fitted true to line and
9 levels,avoiding shims and wedges. _
10 03 Spiking and nailing shall be done using largest size spikes and nail
11 practicable.
12 04 Use 2" x 4" or 2"x 6"(see drawings)wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c.,with
13 4 inch face perpendicular to direction of wall or partition, unless otherwise
14 stated. Provide single bottom plate and double-top plates 2 inches thick by
15 width of studs.
16 05 Bolt nailers and blocking to steel,masonry or concrete members with bolts or
17 proportionate strength of members attached from each end, except as
I
18 otherwise noted on.plans.
19 06 Provide blocking, bucks and framing as necessary and for other trades as
20 required.
I
21 07 Provide stair framing members of size, spacing and configuration indicated
22 and as required to support minimum uniform live load of 100 psf and
23 minimum concentrated load of 300 lbs. applied to area of 4 square inches at
24 center of tread. I 25 08 Fabricate stair framing members to provide exact fit with treads and risers
26 with no change in dimensions between landings.
27 09 All beams,trusses and joist will be designed by the Engineer of Record. The
28 anchorage will be by the Engineer of Record.
I
29
30 C. Plywood:
31 01 Install plywood over framing in accordance with instruction of American
32 Plywood Association Construction Guide Form No.E30C.
I
33 02 Install underlayment plywood as shown in accordance with instructions of
34 American Plywood Association. Space panel joints and edges 1/32 inch.Fill
35 and sand panel edge joints, surface roughness, and damaged or open areas.
I
36 Nail with four(4)ring-shank nails spaced at 6 inches at edges and 8 inches in
37 field each way.
38
39
I
40
41
42
I
43
44
45
46
47 ENI)OF SECTION
t
it
Project No.Fellowship 1314 06100-3
r
1 SECTION 06220
2
3 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO
6 THIS SECTION.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 B. Related Work:
15 01 Section 06100-Rough Carpentry
16
17
18 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
19
20 A. Finish Carpentry
21
22 B. Millwork
23
24 C. Plastic Laminate
25
26 D. Installation of finish hardware and plastic laminate doors.
27
28 1.3 SUBMITTALS
29
30 A. Manufacturer's specifications and other data for all products proposed to be furnished as
31 needed to prove compliance with specified requirements.
32
33 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, material, veneer, and AWI grade construction details. Show
34 locations and installation procedure of each millwork item. Includes details of joints,
35 attachments,and clearances.
36
37 C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
38
39 D. Samples:
40 01 Submit full range of colors,patterns,and textures for plastic laminate for Architect's
41 selection.
42 02 Submit representative, minimum 18" samples of all hardwood proposed to be
43 furnished
44 03 Submit samples of range of stains on actual hardwood samples.
45
46 1.4 MINIMUM COMPLIANCE STANDARDS
47
48 A. The "Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Industry"governs the work, except
49 where more restrictive items are specified.
50
51 PART 2-PRODUCTS
52
53 2.1 PLASTIC LAMINATE
54
55 A. Thickness: Horizontal grade for all finished/exposed surfaces. Vertical grade may be used
56 for cabinet interiors only. Use.020 balance sheet.
57
58 B. Pattern Finish Selection: As selected by Architect
59
60 C. Pattern Range: Include all standard colors
61
Project No.Fellowship 1314 06220- 1
w
rk
it.
1 D. Acceptable Manufacturer:
2 01 Wilsonart-Ralph Wilson Plastic Co.
3 02 Formica-The Formica Corporation IP
4 116
5 2.2 SOLID STOCK
6
7 A. Moisture Content: Percent of moisture in relation to over-dry weight shall be between 8% I 8 and 13%at time of installation.
9
10 B. Natural Finish Hardwood: African Mahogany.Comply with AWI"Premium" Grade.
11
I
12 C. Paint Grade Hardwood: Any species,including Parana Pine. Do not use Oak,Elm or similar
13 species which have coarse grain.
14
15 D. Blocking/Hangers: SYP or SPF#3 or better dimensional lumber. I 16
17 2.3 HIGH PERFORMANCE CORE MATERIAL:
18 t
19 A. All core materials shall be an Industrial Grade particle board which shall meet or exceed
20 performance requirements for ANSI A208.1-1999 M3 Standards.
21
22 B. All core materials shall be 3/4"material;minimum 45 lb. density.
23
24 C. All core materials shall have a minimum 250 lb.screw holding capacity on the face plane and
25 minimum 225 lb.screw holding capacity on the edge plane.
26 D. Edging types. 3 mm thick PVC. Solid,high-impact,purified,color-thru,acid resistant, I
27 pre-lamination primed edging,machine-applied with hot melt adhesives,automatically
28 trimmed,inside/outside length-radiused for uniform appearance,buffed and corner-radiused
29 for consistent design. I 30
31 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS
32
I
33 A. Utility shelving:AWI"Economy"grade
34
35 B. Natural Finished Millwork:AWI"Premium" Grade:
36 01 Wood Type:White Oak
37 02 Grain Pattern:Rift-cut I 38
39 C. Clear Acrylic/Plexiglas: 1/4 inch thick panels fastened to walls where indicated on drawings.
40
41 2.5 TELEPHONE BOARD
I
42
43 A. Use grade stamped DFPA, grade A/D, Paint as scheduled in Section 09900. Provide 4' x 8'
44 sheets of 3/4 inch plywood for telephone boards in mechanical; telephone rooms where
45 needed. (Reference drawings and electrical)
46
47 2.6 CABINET HARDWARE
48
I
49 A. Hinges. Heavy-duty chrome-plated steel,5 knuckle,equal to McKinney No.2758-US D finish
50 (color selected by Architect), wraparound type allowing 270-degree swing at end of unit
51 attached with No. 10-24 sheet metal screws,or approved substitution.
52
I
53 B. Pulls. 4-1/2 inch extruded aluminum with color selected by Architect.
54
55 C. Catches. Spring actuated,nylon roller type.
I
56
I
Project No.Fellowship 1314 06220-2
I
1 D. Adjustable Shelf Supports. 13-gauge angle, 1/2 inch wide, with 1/4 inch diameter by 3/8 inch
2 long pin,bright zinc-plated and all edges rounded.
3
4 E. Locks: NA
5
6 2.7 PLASTIC LAMINATE BLOCK PANELING
7
8 A. Provide plastic laminate finished block paneling in sizes and patterns as indicated on the
9 drawings.
10 01 3/4"high pressure core material body.
11 02 Horizontal grade plastic laminate faces with 0.020 balanced backs.
12 03 Faces of block paneling shall have no seams or splices.
13
14 B. A maximum of three (3) plastic laminates and 3 mil PVC edging shall be selected for
15 application.
16
17 C. Block paneling shall be suspended / hung on wall using 1x4 blocking attached to wall and
18 back of panel to provide 3/4"relief off wall.Provide at two locations each panel.
19
20 PART 3-EXECUTION
21
22 3.1 INSTALLATION
23
24 A. Positioning: Place approximately level,plumb and at right angles to adjacent work.Maintain
25 consistent spacing between elements where indicated on the drawings.
26
27 B. Fitting: Where field cutting or trimming is necessary, perform in a neat, accurate,
28 professional manner without damaging the products and adjacent work.
29
30 C. Anchorage: Attach securely so the products will perform to their maximum ability without
31 damage from inadequate fastenings.
32
33 D. Fasten tops to frames with concealed clips,screws and glue.
34
35 3.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE DOOR INSTALLATION
36
37 A. Carefully verify that doors are properly installed at intended door location and that door prep
38 for finish hardware is accurate and complete.
39
40 B. Install all doors plumb and square to frame with+/- 1/8"clearance between door and frame.
41
42 C. Install finish hardware in accordance with approved templates.
43
44 D. Verify that top and bottom rails are sealed prior to door installation.
45
46 E. Take all necessary precautions to protect door finishes before,during and after installation.In
47 the event of damage to the plastic laminate surfacing,replace door.
48
49 F. Upon completion of door installation, cycle door several times to confirm that door, frame
50 and hardware are all installed and functioning correctly.
51
52 3.3 FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION
53
54 A. The supplier will mark each item hardware for location.Protect the markings until each item
55 is installed. If any item is delivered to the job not properly marked, return it to the supplier
56 for marking before attempting to install it.
57
58 B. Check markings on hardware for proper location. Install and make necessary adjustments for
59 proper working order.Any hardware damaged by improper adjustment or careless abuse will
60 be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
61
Project No.Fellowship 1314 06220-3
1
1
1 C. Provide clean,properly sized and accurately placed mortises and drilled holes for all mortise
2 hardware such as locksets and for cylindrical locks where specified only.
3
4 D. Accurately fit all surface-applied hardware.
5
6 E. After hardware is installed,protect exposed surfaces by use of heavy paper and masking tape
7 and maintain until job completion.
8
9 F. Remove all finish hardware except that which is primed for painting before painter's finish is
10 applied. Permanently replace and re-adjust for proper function after painter's finish has dried
11 hard.
12
13 G. Do not strip heads of Phillips head screws. Remove and replace all stripped or damaged
14 screws.
15
16 H. Finish Hardware—Cabinets shall have all hardware furnished.
17
18
19 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
Project No.Fellowship 1314 06220-4
1 SECTION 07160
2
3 VAPOR BARRIER AND THRU-WALL FLASHING
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
6 TO THIS SECTION.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Bidders for substitutions.
13
14 B. Dampproofing shall be applied to exterior of all gypsum sheathing and other locations
15 where indicated.
16
17 1.2 SUBMITTALS
18
19 A. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with
20 specified requirements.
21
22 B. Certification of compatibility with rigid insulation specified in Building Insulation -
23 Section 07210.
24
25 C. Manufacturer's certificate that product contains no asbestos.
26
27 D. Manufacturer's installation instructions; including shop drawings where necessary to
28 detail special conditions.
29
30 E. Sample Panel: Sample panel shall be 8' long x 4' high panel showing completed
31 through-wall flashing at first course of masonry and dampproofing assembly,
32 complete with exterior sheathing, rigid insulation (where applicable). Coordinate as
33 required with other trades.
34 01 Panel shall be"L" shaped(4' x 4')with wood stud/sheathing back-up wall
35 on one side and rock on one side.Install with vapor barrier on sheathing.
36 02 Once accepted by the Architect, the sample panel shall be the standard by
37 which installed is judged.
38 03 Sample panel shall remain at the jobsite until all through-wall flashing and
39 dampproofing is completed.
40
41 1.3 WARRANTY
42
43 A. Refer to Section 01710-Guarantees,Certificates and Close-Out
44
45 B. Provide a material and labor, non-prorated, manufacturer's / installer minimum two
46 (2)year warranty that material and installation shall remain water tight.
47
48 PART 2-PRODUCTS
49
50 2.1 VAPOR BARRIER MANUFACTURERS
51
52 A. These specifications are based Grace Select. Refer to each of the manufacturer's
53 literature for specific installation requirements.
54 01 Grace Select
55 02 Sonneborn
56 03 Tremco
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07160- 1
i
I
I
1
2 B. Self-adhered over penetrations for doors, windows, and all other openings in the
3 envelope.
4
5 2.2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
6 t.
7 A. Rubberized asphalt backed by a layer of high density cross laminated polyethylene
8 with a paper backed release liner 25 mils.
9 B. Limitations: Apply material when temperature is over 45°F and protect from rain or
I
10 freezing until completely dry. Do not apply where material will be in continuous
11 contact with water or ponded water situations. Comply with Manufactures
12 recommendation.
13
I
14 2.3 TECHNICAL DATA
15
16 A. Cured Film References/Characteristics
17 01 Water Vapor Permeance,ASTM E96:0.05 maximum
I
18 02 Flammability:No flash
19 03 Material weight 0.141b/ft2
2I
21 B. Sheathing
22 01 Prime all surface Perm-A-Barrier WB
23 02 Prime rate 250-350 ft2/gal/6-8m2/L
24
I
25 2.4 THRU-WALL FLASHING
26
1
27 A. By definition for work covered by this section, "thru-wall flashing" shall refer to all I 28 flexible flashing installed at both through-wall and non-through-wall conditions.Metallic
29 thru-wall flashing shall be as specified in section 07620.
30
31 B. Flexible,Self-Sealing Wall Flashing(TWF)
32 01 Description: Self adhering,membrane consisting of an SBS rubberized asphalt
33 compound which is integrally laminated to a cross laminated polyethylene
34 (HDPE) film, with a silicone release sheet, specifically designed for thru-wall
35 flashing conditions. I
36 02 Width: Select either 12 inch, 18 inch,24 inch,36 inch wide rolls.
37 03 Thickness:40 mils.
38 04 Elongation:250%minimum(ASTM D412 Die C) r
39 05 Water vapor transmission:0.05 perms(ASTM E96 Method B) ik
40 06 Membrane tensile strength:250 psi minimum.
41
42 C. Termination Bar r
43 01 1"x 1/8"aluminum or stainless steel flat bar.
44 02 Pre-drilled to fasten at maximum 16"O.C.
45 03 Fasteners shall be cadmium plated or stainless steel,self-tapping screws.
46
47 2.5 THRU-WALL FLASHING MANUFACTURERS '
48
49 A. These specifications are based on the first listed product. Refer to each of the g
50 manufacturer's literature for specific installation requirements.
51 01 Grace Construction Product"Perm-A-Barrier"
52 02 Henry Company#798 Blueskin TWF.
53 02 Tremco ExoAir TWF
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07160-2
1 04 Polyguard Products,Inc."Polyguard 400"
2 05 Durowall,Inc"Duro-O-Barrier 44".
3
4
5 PART 3-EXECUTION
6
7 3.1 PREPARATION
8
9 A. Working Conditions: Apply under normal working conditions above 45°F and rising.
10 Do not apply when rain is imminent.
11
12 B. Storage: Keep container tightly sealed and protect from freezing in shipping and
13 storage.
14
15 C. Surface Preparation:
16 01 All dust,dirt,old loose or scaling coatings shall be removed from the surface
17 before coating or application of thru-wall flashing.
18 02 All rock ledge conditions and cement siding shall be free of dirt and dust
19 prior to application of thru-wall flashing.
20 03 Metal surfaces shall be free of rust,cleaned and primed.
21 04 Architect shall approve the vapor barrier and thru wall flashing before cover
22 up.
23
24 3.2 LOCATIONS
25
26 A. Thru-Wall Flashing
27 01 All foundation masonry / brick ledges. At locations where adjacent concrete
28 flatwork is above the bottom of the brick ledge,two(2)layers shall be applied
29 —one at base of brick ledge and one at the first brick course above the adjacent
30 flatwork.
31 02 Over heads of openings on steel lintel angles back to wall sheathing/substrate.
32 03 Under sills and at jambs of openings(not thru wall).Install additional thru-wall
33 flashing at window jambs to lap over the end dams of all sub-sill flashing.
34 Coordinate with window installer as required.
35 04 At perimeter of building at roof lines and parapets (not thru wall) extending
36 down onto exterior walls
37 05 At all exterior wall conditions as required to divert moisture within wall cavities
38 to the building exterior.
39 06 At all openings through exterior sheathing / cement siding resulting from
40 structural wood or other interfacing work.
41 07 Where indicated on drawings.
42
43 B. Termination Bar: Continuous at the top edge of the vertical surface of all thru-wall
44 flashing at all masonry ledges,wall-to-roof masonry conditions and masonry lintels
45
46 C. Vapor Barrier
47 01 Install fabric mesh at all sheathing joints and corners, fully adhered to
48 sheathing prior to installing vapor barrier.
49 02 Install vapor barrier at all exterior cavity walls penetrations including areas
50 above soffits,doors,and windows.
51
52 D. The completed installation of thru-wall flashing and dampproofing shall render the
53 building water tight except at door and window openings
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07160-3
1
I
I `
1 3.3 INSTALLATION—THRU-WALL FLASHING
2
3 A. Install all thru-wall flashing and vapor barrier in strict accordance with the I
4 manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.
5 01 Take all necessary precautions to eliminate fish-mouths and other
6 irregularities.Where they occur,cut out and apply additional layer(s)of thru- '
7 wall flashing as required to achieve a smooth surface.
8 02 Carefully construct corner assemblies and vertical transitions/steps to assure
9 proper lapping of adjacent sheets to provide positive drainage. Lap joints
10 shall be a minimum of 4 inches. '
11 03 All thru-wall flashing shall be installed prior to application of vapor barrier.
12
13 B. Do not extend thru-wall flashing at masonry / rock ledges and lintels to face of I
14 masonry.Cut back 1/2"to 3/4" from exterior face.
15
16 C. Carefully coordinate with the masonry contractor to install thru-wall flashing at the
17 proper brick course(s). Thru-wall flashing shall form a continuous barrier at all
I
18 transitions.
19
20
21 3.4 TESTING AND INSPECTING I
22
23 A. Not more than ten (10) days after completion of this portion of the work, at the
24 discretion of the Architect, demonstrate by running water test that the work of this I 25 section will successfully repel water.
26 01 Notify the Architect at least 48 hours in advance, and conduct the test in the
27 Architect's presence.
28 02 By means of an outrigger, or similar acceptable equipment, place the nozzle
I
29 of a 3/4 inch garden hose at a point approximately 10'-0" away from top of
30 wall where approved by the Architect, aiming the nozzle at slight downward
31 angle to direct full stream of water onto wall. I
32 03 Run water onto wall at full available force for not less than four hours.
33 04 Upon completion of the four-hour period,inspect interior surfaces of wall for
34 evidence of moisture penetration.
35
I
36 B. If evidence of moisture penetration is discovered, apply an additional coat of
37 dampproofing to the exterior surface in areas directed by the Architect. Repeat
38 application and testing at no additional cost to the Owner, until no evidence of
39 moisture penetration is found. '
40
41
42
I
43 END OF SECTION
44
45
46 ' k..
I
1
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07160-4 I
1
1 SECTION 07210
2
3 BUILDING INSULATION
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
14
15 B. This Section includes roof insulation and batt insulation used in stud walls.
16
17 1.3 SUBMITTALS
18
19 A. Comply with Section 01300
20
21 B. Submit product literature for all products proposed to be furnished.
22
23 C. Certify compatibility of rigid insulation with dampproofing mastic.
24
25 PART 2-PRODUCTS
26
27 2.1 MATERIALS
28
29 A. Batt or Roll Thermal Insulation:
30 01 R-Values(minimum):R-19 in walls,R-30 at attics.
31 02 Comply with Type 1 ASTM 665-84 unfaced
32 03 Flame Spread 25 or less
33 04 Pins and disc securement accessories as required.
34 05 Unfaced.
35
36 B. Batt or Roll Acoustical(Sound Attenuation)Insulation:
37 01 Sound Attenuation Insulation: USG"Thermafiber" or Owens/Corning"R-8"
38 noise barrier batt sound attenuation blankets, 2 inch thickness, friction fit
39 between studs.
40 02 Pins and disc securement accessories as required.
41 03 Unfaced.
42
43 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
44
45 A. Batt or Roll(thermal):
46 01 Owens-Corning
47 02 Manville
48 03 Certaineed
49 04 United States Gypsum
50 05 Guardian Building Products
51
52 B. Batt or Roll(acoustical):
53 01 Owens-Corning
54 02 Manville
55 03 Certaineed
56 04 United States Gypsum
57 05 Guardian Building Products
58
59
60
61 PART 3-EXECUTION
62
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07210- 1
1 3.1 INSTALLATION
2
3 A. Batt or Roll Thermal Insulation:
4 01 Batts shall fit between studs and provide full coverage at exterior walls.
5 02 Wall Areas Above Ceiling: At insulation in ceiling cavity, install adhesive-
6 mounted spike devices with metal caps at 2'-0" vertically, and 4 inches
7 horizontally from each side of the blankets. Install blankets with long
8 dimensions running vertically on spikes, keeping blankets tight to exterior
9 wall without crushing.
10 03 On the exterior side of all structural wood located directly behind sheathing
11
12 B. Batt or Roll Acoustical Insulation:
13 01 Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut
14 openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or
15 behind partitions and tight to items passing through partitions.
16
17 3.2 PROTECTION
18
19 A. Upon completion of batt insulation, use all means necessary to protect material from
20 becoming wet.
21 01 In the event batt or acoustical insulation comes in direct contact with
22 moisture or becomes wet, remove and discard, and replace insulation with
23 dry material.
24 02 In the event batt insulation becomes damp or moist,thoroughly dry insulation
25 prior to covering up.
26 03 Use all means necessary to assure that batt and acoustical insulation is
27 completely dry at the time of cover-up and will not promote the growth of
28 mold.
29
30 B. Protect insulation as required to prevent damage.
31
32
33 END OF SECTION
1
1
i
1
i
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07210-2
1 SECTION 07270
2
3 FIRESTOPPING,PENETRATION SEALS
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Work Included
13 01 Furnish all materials and labor required for installation of firestops around
14 through-penetrations of pipe,duct,cable,cable tray,conduit,other
15 electrical devices,blank openings and at the periphery of fire-rated walls,
16 floors,partitions and floor/ceiling assemblies.
17 B. Related Work
18 01 Section 03300-Concrete
19 02 Section 04200-Masonry
20 03 Section 07900-Joint Sealant
21 04 Section 09200-Lath and Plaster
22 05 Section 09250-Gypsum Drywall Systems
23 06 Division 15 and 16 Sections-Mechanical,Electrical,and Plumbing Work
24
25 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
26
27 A. Standards
28 01 ASTM E-814,Standard Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire
29 Stops.
30 02 ASTM E-84,Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
31 Building Materials.
32 03 UL 1479,Fire Tests of Through-Penetrations Firestops.
33 04 UL 723,Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
34 Materials.
35 05 UL Fire Resistance Directory;Through-Penetration Firestop Systems
36 (XHEZ),and Fill,Void or Cavity Materials(XHHW).
37 06 NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code
38 07 NFPA 70-National Electric Code
39
40 B. Performance
41
42 01 Firestop systems shall provide a fire resistance rating at least equal to the
43 hourly resistance rating of the fire-rated barrier.
44 02 Firestop Systems shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E-814 or
45 UL 1479 under a minimum positive pressure of 0.01 in.of water.
46
47 1.3 DEFINITIONS
48
49 A. Penetration:Any opening of foreign material passing through or into a fire-rated
50 barrier.
51
52 B. Fire-Rated: Have the ability to withstand the effects of a standard fire exposure for a
53 specified time period,as determined by qualified testing.
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07270- 1
I
I
1 C. Fire-Rated Barrier: A floor,wall,partition or floor-ceiling assembly able to withstand
2 a standard fire and hose stream test without failure.
3
4 D. Fire Resistance Rating: The ability of a structure to act as a barrier to the spread of
5 fire and to confine it to the area of origin. Ratings are expressed in hours and apply to
6 beams,columns,floors,roofs,walls and partitions. I 7
8 E. Firestopping: A means of sealing openings in fire-rated barriers to preserve or restore
9 the fire resistance rating.
10 t 11 F. Firestop System: a material,or combination of materials,installed to retain the
12 integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the
13 spread of flame,smoke or gases through penetrations in fire-rated vertical barriers t
14 It should be used in specific locations as follows:
15 01 Penetrations for the passage of duct,cable,cable tray,conduit,piping and
16 electrical busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers(walls
17 and partitions),horizontal barriers(floor slabs and floor/ceiling assemblies),
I
18 and vertical service shafts.
19 02 Openings between floor slabs and curtain walls.
20 03 Openings between structurally separate sections of walls of floors.
I
21 04 Gaps between the top of walls and ceiling or roof assemblies.
22 05 Vertical service shafts at each floor level.
23 06 Expansion joints in walls and floors.
24 07 Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire I 25 doors.
26
27 1.4 SUBMITTALS
28
I
29 A. Comply with Section 01300.
30
31 B. Product Data
I
32 01 Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications,recommendations,
33 installation instructions,and maintenance data for each type of material
34 required.
35 02 Submit a copy of UL illustration of each proposed system indicating
I
36 manufacturer approved modifications.
37
38 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
I
39
40 A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled,unopened containers,
41 identified with brand,type,grade,and UL label where applicable.
42
I
43 B. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at
44 site
45
46 C. Store materials in clean,dry,ventilated location. Protect from soiling,abuse,and
I
47 moisture.Follow manufacturer's instructions.
48
49 1..6 PROJECT CONDITIONS t
50
51 A. Existing Conditions
52 01 Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct
53 unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
I
54 02 Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and
55 supporting brackets have been installed.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07270-2
I
I
1
2 B. Environmental Requirements
3 01 Furnish adequate ventilation if using solvent.
4 02 Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer.
5 03 Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame.
6 04 Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent
7 surfaces by fire stopping materials.
8
9 PART 2-PRODUCTS
10
11 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
12
13 A. Hilti Construction Chemicals,Inc.
14 B. 3M Corporations
15 C. Tremco
16 D. Metalines,Inc.
17
18 2.2 MATERIALS
19
20 A. Firestopping materials/constructions shall constitute one or more of the following
21 products or equal by other listed manufacturers.
22 01 Hilti CP601 S Firestop Sealant: An adhesive,one-part,silicone-based,
23 elastomeric sealant.
24 02 Hilti FS ONE Intumescent Wrap: An Aluminum foil-backed intumescent
25 strip for plastic or insulate pipe.
26 03 Damming Materials: Hilti CF 128 Adhesive Filling and Sealing Foam or
27 fire-tested designs.
28
29 B. Firestopping materials shall be asbestos-free,emit no toxic or combustible fumes and
30 be capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame,smoke, gas,and water in
31 compliance with previously referenced standards.
32
33 C. Firestopping materials/systems shall be flexible to allow for normal movement of
34 building structure and penetrating item(s)without affecting the adhesion or integrity
35 of the system.
36
37 PART 3-EXECUTION
38
39 3.1 PREPARATION
40
41 A. Prepare substrate surfaces to ensure proper and adequate structural support for the
42 specified UL Rated Firestop System. Install fire-rated partitions/floors with void to
43 receive firestop system.
44
45 B. Clean surfaces from all foreign materials i.e. , loose debris, dirt, oil, grease, wax
46 and/or oil caulking before sealant is applied.
47
48 C. Field measure and verify dimensions as required.
49
50 D. Protect adjacent areas or surfaces from damage as a result of the work of this Section.
51
52 3.2 APPLICATION
53
54 A. Installation of fire stopping materials shall be in exact accordance with the
55 manufacturer's latest published instructions.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07270-3
41111111111111111111111111111111111111111111114.
1
I
1
1
2 B. Installation shall be in accordance with the appropriate UL Building Materials
3 Directory Assembly or with the appropriate Warnock Hersey International Listing. I
4
5 C. Seal holes or voids made by penetrating items to ensure an effective fire and smoke
6 barrier. I
7
8 D. Seal all intersections and all penetrations of floors,ceilings,walls,and columns.
9 t
10 E. Seal around all cutouts for lights,cabinets pipes,and plumbing,HVAC ducts, I
11 electrical boxes,etc.
12
13 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
14 I
15 A. Examine finished penetrations to ensure proper installation before concealing or
16 enclosing any areas of work.
17
II
18 B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities,and
19 Architect.
20
21 C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Inspect to verify and confirm that systems installation I
22 is in strict conformance with manufacturer's and UL requirements. Report to
23 Architect.
24
I
25 D. Correct unacceptable work and provide further inspection to verify compliance with
26 requirements.
27 I
'
28 3.4 CLEANING
29
30 A. Immediately remove all spots,smears,stains,residues,adhesives,etc.,from the work
31 of this Section and or upon adjacent areas or surfaces which result form the work of ,
32 this Section.
33
34 B. Upon the completion of the work of this Section,dispose of(away from site)all
35 debris,trash containers,residue,remnants and scraps which result from the work of
I
36 this Section.
37
38 C. Cleaning to be free of volatile solvents. Leave work area in a clean and satisfactory I 39 condition.
40
41
42
I
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
46 I 47
1
I
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07270-4 I
I
1 SECTION 07415
2
3 PREFINISHED METAL ROOFING
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SECTIONS AA THOUGH CB AND DMSION 1 APPLY TO
7 THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
14
15 B. The work includes furnishing labor,materials and installation of pre-finished roofing,
16 trim,flashing,and miscellaneous parts as indicated on drawings and described herein.
17
18 C. Related Work:
19 01 Division 5-Metals
20 02 Section 07210—Building Insulation
21 03 Section 07620—Flashing and Sheetmetal
22
23 1.2 WARRANTY
24
25 A. Warrant the work specified herein for two years against becoming unserviceable or
26 causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or non-
27 conforming materials and workmanship.Defects shall include but not be limited to the
28 following:
29 01 Leaking
30 02 Cracking,chipping or peeling of finish.
31 03 Wrinkling,undue expansion,lifting,loosening,and splitting seams.
32
33 B. Provide manufacturers 20 year durability warranty against rupture, structural failure
34 and perforation due to corrosion,and against chalking,cracking and peeling.
35
36 C. Provide manufacturer's 20 year warranty for weather-tightness. Weather-tightness
37 warranty shall include labor and materials and shall apply to the roof system specified
38 including related flashings,valleys,ridges,and trim.
39
40 1.3 SUBMITTALS
41
42 A. Comply with Section 01300.
43
44 B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and other data for all products proposed
45 to be furnished as needed to prove compliance with specified requirements.
46 Manufacturer's installation instructions.
47
48 C. Shop Drawings:including layouts of panels,details of edge conditions,joints,corners,
49 custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashing, closures and special details.
50 Distinguish between factory and field assembly work.
51 01 Shop drawings and details shall be specific to this installation and interface
52 with adjacent work.Generic details are not acceptable.
53
54 D. Samples
55 01 Colored metal samples from the manufacturers standard line of Kynar 500
56 finishes for Architect's selection.
57 02 Sample of coated panel,clip,fastener,and spacer block.
58
59 E. Manufacturer's complete installation instructions.
60
61 1.4 REFERENCES
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07415- 1
I
I
1
2 A. ASTM
3 01 ASTM A-653 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated I 4 (Galvanized).
5 02 ASTM E-1680-95 —Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through
6 Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems
7 03 ASTM E-1646-95 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Water Penetration of
I
8 Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems
9 04 ASTM E-1952 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Conductivity and
10 Thermal Diffusivity of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems
11
111
12 B. Factory Mutual:I-120 rated wind uplift
13
14 C. Underwriters Laboratories:UL 90 and UL Fire Resistance Listed.
15
16 D. SMACNA:Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
17
18 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
19
I
20 A. Installer shall be licensed / certified by the roofing manufacturer to install the
21 specified roofing system.
22
23 B. Where the manufacturer has a multi-tier licensing/certification program,the installer
I
24 shall be in the highest tier.
25
26 C. Installer of pre-formed metal roofing shall be experienced in the work and shall have
27 installed a minimum of ten (10) pre-formed metal roof systems of the type specified I 28 prior to this work.
29
30 D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct a preinstallation conference prior to start of
31 installation.Roofing manufacturer's representative shall be present at the meeting.
I
32
33 E. During the progress of the work,the manufacturer's representative shall visit the site
34 to monitor the metal roofing installation.Minimum of two(2)trips,or one(1)trip per
35 week,whichever is greater. I 36
37
38 PART 2-PRODUCTS
39
40 2.1 MATERIALS
41
42 A. Design is based 1.5"Standing seam roof system with concealed fasteners and clipless
43 snap lock.
I
44
45 B. Roof panels:Precision rolled-formed or cold-formed hot dipped galvanized steel,one-
46 piece for length and height of panel.
47 01 Style: 1 1/2" high profile standing seam; 18" nominal pan width with 1 1/2"
I
48 high seam male to female locking system.
49 02 Minimum Thickness:24 gauge
50 03 Color:
51 a. Base Bid-Galvalume
I
52 b. Alternate#7 Kynar 500 Champagne
53 04 Galvalume Steel,type AZ-55,grade 50 as per ASTM A792-96.
54 05 Provide panels in frill length without end laps.
55 06 Butyl sealant applied continuous at all panel seams.
I
56 07 Underlayment: One layer of permafelt laid dry; minimum 6" end laps, 4"
57 head laps starting at eave.
58 08 Concealed Weather Seal:Extruded vinyl.
I
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07415-2
I
m4
iti
Al
1 08 Finish:Fluorocarbon Coating:Consists of primer,applied at a nominal dry
2 film thickness of.25 mil and a color coat,applied at a nominal dry film
3 thickness of.75 mil,giving a 1.0 mil nominal dry film on topcoat. Paint
4 finish should be Kynar 500 Fluorocarbon coating as selected from
5 manufacturers standard color selection.
6 09 The back side of the material should be.25 mil.Primer and a 0.25 polyester
7 washcoat. Color:to be selected from standard manufacturer colors
8
9 C. Flashing and Trim
10 01 All materials shall be the same gauge and finish as the roofing panel.
11 02 Provide manufacturer's standard profiles and custom fabrications as required
12 for a complete weather-tight assembly, properly interfaced with adjacent
13 work.
14
15 D. Accessories:
16 01 "clipless" system. Clips shall be 1" x '/" slots integrated into the panel,
17 continuous,at 5.5"OC to accommodate thermal movement.
18 02 Fasteners: Galvanized or stainless steel, self-tapping screws as provided by
19 the manufacturer for the specific use/assembly.
20 03 Exposed fasteners shall be minimized;and where required,shall match panel
21 finish.
22 E. Underlayment:
23 01 All metal roofing installed over a solid substrate shall be installed over a
24 waterproof membrane.
25 02 Mechanically fastened membrane composed of rubberized polyolefin film
26 coated with a layer on both sides.
27 03 Properties:
28 a. Water Transmission:per ASTM E96
29 b. Tensile Strength:minimum 1331b(ASTM D5034)
30 c. UV Weathering:6 Months
31 04 Design is based on Permafelt Gold
32
33 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
34
35 A. Roofing System: The following manufacturers / systems are acceptable provided
<, 36 proposed products meet or exceed all specified requirements and attributes.
37 01 FF 150
38 02 MBCI"Slimline"
39 03 Architectural Building Components"snap-lock Series"
40 04 Berridge Cee-Lock Panels
41 B. Underlayment
42 01 Permaproducts:Permafelt
43 02 Grace:Tri-flex
44 03 Dupont:Roofliner
45
46 PART 3-EXECUTION
47
48 3.1 INSTALLER
49
50
51 3.2 PREPARATION PRODUCT HANDLING,STORAGE AND DELIVERY
52
53 A. Immediately upon delivery to job site,place materials in area protected from weather.
54 Materials shall be sorted and handled to prevent inclusion of foreign materials and
55 damage by water or weather.
56 01 Storage: Store in original packages until ready for use. Store in an area that
57 will provide protection of any film protector applied to the panels.
58 03 Do not permit unnecessary walking on finished roof. All personnel installing
59 finished roof shall be required to wear rubber sole shoes.
60
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07415-3
I
I
1 B. Thoroughly inspect all substrate and interfacing work to verify suitability for the work
2 of this section to proceed.
3 I 4 A. Protective film should be removed prior to extended exposure to sunlight,heat,and
5 other weather elements.
6
I
7 B. Panels should be handled at seams to prevent buckling.
8
9 C. Limit traffic on installed panel to prevent unnecessary damage to the finish. yr
10
11 33 INSTALLATION OF STANDING SEAM ROOFING iiii
12
13 A. Apply specified roofing underlayment over entire area to be covered by metal roofing. mit
14 01 Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's standards and
15 recommendations. le
16 03 Lap membrane with flashings as necessary to provide a positive barrier
17 against penetration of water.
18
19 B. Install metal roof panels in full lengths. w.
20
21 C. Install trim, flashing and related items in conformance with reviewed shop drawings
22 and manufacturer's instructions,as indicated on drawings. I 23
24 D. Attach roof panels continuous using concealed clips and other accessories as
25 instructed by manufacturer.
26
I
27 E. Weather tightness shall be maintained in end laps with specially swaged design in end
28 of top panel to permit precise end-lock with bottom panel.
29
30 F. Install pans in strict accordance with approved samples and manufacturer's printed t
31 instructions.
32 01 Do not drive nails through pans or seams.
33 02 Press seams tightly together in each operation.
34
II
35 G. Lock standing seams to form a tight joint.
36 01 All seams shall be fully engaged to adjacent panels.
37 02 Use of hand tools or other improvised equipment is not permitted, unless
38 specifically directed by the manufacturer.
39
40 3.4 WORKMANSHIP
41
42 A. Install panel systems straight and true, free from defects. Isolate dissimilar metal Ili
43 contact with proper taping and/or coatings. Install flashing and corners to provide a
44 watertight system.
45
46 3.5 INSPECTION
47
48 A. Architect and Contractor reserve the right to inspect the work during application.
49 Upon completion of the work, if inspection discloses that roofing is not according to
50 specifications or has been damaged, Contractor agrees to furnish additional materials
51 necessary to make repairs and place work in an acceptable condition.
52
53
54 END OF SECTION
r
r
li
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07415-4 1
1.r 2
1 SECTION 07460
2
3 CEMENTITIOUS FIBER BOARD SIDING
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
6
7 PART 1-GENERAL
8
9 1.1 DESCRIPTION
10
11 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
12
13 1.2 WARRANTY
14
15 A. Provide manufacturer's 50-year warranty against rotting,delamination and leaking on
16 siding,wall panels and soffit panels. Provide manufacturer's 10-year warranty against
17 rotting,delamination and leaking,for trim board.
18
19 1.3 SUBMITTALS
20
21 A. Comply with Section 01300.
22
23 B. Product Data:Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove
24 compliance with specified requirements.
25
26 C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
27
28 D. Sample copy of manufacturer's warranty to be issued upon completion and acceptance
29 of work.
30
31 1.4 SCOPE
x31 32
33 A. Work included:
34 01 Facia
35 02 Soffit
36 03 Exterior trim
37
38 B. Work specified elsewhere
39 01' Miscellaneous Steel—05500
40 02 Rough Carpentry-06100
41 03 Vapor Barrier Above Grade-07160
42 04 Gypsum Wallboard Systems—09260
43
44 1.5 REFERENCES
45
46 A. Factory Mutual: I-90 wind uplift
47
48
49 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
50
51 A. Installer of the siding and related products shall be experienced in the work and shall
52 have installed a minimum of three of the type specified prior to this work.
53
Project No. 1314-Fellowship Church 07460- 1
1 B. Non-asbestos fiber-cement siding to comply with ASTM Standard Specification
2 C1186 Grad II,Type A.
3
4 C. Siding to meet the following building code compliance National Evaluation Report
5 No.NER 405(BOCA,ICBO,SBCCI);City of Los Angeles,Research Report No.
6 24862 Metro Dade County,Florida Acceptance No.94-1234.04;US Department of
7 Housing and Urban Development Materials Release 1263a;California DSA PS-019;
8 and City of New York MEA 223-93-M.Non-asbestos fiber cement siding to be non-
9 combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM test method E136.
10
11 PART 2-PRODUCTS
12
13 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS t
14
15 A. James Hardie Building Products(Basis of Design)
16
R
17 B. Certain Teed Corporation
18 r.:
19 C. Georgia-Pacific Corporation
20
21
A.2 PRODUCTS
22
23 A. Trim
24 01 Finish:Cedarmill Textured
25 02 Smooth:4/4"x 4"/6"/8"nominal.
26 03 Type/thickness as indicated on the Drawings.
27
28 2.3 FASTENERS
29
30 C. Soffit-Trim: Per Manufacturers standard details
31
32 D. All fasteners shall be as approved by the manufacturer.
33
34 PART 3-EXECUTION
35
36 3.1 PRODUCT HANDLING
37
38 A. Stack Hardie trim on edge or lay flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and
39 corners from chipping.
40
41 B. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing.
42
43 3.2 SURFACE CONDITIONS
44
45 A. The installer shall verify that siding may be installed per the manufacturer's
46 recommendations.
47
48 B. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies
49 have been resolved.
50
51 3.3 INSTALLATION
52
53 A. Hardiplank Siding
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07460-2
Inti
■
1 01 Starting: Install a minimum''/4 inch thick lath starter strip at the bottom
2 course of the wall. Apply planks horizontally with minimum 1-'/4 inch wide
3 laps at the top. The bottom edge of the first plank overlaps the starter strip.
4 02 Allow minimum 1-inch vertical clearance between roofing and bottom edge
5 of siding.
6 03 Align vertical joints of the planks over framing members.
7 04 Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
8 05 Locate splices at least one stud cavity away from window and door openings.
9 06 Use off-stud metal joiner when vertical joints occur between framing
10 members.Position metal joiner so that the bottom lip is resting on the solid
11 course of planks. Fasten plank to the framing. Position and fasten abutting
12 plank into place insuring that the lower edges of the two planks align. Locate
13 metal joiner centrally behind the joint. Locate off-stud splices a minimum of
14 two stud cavities from wall corners and stagger all subsequent course splices
15 at minimum 24-inch intervals when located in the same wall cavity.
16 07 Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance is required
17 Hardiplank lap siding is installed to framing members and secured with
18 fasteners described in Table No.2 in National Evaluation Service Report No.
19 NER-405.
20
21 B. Hardipanel Siding
22
23 01 Block framing between studs where Hardipanel siding horizontal joints
24 occur.
25 02 Place fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch from panel edges and 2 inch form
26 panel corners.
27 03 Allow minimum 1-inch vertical clearance between roofing and bottom edge
28 of siding.
29 04 Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
30 05 Specific framing and fastener requirements refer to Tables 2 and 3 in
31 National Evaluation Service Report No.NER 405.
32
33 05 Joining: Fasten panels at abutting board edges and with PVC H-molding
34 provided by soffit panel manufacturer.
35 06 Patching of dents and chips must be with a cementitious patching compound
36 as recommended by soffit panel manufacturer.
37
38 C. Harditrim Fascia and Trim
39
40 01 Install flashing around all wall openings.
41 02 Fasten through trim into structural framing or code complying sheathing.
42 Fasteners must penetrate minimum'/"or full thickness of sheathing.
43 Additional fasteners may be required to ensure adequate security.
44 03 Place fasteners no closer than'/inch and no further than 2-inch from side
45 edge of trim board and no closer than 1-inch form end. Fasten maximum 16
46 inch on center.
47 04 Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade.
48 05 Trim inside corner with single board.
49 06 Install single board of outside corner board then align second corner board to
50 outside edge of first corner board. Do not fasten Harditrim board to
51 Harditrim board.
52 07 Allow 1/8-inch gap between trim and siding.
53 08 Seal gap with high quality,paintable caulk.
54 09 Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.
Project No. 1314-Fellowship Church 07460-3
F
1 10 Install harditrim fascia over structural substrate.
2
3
4 3.4 DAMAGED MATERIAL AND CLEANING
5
6 A. Protect and replace siding and related products from damage by other trades
7
8 B. Finish Hardiplank/Hard ipanel/Harditrim coated by the factory applied PrimePlus TM
9 system.
10
11 C. Siding shall be field painted under section 09900.Coordinate with painting contractor
12 to verify paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written
13 application instructions. �"
14
15
16 END OF SECTION
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41 h.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07460-4
P
1 SECTION 07620
2
3 SHEET METAL FLASHING
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT,SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
6 TO THIS SECTION.
7
8 PART 1—GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB for substitutions.
13
14 B. Sheetmetal flashing, collector heads, downspouts, transitions and miscellaneous
15 flashing.
16
17 1.2 SUBMITTALS
18
19 A. Product Data:submit manufacturer's product data for all products proposed to be
20 furnished.
21
22 B. Shop drawings:submit detailed shop drawings of all flashing and fabrications proposed
23 to be furnished.
24
25 C. Mockups:submit mock-ups of all flashing and fabrications proposed to be furnished.
26 Mock-ups,once accepted may be used in the final installation.
27
28 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
29
30 A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
31 manufacturers in satisfactory use in similar service for five years. Use experienced
32 installers. Deliver,handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's
33 instructions.
34
35 B. Reference Standards: Applicable portions of SMACNA,ASTM and NAAMM
36 publications.
37
38 1.4 WARRANTIES
I
39
40 A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard limited product
41 warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official,guaranteeing to correct
42 failures in product which may occur during the warranty period,without reducing or
' 43 otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner/Project Consultant
44 may have under the contract documents. Failure is defined to include product failure
45 which leads to interruption of a watertight installation. Correction may include repair or
46 replacement of failed product.
I
47
48 B. Contractor's Warranty period: For roofing flashing and sheet metal,provide a written
49 warranty which shall warrant work to be free of leaks and defects in materials and
50 workmanship for two(2)years,starting from date of substantial completion.
I
51
11 Project No.Fellowship 1314 07620- 1
1111111111111.,
I
1 C. Defects of the sheet metal occurringduringthe warranty
I
2 period shall be promptly
corrected by the contractor,and defects of the roofing shall be promptly corrected by
3 the manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner. Upon notification from the
I
4 Owner or the Owner's representative that evidence of a defect exists,the responsible
5 party shall immediately inform the Owner's representative of the date on which
6 corrective work will be scheduled,and shall notify the Owner's representative when
7 the corrective work has been completed. I
8
9 PART 2-PRODUCTS
10
11 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIAL1
12
13 A. Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel for use as continuous clips: Minimum 22-gauge,G-90,
14 hot-dipped galvanized metal,commercial quality,ASTM A 525.
15
16 B. Metal edge and parapet cap flashing,downspouts,gutters,coping and miscellaneous
17 metal:Hot-Dip Galvalume sheetmetal flat stock,commercial quality,meeting
18 ASTM A792/A and A792M.
19 01 Cap Flashing,coping and miscellaneous metal shall be minimum 24 gage.
20 02 Collector heads,downspouts and boots shall be minimum 22 gage.
21
22 C. Galvalume:an aluminum/zinc alloy containing approximately:
23 01 Aluminum: 55%
24 02 Zinc:43.5%
25 03 Silicon: 1.5%
26
27 C. Sheet Lead: QQ-L-201,Grade B.
28
29 2.2 FASTENERS
30
31 A. Nails,Rivets and Fastenings:
32 01 Nails shall be annular hot-dip galvanized for galvanized steel.
33 02 Rivets shall be Full stainless steel Series 42 or 44, as appropriate.Do not use
34 pop rivets where exposed to view.
35 03 Aluminum-flat head,sizes as required.
36
37 B. Fasteners shall be same metal as flashing/sheet metal,or other non-corrosive metal as
38 recommended by sheet manufacturer for the specific application. Match finish of
39 exposed heads with material being fastened.
40
41 C. Fasteners and fastening plates or bars shall be listed in the Factory Mutual Approval
42 Guide.
43
44 D. Fastener for Brick: Shall be one-fourth inch by two inches(1/4"x 2"),
45 steel or stainless steel nail,one piece unit,flat head. zinc with plated
46
47 E. Screws: Self-tapping sheet metal type with neoprene washer,as appropriate.
48
49 F. Continuous Clip: Concealed hold-down clip type;of same materials as coping,
gravel
50 guard,sized to suit application. Use a continuous clip,minimum 22-gauge G-90
51 galvanized.
52
53 2.3 RELATED MATERIAL
54
55 A. Solder: QQ-S-571 composition best suited for purpose;use high tin content,
56 minimum 60/40,for stainless steel and monel alloy.
57
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07620-2
1 B. Sealant(for Sheet Metal): One-component polyurethane,conforming to requirements
2 of FS TT-S-230C,non-staining and non-bleeding.
3
4 C. Butyl Sealer:
5 01 Where impractical to use solder at joints,corners,etc.,seal with"DAP Butyl
6 Gutter and Lap Sealer",or"Cushion-Lock CL-50 Butyl Sealer.
7
8 D. Miscellaneous Materials:
9 01 Downspout Boots: Cast iron by Neenah Foundry Company,Series R-4929,
10 minimum 36"length;or pre-approved equal.
11 02 Splash Blocks: Concrete,3000 psi,28 days. Provide and install with
12 protection pads at all new downspouts which surface drain.
13 03 Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips,straps,anchoring devices,and
14 similar accessory units as required for installation of work,matching or
15 compatible with material being installed,non-corrosive,size,and gauge
16 required for performance.
17
18 2.4 FABRICATION-GENERAL
19
20 A. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown,and with
21 applicable requirements of SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"and other
22 recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant
23 performance;with expansion provisions for running work,sufficient to permanently
24 prevent leakage,damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates.
25 Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Form exposed
26 sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning,buckling,and tool marks,true to line
27 and levels as indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
28
29 B. Fabricate gravel stops/fascia,gutters/downspouts,counter-flashings,pitch pans,
30 expansion joints,and copings with new galvanized sheet metal as specified. Fabricate
31 gravel guard and fascia to size and dimensions as indicated on the drawings. Fabricate
32 light metal coping,gutters and downspouts as indicated.
33
34 C. Form sheet metal on bending brake.
35
36 D. Shape,trim and hand seam metal on bench insofar as practicable.
37
38 E. Form materials with straight lines,sharp angles and smooth curves.
39
40 F. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edge to form hem(1/2"minimum).
. 41
42 G. Weld or solder joints on parts that are to be permanently and rigidly assembled.
43
44 H. Submit sheet metal models for approval by the Owner/Project Consultant.
45
46 I. Limit single-piece lengths to ten feet(10').
47
48 J. Fabricate corner pieces with eighteen inch(18")extensions,metered and sealed by
49 forming as one piece.
50
51 K. Surface sand flange prior to applying any primers on metal.
52
53 L. All sheet metal shall be sealed and watertight.
54
55 M. Metal work should be secured so as to prevent damage from buckling or wind. Where
56 clips are shown,these are to be continuous.
57
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07620-3
IA
mit
90.
II
1 N. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal
2 other than aluminum,tin edges are to be seamed,form seams,and solder.
3 I
4 O. Expansion Provisions: Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,not less
5 than one inch(1")deep,filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints).
6
7 P. Sealant Joints: Where movable,non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for I
8 proper performance of work,form metal to provide for proper installation of
9 elastomeric sealant,in compliance with industry standards.
10
IP
11 Q. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive
12 substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact,with bituminous coating
13 or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
14
15 R. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of roofing cement in accordance with roofing
16 system manufacturer's requirements where required for waterproof performance.
17
18
19 PART 3-EXECUTION
20
21 3.01 INSPECTION
22
23 A. Verify roof openings,curbs,pipes,sleeves,ducts or vents through roof are solidly set,
24 cant strips and reglets in place,substrates are smooth and clean and nailing strips
25 located.
26
27 B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place,sealed and secure.
28
29 C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of conditions.
30
31 3.02 PREPARATION
32
33 A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. Provide all shop drawings and
34 mock-ups one month prior to installation to the Owner/Project Consultant for approval.
35
36 B. Install starter and edge strips and cleats before starting installation.
37
38 3.03 INSTALLATION
39
40 A. General: All sheet metal termination to vertical wall shall have a through-wall with
41 receiver installed on masonry walls or prefabricated"Z"bar flashing pre-installed to
42 fluid applied wall finished prior to installation of sheet metal termination. This applies
43 to edge metal,base flashing closures and all vertical surface intersections. Refer to
44 NRCA,SMACNA,and metal manufacturer's guidelines.
45
46 B. Cap Flashing/Roof Edge Flashing:
47 01 Shall be installed with expansion joints,ten feet(10')on center,one-fourth
48 inch(1/4")expansion leeway,with a cover plate.
49 02 Secure metal flashings with continuous cleats on exposed face(s).
50 03 Lock seams and end joints.
It
51 04 Form sections identical to profiles as shown or approved similar,to match
52 existing building. w
53 05 Fabricate corner pieces with minimum eighteen inch(18"),maximum forty-
54 eight inch(48")extensions,formed and sealed with rivets and sealant,as one
55 piece.
56 06 Hem exposed edges three-fourths inch(3/4")minimum.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07620-4 I
1 07 Integrate flashing in a manner consistent with detailing.
2 08 Provide and install continuous clip around perimeter.
3 09 Shall be fabricated in accordance with all SMACNA provisions.
4
5 C. Counterflashing:
6 01 Install metal counterflashing at all interfacing work as required for a
7 permanent watertight installation.
8
9 D. Collector Head and Downspout:
10 01 Fabrication:
11 a. Fabricate collector head and downspout in size and profile to match
12 existing,taking care that the scupper boot and roof system interface
13 properly into the back of the collector head.Seal the pipe to the
14 collector head for water-tightness.
15 b. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.
16 c. Fabricate with required connection pieces.
17 d. Fabricate section square,true,and accurate in size,in maximum
18 possible lengths and free of distortion or defects detrimental to
19 appearance or performance.
20 e. Hem exposed edges of metal.
21 f. Form and seal all metal joints;provide for expansion joints per
22 SMACNA.
23 02 Installation:
24 a. Install collector head,downspout,and accessories.
25 b. Join lengths with seams pop riveted and sealed watertight. Flash and
26 seal collector head to downspouts and accessories.
27 c. Seal all metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact.
28 d. Support Brackets,Joint Fasteners: Profiled to suit gutters and
29 downspouts.
30 e. Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements. Type recommended
31 by fabricator.
32 f. Downspout Supports: minimum 1"x 22 gage Galvalume straps,
33 minimum 3 per downspout.
34
35 E. Pitch Pans:
36 01 Install pitch pans of 24-gauge G-90 galvanized sheetmetal according
37 to NRCA standards,minimum of six inches by six inches(6"x 6").
38 02 Pitch pans shall be fabricated to minimum of eight inches(8")above
I
39
40 03 the finished roof membrane.
Mastic shall be applied under pitch pan flange a minimum of one-half
41 pound(1/2#)per linear foot.
42 04 All metal flanges shall be primed with asphalt primer prior to flashing
I
43
44 installation. Inside of pitch pan shall be cleaned and primed as
required by pitch pan sealant manufacturer.
45 05 All projections enclosed in pitch pans shall be cleaned in any manner
46 suitable and coated with a rust inhibitive coating as approved by the
I
47 Owner/Project Consultant. Coating shall be allowed to dry prior to
48 pitch pan fill.
49 06 Base of pitch pans shall be filled with grout or cementitious binder to
50 proper height and allowed to cure.
I 51 07 Top finish fill shall be self-leveling,one-part urethane,with
52 maximum fill to within three-eighths inch(3/8")of top of pitch pan
53 sides.
1 54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07620-5
1 F. Bonnets/Hoods:
2 01 Fabricate and install above all pitch pans,where necessary,
3
reinstall as applicable,metal bonnets over all pitch pans,NO
4 EXCEPTIONS.
5 02 Bonnets/Hoods shall be manufactured with metal compatible with
6 metal to which bonnet is to be attached.
7 03 On beams and other steel,weld in place bonnets fabricated from
8 one-fourth inch(1/4")steel plate.
9 04 Draw band bonnets fabricated from 22-gauge galvanized steel may
10 be used on circular projections.
11
12
13 END OF SECTION
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07620-6 '
1 `
1 SECTION 07900
2
3 BUILDING SEALANTS
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
6 TO THIS SECTION.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Comply with Section 01300.
17
18 B. Product Data:
19 01 Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance
20 with specified requirements.
21 02 Manufacturer's installation instructions
22
23 C. On site sample for Architect's approval of colors.
24
25 1.3 INSTALLATION CONFERENCE:
26
27 A. Refer to Section 01420-Notification of Architect Requirements
28
29 1.4 REFERENCES
30
31 A. Federal Specifications TT-S-00227E
32
33 B. ASTM C793,ASTM C794
34
35 1.5 WARRANTIES
36
37 A. Warrant the work specified herein for two years against becoming unserviceable or
38 causing an objectionable appearance, resulting from either defective or
39 nonconforming materials and workmanship. Warrant exterior joints against failure of
40 the joint to effectively seal out water or moisture. Warrant interior joints against
41 cracking,crazing separation of the material from the substrate or other joint failure.
42
43 1.6 SCOPE OF WORK
44
45 A. This Section includes exterior sealants and sealants for moving joints and interior
46 caulking.
47
48 B. Refer to concrete specifications for paving sealants.
49
50 C. Refer to glass and glazing section for glass sealants.
51
52 PART 2-PRODUCTS
53
54 2.1 MATERIALS
55
56 A. abuttinCaulkig surfacfor exposed
s Batt ceiling,�walllnterioranglesoandons allat all otherl locations nsafor frames
nished
58 appearance:
59 Type: Tremco"Acrylic Latex 834"
60
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07900- 1
p
1 B. Exterior concrete joints, including drives,parking, sidewalks,play surfaces and other
2 flatwork:
3 Type: Tremco"THC 900/901"
4
5 C. Exterior highly active joints in walls,masonry or concrete fences:
6 Type: Tremco"Dymeric"
7
8 D. Exterior joints around windows, glazing, entrances, soffit joints and other general
9 sealant areas: Tremco"Mono"
10
11 E. Interior Expansion Contraction or Control Joints where movement is to be
12 accommodated: Tremco"Mono"
13
14 F. Primers, Cleaners, Top Coats: Use only materials listed as suitable in resistance to
15 staining,compatibility and durability before proceeding.
16
17 G. Back-Up Filler: Closed cell or open cell, non-gassing filler as recommended by
18 sealant manufacturer.
19
20 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
21
22 A. Tremco
23
24 B. Dow Chemical Co.
25
26 C. Sonneborn
27
28 D. Pecora,Inc.
29
30
31
32 PART 3-EXECUTION
33
34 3.1 APPLICATION
35
36 A. Temperatures: Do not install sealants when air temperature is under 40°Fahrenheit.
37 Sealants may be warmed to ease installation when recommended by the manufacturer.
38
39 B. Tooling: Tool exposed joints to a slightly concave surface using slicking materials
40 recommended by the manufacturer. The tooling procedure shall press sealant against
41 the sides of the groove. No materials shall be left "feathered" out or smeared on the
42 abutting materials.If necessary,protect adjacent surfaces with tape. Completed joints
43 shall have a uniform professional appearance. Use an anti-tack compound on sealant
44 that does not set up fast enough to avoid dust collection.
45
46 C. Sealant Back-Up: Provide a back-up filler where groove depth is too great to fill with
47 sealant.Review joint design with Architect.
48
49 D. Compressive Filler: Seal vertical expansion joints with fillers. Provide compressible
50 filler twice the width of the joint and with a depth of one and one-half times the
51 compressed width. Lap ends a minimum of 2 inches
52
53 E. Seal ends together in such a manner to allow natural drainage. Install filler by
54 compressing material and sliding into joint. Align filler on one face of the joint before
55 it expands to the full joint width.
56
57
58 END OF SECTION
59
Project No.Fellowship 1314 07900-2
1 SECTION 08110
2
3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 SUBSTITUTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SCOPE
15
16 A. Hollow metal doors
17
18 B. Hollow metal door and glazing frames
19
20 C. Related Work
21 01 Section 08213-Plastic Laminate Faced Wood Doors
22 02 Section 08215-Interior Aluminum Frames
23 03 Section 08710-Finish Hardware
24 04 Section 08800—Glass and Glazing
25
26 1.3 SUBMITTALS
27
28 A. Comply with Section 01300.
29
30 B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for all products
31 proposed to be furnished.
32
33 C. Shop Drawing: Show or schedule each door's location, size, thickness, details of
34 construction,fire rating where applicable.
35 01 Provide installation details indicating specific assemblies related to the work
36 of this project.Generic details are not acceptable.
37
38 D. Finish Hardware Location: Hollow metal manufacturer shall obtain an approved
39 hardware schedule, hardware templates and samples of physical hardware where
40 necessary to ensure correct fitting and installation.
41
42 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
43
44 A. References
45 01 National Fire Protection Association-NFPA Pamphlet No.80
46 02 American Society for Testing Materials:
47 a. ASTM A526 - Steel sheet, zinc-coated (galvanized) by hot dip
48 process, commercial quality
49 b. ASTM A366-Steel,carbon,cold-rolled sheet,commercial quality
50 03 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., in reference to fire-rated metal doors and
51 frames.
52 04 Factory Mutual,in reference to doors and frames.
53 05 American National Standards Institute:
54 a. ANSI A151-1-1969,Test Method for Standard Steel Doors
55 b. ANSI A250.11-2001 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel
56 Frames
57 06 NAAMM Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
58
59
60 B. Delivery,Storage and Handling
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08110- 1
1 01 Deliver, store and handle hollow metal work in strict accordance with
2 manufacture's recommendations to prevent damage, rust and deterioration.
3 Store materials in a covered, dry location and promptly clean and touch-up P
4 scratches or rust spots with a rust-inhibitive primer.
5 02 Doors shall have their wrappings or coverings removed upon delivery at the ir
6 building site and shall be stored in a vertical position spaced by locking for
7 air circulation. iir
8
9 PART 2-PRODUCTS i„
10
11 2.1 MATERIALS
lb
12
13 A. Doors ,r,,,
14 01 Doors shall be custom made, of types and sizes shown on reviewed shop
15 drawings, and shall be fully welded seamless construction with no visible
16 seams or joints on faces or vertical edges.Minimum door thickness shall be 1
17 3/4 inches,unless specifically noted or shown differently.
18 02 Doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warp and
19 buckle. Corner bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius for
20 gage of metal used. Provide 22 gage steel stiffeners spaced max. 6 inch o.c.
21 and extending full height of door.Fill interior with foamed in place urethane.
22 Use mineral filler as required for labeled doors.
23 03 Door Face Gages:
24 a. Doors 36"wide or less shall be 16 gage galvanized. IP
25 b. Doors 37"wide or more shall be 14 gage galvanized. lb
26 04 Faces shall be joined at vertical edges of door by a continuous weld
27 extending full height of door. Welds shall be ground, filled and dressed
28 smooth to provide a smooth flush surface. Oe
29 05 Top and bottom edges of doors shall be closed with a continuous recessed
30 steel channel not less than 16 gage, extending full width of door and spot oft
31 welded to both faces. Exterior doors shall have an additional flush closing
32 channel at top and bottom edges. Openings shall be provided in the bottom MP
33 closure channel at top and bottom edges. Openings shall be provided in the
34 bottom closure of exterior doors to permit the escape of entrapped moisture.
35 06 Edge profile shall be provided on both vertical edges of door as follows:
36 a. Single-acting swing doors-beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inch
37 07 Hardware Reinforcements:
38 a. Doors shall be mortised,reinforced,drilled and tapped at factory for
39 fully templated hardware, in accord with the reviewed hardware
40 schedule and template provided by Section 08710 - Finish
41 Hardware. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, doors PI
42 shall have reinforcing plates only.
mit
43 b. Minimum gages for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
44 1. Hinge&pivot reinforcements: 7 gage
45 2. Reinforcements for lock face, flush bolts, concealed IP
46 holders,concealed or surface-mounted closers: 12 gage
47 3. Reinforcements for lock face, flush bolts, concealed
48 holders,concealed or surface-mounted closers: 12 gage
49 08 Glass moldings and stops -Loose stops shall be not less than 18 gage steel, low
50 with butt corner joints, secured to frame opening by countersunk tamper
51 proof screws. Snap-on attachments will not be acceptable. .;
52 09 Edge Clearances:
53 a. Between door and frame at head and jambs: 1/8 inch if
54 b. At door sills with no threshold,5/8 to 3/4 inch above finished floor
55 c. At door sills with threshold,as required to suit threshold i,
56 d. Between meeting edges of double doors- 1/8 inch
57 10 Steel Louvers:Fabricate from 16 gage and galvanized(zinc coated),inverted
58 "V"blade,sight proof type,unless otherwise shown.
59 11 Exterior Doors and Frames shall be Hot Dipped Galvanized.
60
61 B. Frames
62 01 Frames for exterior openings shall be made of commercial cold rolled steel
63 conforming to ASTM A366,and shall be galvanized after fabrication. I
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08110-2 , I
1
1 02 Frames for interior openings shall be either commercial grade, cold-rolled
2 steel conforming to ASTM A366 or commercial grade hot rolled and pickled
3 steel conforming to ASTM A569.
4 03 Door Frame Gages:
5 a. Exterior door frames 48"wide or less shall be 14 gage
6 b. Exterior door frames 49"wide or more shall be 12 gage.
7 c. Interior door frames 48"wide or less shall be 16 gage.
8 d. Interior door frames 49"wide or more shall be 14 gage.
9 04 Frames shall be custom made, welded units with integral trim of sizes and
10 shapes shown on Drawings and required for the specific intended use.
11 05 Frames shall be strong and rigid,neat in appearance, square,true and free of
12 defects,warp and buckle.Molded members shall be clean cut,straight and of
13 uniform profile throughout their length.
14 06 Jamb depths,trim,profile and backbends shall be as shown on Drawings and
15 required for the specific intended use. 07 Corner joints
16 shall have contact edges closed tight, with trim faces mitered and
17 continuously welded, and stops butted. The use of gussets shall not be
18 permitted.
19 08 Minimum depth of stops shall be 5/8 inch.
20 09 Frames for multiple openings shall have mullion and rail members which are
21 closed tubular shapes having no visible seams or joints. Joints between faces
22 of abutting members shall be securely welded and finished smooth.
23 10 Hardware Reinforcements: Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and
24 tapped at factory for fully templated hardware in accordance with finish
25 hardware schedule and templates provided by Section 08710 - Finish
26 Hardware. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall
27 have reinforcing plates only.
28 11 Minimum thickness of hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
29 a. Hinge and pivot reinforcements (1-1/4" x 10" minimum size): 7
30 gage
31 b. Strike reinforcements: 12 gage
32 c. Flush bolt reinforcements: 12 gage
33 d. Closer reinforcements: 12 gage
34 e. Reinforcements for surface-mounted hardware, hold-open arms,
35 surface panic devices: 12 gage
36 12 Floor anchors shall be securely welded inside each jamb,with holes for floor
37 anchorage.
38 13 Jamb Anchors for frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided
39 with adjustable jamb anchors of the T-Strap type. Anchors shall be not less
40 than 16 gage steel.The number of anchors provided at each jamb shall be as
41 follows:
42 a. Frames up to 7'-6"height-3 anchors
43 b. Frames 7'-6"to 8'-0"height-4 anchors
44 c. Frames over 8'-0" height - 1 anchor for each 2 feet, or fraction
45 thereof in height.
46 14 Jamb Anchors for frames for installation in wood or metal stud partitions
47 shall be provided with steel anchors of suitable approved design, not less
48 than 16 gage thickness,securely welded inside each jamb as follows:
49 a. Frames up to 7'-6"height-4 anchors
50 b. Frames 7'-6"to 8'-0"height-5 anchors
51 c. Frames over 8'-0" height-Four anchors plus one additional for each
52 2 feet,or fraction thereof over 8 inches.
53 15 Jamb Anchors for frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete,
54 masonry or structural steel shall be provided with anchors of suitable design
55 as shown on reviewed shop drawings.
56 16 Dust cover boxes of not less than 26 gage steel shall be provided at all
57 mortised hardware items.
58 17 Frames shall be provided with steel spreader temporarily attached to bottoms
59 of both jambs for bracing during shipping and handling.
60 18 Loose glazing stops shall be of cold rolled steel, not less than 18 gage
61 thickness,butted at corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk
62 cadmium or zinc-plated screws. Loose stops at exterior frames shall be
63 placed on the exterior side of the frames unless otherwise shown.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08110-3
I
1 19 Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors I
2 on strike side. Provide two single silencers on frame head at double doors
3 without mullions.
4 I
5
6 C. Finish: Shop paint steel(whether galvanized or ungalvanized)stops and accessories as
7 follows:
8 01 Clean surfaces free of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign
9 matter.
10 02 Chemically treat surfaces and apply one coat of an approved baked-on rust-
11 inhibitive primer paint to provide a minimum 0.5 mil dry film thickness.
12
13 D. Labeled Doors and Frames
14 01 Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for openings requiring fire
15 protection ratings as scheduled. Such doors and frames shall be constructed
16 as tested and approved by Underwriters Laboratories or other nationally
17 recognized testing agency having a factory inspection service.
18 02 If any door or frame scheduled to be fire rated cannot qualify for appropriate
19 labeling because of its size, design, hardware or other reason; the Architect
20 shall be so advised before fabrication work on that item is started.
21
22
23 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
24
25 A. Hollow metal door and frame manufacturers shall be members of the National
26 Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)
27
28 B. The following manufacturers are prequalified to provide hollow metal doors and
29 frames subject to provisions and requirements of this section of specifications:
30 01 Curries
31 02 Ceco/United Dominion Industries
32 03 Republic Doors and Frames
33 04 Pearland Industries
34 05 Steelcraft
35 06 American Door Products
36 07 Door Pro Systems
37
38 PART 3-EXECUTION
39
40 3.1 INSTALLATION
41
42 A. Separate dissimilar metals,protect against galvanic action.
43
44 B. Frames
45 01 Anchorage and Connections. Firmly anchored and secure to adjacent
46 construction.
47 02 Frame Spreader Bars: Leave intact until frames are set perfectly square and
48 plumb and anchors are securely attached.
49 03 Remove hardware, with the exception of prime-coated items, tag box, and
50 reinstall after finish paint work is completed.
51 04 Installation of labeled frames shall conform to National Fire Protection
52 Association Pamphlet No. 80, "Fire Door and Windows" and UL design
53 requirements. I
54
55 C. Doors
56 01 Hang doors square, plumb and straight, firmly anchored into position.
57 Eliminate hinge bound conditions and making all items smooth operating.
I
58 Adjust operable parts for correct functions.
59 02 Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and
60 instructions.
61 03 Remove hardware, with the exception of prime-coated items, tag box, and I
62 reinstall after finish paint:work is completed.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08110-4
I
1 04 Installation of labeled doors shall conform to National Fire Protection
2 Association Pamphlet No. 80, "Fire Doors and Windows" and UL design
3 requirements.
4
5 D. Coordinate with other trades as required for installation of glass and glazing to be
6 installed in doors and frames.
7
8 E. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted and damaged areas of prime coat
9 and apply touch-up with compatible air-drying primer.
10
11
122 END OF SECTION
13
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08110-5
I
1 SECTION 08213
2
3 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED WOOD DOORS I
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1 -GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
14
15 1.2 SUBMITTALS
16
17 A. Manufacturer's specifications and other data of all products proposed to be furnished
18 as needed to prove compliance with specified requirements.
19
20 B. Submit Manufacturer's data sheets,completely describing door construction.
21
22 C. Shop Drawings: show or schedule location, size, thickness, elevation, details of
23 construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire rating and other pertinent
24 data for each door required.
25
26 D. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
27
28 E. Samples of plastic laminate colors and patterns for Architect's approval.
29
30
31 1.3 RELATED WORK
32
33 A. Section 08110—Hollow Metal doors and Frames
34
35 B. Section 08710—Finish Hardware t.
36
37 1.4 REFERENCES
38
39 A. Underwriters Laboratories:
40 01 UL Label Fire Door
41 02 UL 10-C Fire Test
42
43 B. National Codes:
44
01 National Fire Protection Association NFPA-252
45 02 IBC(edition having jurisdiction)
46 03
47
48 C. Architectural Woodwork Institute
49
50 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
51
52 A. High pressure decorative laminate faced doors shall conform to the latest edition of
53 the following standards:
54 01 WDMA I.S. 1-A
55 02 AWI Standards and requirements for"Premium Grade".
56
57 B. Tolerances for warp,telegraphing,squareness,and pre-fitting dimensions as per the
58 latest edition of WDMA I.S. 1-A
59
f
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08213- 1
' 1 C. Each door shall bear an identifying label indicating the manufacturer,door number
2 and order number,as well as fire rating where applicable.
3
4 D. Where fire rated doors are required,provide labeled doors.Construction details and
5 hardware application shall be as approved by the labeling agency.
6
7 1.6 WARRANTY
8
9 A. All doors shall be warranted for the life of the door under normal use against material
10 defects,warping,and delamination of laminate facing and becoming unserviceable.
11
12 B. Any defects noted during the warranty period shall be corrected at no cost to the
13 building owner. Such corrective work shall include all labor and material for repair,
14 replacement,refinishing and re-hanging as required.
15
16 C. Provide manufacturer's executed, written lifetime warranty with close-out
17 documentation.
18
19 PART 2-PRODUCTS
20
21 2.1 MATERIALS
22
23 A. Solid Core Wood Doors:
24 01 Thickness: 1-3/4 inch
25 02 Core Material: Particle Board Core for non-rated and 20-minute fire-rated
26 doors;mineral for 1-1/2 hour-rated doors.
27 03 Density: 28-32 lb PCF.Comply with particleboard standard ANSI A208.1,
28 Grade 1-LD-2.
29 04 Door Stiles: minimum 1-3/8"(nominal) Structural Composite Lumber(SCL)
30 with minimum 1/16" hardwood veneer suitable for staining or painting to
31 approximate plastic laminate finish as selected by the Architect.HDPL stiles
32 shall not be acceptable.
33 05 Door Rail: minimum 1-3/8"(nominal) Structural Composite Lumber(SCL).
34 Minimum 6" head rail at all doors to receive a closer. Rails shall be sealed
35 with a clear sealer. Where head rail may be visible from a second story
36 vantage point,head rail shall be stained or painted to match stiles.
37 06 Glass Lite Frames / Stops: Metal type with painted finish. Coordinate with
38 other trades as required.
39 07 Seal top, bottom and cut surface of openings at factory with two coats of
40 varnish.
41 08 Vertical door edges shall be factory painted / stained to match door face.
42 Factory shall supply matching paint/ stain and edges shall be touched-up in
43 field.
44
45 B. Plastic Laminate
46 01 Vertical grade, 1/16 inch thick.
47 02 Finish shall be as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of
48 colors and finishes.
49 03 Laminate shall be applied to the core by a hot press method using Type 1
50 exterior grade,water resistant adhesive.
51
52 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
53
54 A. Doors:
55 01 Alfab,Inc.
56 02 Marlite
57 03 Mengel Wood Industries,Inc.
58 04 Ragland Manufacturing Co.
59 05 VT Industries,Inc.
60 06 Weyerhaeuer
61 07 Laminating,Inc.
62 08 Graham Manufacturing Co.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08213-2
1
1
2
3
4 B. Plastic Laminate:
5 01 Ralph Wilson Plastics, "Wilsonart"
6 02 Formica Corp.,"'Formica"
7
8 PART 3-EXECUTION
9
10 3.1 INSTALLATION
11
12 A. Carefully verify that doors are properly installed at intended door location and that
13 door prep for finish hardware is accurate and complete.
14
15 B. Install all doors plumb arid square to frame with+/- 1/8"clearance between door and
16 frame.
17
18 C. Install finish hardware in accordance with approved templates.
19
20 D. Verify that top and bottom rails are sealed prior to door installation.
21
22 E. Take all necessary precautions to protect door finishes before, during and after
23 installation.In the event of damage to the plastic laminate surfacing,replace door.
24
25 F. Do not strip heads of Phillips head screws.Remove and replace all stripped screws.
26
27 G. Upon completion of door installation, cycle door several times to confirm that door,
28 frame and hardware are all installed and functioning correctly.
29
30
31
32 END OF SECTION
33
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08213-3
1 SECTION 08305
2
3 ACCESS DOORS
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SCOPE
15
16 A. Access door for roll-up grille where shown.
17
18 1.3 RELATED WORK
19
20 A. Access doors for mechanical and plumbing items. Division 15
21
22 B. Access doors for electrical items. Division 16
23
24 1.4 SUBMITTALS
25
26 A. Comply with Section 01300.
27
28 B. Product Data. Manufacture's specified and technical data.
29
30 PART 2-PRODUCTS
31
32 2.1 MATERIALS
33
34 A. Type.Flush steel door for gypsum wall board construction,(Fire rated by partition
35 type where applicable)
36
37 B. Size. 2'-0"x 3'-0" unless otherwise noted in drawings
38
39 C. Fronts. Provide flush frames
40
41 D. Hinges. Provide concealed type hinges
42
43 E. Finish. Provide rust inhibiting shop primer
44
45 F. Frames. 16 gauge
46
47 G. Doors. 14 gauge flush type
48
49 H. Lock. Flush screw driver operated with steel cam
' No.Fellowship Project 1314 08305- 1
I
2.2 MANUFACTURERS t
A. Milcor,Inc.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATIONPM
A. Coordinate locations with the trade that is constructing the material being penetrated.
B. Install according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
END OF SECTION
I
Project No. -5/16/2014 08305-2 '
O:\Design Docs\1 Jobs Under Contract\1314 Fellowship Church\Fellowship Specs-edited\Fellowship specs\08305 Access Doors FC 1314.doc
1 SECTION 08710
2
3 FINISH HARDWARE
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND
ONION 1,AS INDEXED,APPLY TO
6
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 SUBSTITUTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SCOPE
15
16 A. Furnish finish hardware as specified and scheduled.
17
18 1.3 RELATED WORK
19
20
21 A. Installation of Finish Hardware. Section 06220
22
23 B. Hardware for aluminum doors. Section 08800
24
25
26 1.4 SUBMITTALS
27
28 A. Comply with Section 01300
29
30 B. Shop drawings. Schedule the specified hardware sets correlated to the door
31 numbers shown on the drawings. Submit data sheets of the items proposed
32 for use.
33
34 C. Templates: As soon as schedules are returned, without exception, furnish
35 required template information to the various manufacturers for fabrication
36 purposes.
37
38 D. Upon completion, deliver to Owner (Construction Manager) two copies of
39 approved finish hardware schedule and keying schedule together with one set
40 of clearly marked installation tools and templates.
41
42 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
43
44 A. Installer. Finish hardware installer shall be a person or firm technically
45 proficient and experienced in this trade and shall be responsible for properly
46 detailing and fitting materials to the condition required by the drawings.
47 B. The Hardware Supplier shall have an AHC member is good standing and
48 make responsible for all Hardware in this specification.
49 C. Hardware Supplier is responsible for the complete Hardware function at each
50 door or door opening.
51 D. Fire Rated Openings. Provide hardware which complies with NFPA80 and
52 which has been tested and listed by UL or FM for the use indicated.
53
54 E. Standards for Handicapped. Comply with Section 7, Article 60 Ib, Vernon's
55 Texas Civil Statutes.
56
57
58
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08710- 1
'ft" 4011111111111111111101111111111iiMillassier.
1 PART 2-PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 GENERAL
4
5 A. Package each item of hardware separately. Mark each package with item
6 number corresponding to item number shown in the hardware schedule.
7
8 B. Keying: [Typical]
9 01 Furnish cylinders with construction cores or construction master
10 keyed, as applicable for lock type specified.
11 02 Confer with Owner for precise keying requirements
12 03 Stamp master keys. "DO NOT DUPLICATE"
13 04 Furnish three(3)keys each set.
14 05 Visual Key Control: Stamp keys and cores with key set symbol.
15 06 Master key and grand master key as directed to the [Best] system.
16
'
17
18 2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURES
19 Item Specified Manufacturer Approved
20 Manufacturers '
21 Hinges Hager Stanley
22
23 Pivots Rixson ABH,McKinney
24 I
25 Locksets Stanley Schlage,Best
26 Cylinder
27
28 Cylinder Cores Best Best,Falcon
29 Magnetic Locks
30 Exit Devices Stanley
31
32 Closers K2 Sargent
33
34 Miscellaneous Hagar Hiawatha,Ives
35 O.H. Stops
36 Pulls/Push
37 Flushbolts
38 Stops Hager Rockwood
39 Kickplates
40 Thresholds
41 Gasketing
42 Door Seals National Guards Rockwood
43
44
45
46
47 2.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
48
49
50 ****All hardware to be in satin chrome, or brushed aluminum when not
51 available,to coordinate with section 08800 finishes. ****
t
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08710-2
HOW SET 1
2 EA L-1 MORTISE CYL 8000566
1 EA N-3
HDW SET 2
3 EA B-1 BUTTS ECBB 1100 NRP 41/2 X 4112
1 EA 0-2 CLOSER QDC111
1 EA E-1 EXIT DEVICE QED 111 RIM 36"
1 EA E-3 EXIT TRIM QET 160
1 EA S-1 FLOOR STOP 243F
1 EA T-1 THRESHOLD 404S 36"
1 EA W-1 WEATHERSTRIP 2�VV 36
X 84
1 EA W-2 SWEEP
HDW SET 3
2 EA AS-1 ASTRAGAL SEAL 600 BB1"00 41 i2 X 41/2
6 EA B-2 BUTTS ECB211
2 EA C-1 CLOSER QDC
2 EA E-2 EXIT DEVICE QED 128 SVR 36 X 84 UL
2 EA E-3 EXITTRIM 0E7160
2 EA S-1 FLOOR STOP 243F
1 EA SM-1 SMOLE SEAL 5050 B
HDW SET 4
I 2 EA AS-1 ASTRAGAL SEAL 600 84"
6 EA B-2 BUTTS ECBB1100 4112 X 4112
2 EA C-1 CLOSER QDC 211
2 EA E-3 EXITTRIM 0E7160
t 2 EA E-4 FEXIT
LOOR VICE STOP QED 11736X84 EO
1 EA S-1 FLOOR 243F
I
HDW SET 5
3 EA B-2 BUTTS ECBB110041/2 X 41/2
1 EA C-1 CLOSER QDC 211
I
1 EA L-3 STOREROOM LOCK
QCL 270 PEA
2 EA S-1 FLOOR STOP 243F
I
i
Project No. Fellowship 1314 08710-3
I
111 ,
HOW SET 6
I
3 EA B-3 BUTTS EC1100 41/2 X 41/2
1 EA L-4 PRIVACY LOCK QCL 240 PEA
I1 EA S-1 FLOOR STOP 243F
IP
HDW SET 7
3 EA B-3 BUTTS EC1100 41/2 X 41/2
1 EA L-5 OFFICE LOCK QCL 250 PEA
1 EA S-1 FLOOR STOP 243F
HDW SET 8
3 EA B-3 BUTTS EC1100 41,2 X 41/2
1 EA L-2 PASSAGE LOCK QCL 230 PEA
1 EA S-1 FLOOR STOP 243F
HOWSET 9
3 EA 3-3 BUTTS EC1100 41/2 X 41/2
1 EA L-3 STOREROOM LOCK QCL 270 PEA
1 EA S-1 FLOOR STOP 243F
HDW SET 10
3 EA B-2 BUTTS ECBB1100 41/2 X 41;2
1 EA C-1 CLOSER QOC 211
1 EA PP-1 PUSH PLATE 33S
1 EA PP-2 PULL PLATE 33E
1 EA S-1 FLOOR STOP 243F
HDW SET 15
6 EA B-2 BUTTS ECBB1100 41/2 X 41/2
2 EA FB-1 FLUSH BOLTS 282D
1 EA L-3 STOREROOM LOCK QCL 270 PEA
2 EA S-1 FLOOR STOP 243F
1
I
2
3
I
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08710-4
I
1
1 PART 3-EXECUTION
2 3.1 COORDINATION
3
4 A. Prepare a complete schedule, including all items proposed for each opening
5 and other miscellaneous items. Submit four copies to the Architect for
6 approval before purchase of the material.
7
8 B. Prior to the final inspection by the Architect, the supplier shall check all
9 closers for proper operation after they have been installed and adjusted by the
10 Contractor, and he shall make necessary adjustments to those closers, which
11 prove to be difficult to adjust upon the initial attemer locations fpt of the Contractor. He
12 shall Contractor in cthe orrect ng faultto ensurey operation of any lock called to his attention
locksets and shall assist
13 theeCo
14 by the Contractor.
15
16 C. Supplier shall attend and chair a keying meeting with the Owner, Architect
17 and Contractor,once submittals have been reviewed.
18
19 D. Marking and Delivery: Mark each item of hardware for opening on which it
20 is to be used, and deliver a complete schedule to the Contractor when the
21 hardware is delivered. Should the marking of any item become separated
22 from the item after delivery, the item will be returned to the supplier by the
23 Contractor for remarking,before attempting to install it.
24
25 F. Keys shall be hand delivered to the Owner by the hardware supplier within 24
26 hours upon notification by the Architect.
27
28
29 3.2 INSTALLATION
30
31 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Provide
32 expansion shield anchors for hardware attachment to masonry and concrete.
33 Provide sex bolts and through bolts for all door closers.
34
35
36 B. Permanent cores shall be installed by the Contractor.
37
38
39
40 END OF SECTION
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08710-5
I
1 SECTION 08800 I
2
3 GLAZED SYSTEMS
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO
6 THIS SECTION.
7
I
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11 I
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Bidders for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SCOPE i"`
15
16 A. Work Included:
17 01 Exterior glass and aluminum framing systems and storefront systems.
18 02 Aluminum glass entry doors.
19 03 Glazing of plastic laminate doors.
20 04 Glazing of hollow metal doors.
21
22 B. Work Specified Elsewhere:
23 01 Section 08110-Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
24 02 Section 08213 -Plastic Laminate Doors
25 03 Section 08710—Finish Hardware.
26
27 1.3 SUBMITTALS
28
29 A. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified
30 requirements.
31
32 B. Manufacturer's complete installation instructions for system(s)proposed to be provided.
33
34 C. Shop Drawings: Complete shop drawings by manufacturer, indicating elevations, sections,
35 substrates, finishes, hardware and installation details. Details shall indicate/include actual
36 details relative specifically to this project; including substrates and interfacing work.
37 Standard,generic details shall not be acceptable.
38
39 D. Samples: Show manufacturer's full range of colors
40 01 Samples of each type of glass(12"x 12"minimum)
41 02 In place sample of sealant at frame perimeter for Architect's approval. Architect
42 shall select samples for review from manufacturers full color line.
43 03 Obtain hardware templates from finish hardware supplier.
44 04 Samples of framing finish for approval and fastener types.
45
46 p
E. Mock-up
ill47 01 In conjunction with mock-up wall required for masonry and back-up walls,
48 provide a mock-up window incorporated into the masonry mock-up.
49 02 Mock-up window shall be minimum 16"x 16"and shall include head,jamb, sill
50 framing members and sub-sill flashing.Glass is not required.
51 03 Construct in such a way that all fastening methods are viewable.
52 04 Perimeter of window shall be sealed continuous.
53 I
54 1.4 INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
r ,Project No.Fellowship 1314 08800- 1
or
1
2 A. Refer to Section 01420-Notification of Architect Requirements
3
4 1.5 REFERENCES
5
6 A. American National Standards Institute:
7 ANSI 297.1 - 1975 Safety Performance Specification
8 ANSI 297.1 - 1972 Safety Glass Code
9
10 B. Federal Specifications:
11 Fed.Spec.DD-G-001403 B
12 Fed.Spec.TT-S-00230 Sealing Compound:Synthetic Rubber Base and TT-S-00203C
13 Fed. Spec.TT-S-001657 Sealing Compound: Butyl Rubber Base
14 Fed.Spec.DD-G-451d
15
16 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
17
18 A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
19 the necessary crafts, and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
20 the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
21
22 B. Provide aluminum framing systems, doors, and windows from one source and supplied by
23 a single manufacturer.
24
25 C In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies
26 having jurisdiction,comply with pertinent recommendations contained in:
27 01 Flat Glass Marketing Association:
28 a. Glazing Sealing Systems Manual
29 b. Glazing Manual
30
31 1.7 WARRANTY
32
33 A. Submit a written warranty,executed by the entrance manufacturer,agreeing to repair or
34 replace units that fail in workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include,
35 but are not limited to:
36 01 Structural and performance failures,including excessive deflection,excessive
37 leakage,air infiltration beyond specified requirements.
38 02 Faulty operation of hardware directly related to items listed above.
39 03 Deterioration of metals,metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal
40 weathering.
41
42 B. Manufacturer's warranty period shall be 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
43
44 PART 2-PRODUCTS
45
46 2.1 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
47
48 A. Requirements apply simultaneously through the most adverse conditions of each exterior
49 application.
50 01 Wind loads: Design system to withstand positive and negative wind loads normal
51 to the plane of the wall in typical zone at 25 PSF. Wind Load is 110 MPH
52 02 Thermal Movement: Provide for noiseless expansion and contraction of all
53 materials and assemblies due to temperature changes in a range between 10°F and
54 180°F,without detriment to appearance or performance.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08800-2
I
I1
03 Water Infiltration: Drain water entering at joints and condensation occurring
2 within the wall construction to the exterior face of the wall. Allow no uncontrolled
3 water other than condensation on the interior face of the wall.
4 04 Air Filtration: Limit air leakage to maximum 0.005 cfm/ft2 at 6.24 psf. for
5 storefront and curtain wall systems.
6 t
7 2.2 MATERIALS
8
9 A. Glass:General:Glass shall meet the requirements of Fed.Spec.DD-G-451-d
10
I
11 B. Glass Types:
12 01 Type G-1 - 1/4 inch glazing quality"Grey"tempered glass.
13 02 Type G-2- 1/4 inch glazing quality,Low E,tempered glass.
14 03 Type G-3 - 1/4 inch clear wire safety glass, Type 1, Class 1, Kind A, Form 1. I
15 Pattern shall be straight diamond mesh or square grid,as selected by Architect.
16 04 Type G-4 - Insulated Glass—2 lites of'/" tempered glass separated by a ''/z" air
17 space.Air space to be dual sealed and meeting the certification requirements of the
I
18 IGCC for a CBA rating. Exterior glazing shall be tinted tempered type Gl glass;
19 interior glazing shall be clear tempered type G2 glass.
20 05 G5—Spandrel Glass: Ceramic grit coated heat strengthened glass,Fed.Spec.DD-
21 G-001403, 1/" thick, color selected by Architect. Color: match type G-1 tinted t
22 glass.
23 06 G6—Acoustical Glass:one sheet of%"wire glass(G3)and one layer of 3/8"clear
24 laminated glass. Install in acoustical retardant doors provided in section 08386.
I
25
26 C. Aluminum Entrance Doors: Oldcastle Building Envelope Model 375 or equivalent product
27 from list of approved manufacturers. [111F28 01 Tubular sections:4 1/4 inch vertical stiles,3 1/2 inch top rail and 8 1/2 inch
29 overall bottom rail;with 0.125 inch minimum thickness at all tubular sections. illi
30 02 ASTM B221,alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions;ASTM B209,alloy 5005-H16 for
31 sheets;or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for
32 specified finish.
33 03 Connections: Provide bolted and welded connections,fit to a hairline joint.
34 04 Provide reinforcing at bolted attachments. Tapped aluminum is not permitted.
35 05 Provide concealed screws, nuts, bolts, and anchors, except hardware screws on
36 hinge and closer-arm of door,of non-corrosive metal.
37 06 Finish: Clear anodized aluminum.
38 07 Glass in Door: Type G-4 at all exterior locations. Ili
39 08 Use manufacturer's recommended gaskets for flush glazing(color"black").
40 09 Refer to Section 08710 for finish hardware requirements. Coordinate with other `
41 trades as required.
42MI
43 D. Aluminum Storefront/Entrance/Window Framing System: Oldcastle Building Envalope rr
44 Series 3000;or equivalent product from manufacturers list:
45 01 Size: 2"x 4'h"mullion profile;pressure glazed,center glaze,exterior loaded; ett
46 available with butt glazed verticals; to accept 1"glazing. Provide sub-frames at
47 door jambs on entrances as required to accept Medium Stile doors. '""
48 02 Provide mullion reinforcement, if necessary, to achieve structural requirements to
49 meet loading criteria. Au
50 03 Intermediate horizontal mullions shall be undersized a minimum of 1 inch less a,
51 depth than perimeter/primary framing member size.
52 04 Finish: Clear anodized aluminum.
53 05 Glass: G-4 at all exterior locations. G-4 at transoms.Type G-5 where indicated.
54 06 Glass pockets shall be sized to accept glass specified.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08800-3
1 07 Provide sill flashing with end dams.
2
3 F. Aluminum:
-, 4 01 ASTM B221,alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions;ASTM B209,alloy 5005-H16 for
5 sheets;or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for
6 specified finish.
7 02 Minimum thickness of 0.125 inch for framing members and 0.050 inch for glazing
8 stops and similar components.
9
10 G. Internal Reinforcing:
11 01 ASTM A36 for carbon steel;or ASTM B308 for structural aluminum.
12 02 Shapes and sizes to suit installation.
13 03 Shop coat steel components after fabrication with alkyd type zinc chromate primer
14 complying with FS TT-P-645.
15 04 Provide steel reinforcing in aluminum framing as required to achieve specified
16 wind load resistance.
17
18 H. Inserts and Anchorage Devices:
19 01 Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated assemblies,steel or aluminum,of
20 shapes,plates,bars or tubes.
21 02 Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies after fabrication;comply with ASTM A123,
22 2.0 ounce minimum coating.
23 03 Provide all anchoring angles, plates, fasteners and accessories required for secure
24 attachment to adjacent work.
25
26 I. Fasteners:
27 01 Non-magnetic stainless steel or cadmium plated steel coated with yellow or silver
28 iridescence plating,compatible with materials being fastened.
29 02 Series 300 stainless steel for exposed locations. Cadmium plated steel with 0.0005
30 inch plating thickness and color chromate coated for concealed locations.
31 03 Provide nuts or washers of design having the means to prevent disengagement;
32 deforming of fastener threads is not acceptable.
33 04 Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible.
34 05 For exposed locations,provide countersunk flathead fasteners with finish matching
35 item fastened.
36 06 All fasteners used to secure the sub-sill flashing and sill frame member shall be
37 bedded in sealant at penetrations through window assembly components.Heads of
38 fasteners at these locations shall be covered with sealant.
39
40 J. Sub-Sill Flashing
41 01 All glazed systems shall be furnished with continuous sub-sill flashing, spanning
42 the full width of the rough opening.
43 02 Sub-sill flashing shall be minimum 0.065"aluminum with integral(turned up)end
44 dams and back dams.Minimum height of dams shall be 1".
45 03 Open vertical joint at end dam / back dam junction shall be TIG welded
46 continuous to form a seamless dam component directing any/all trapped water to
47 outside of building.
48 04 Finish of sub-sill flashing shall match frame finish.
49
50
51 K. Miscellaneous Materials:
52 03 Provide material isolators at all dissimilar metals in contact with aluminum
53 framing components.
54 04 Where indicated on the Drawings provide minimum 0.080" aluminum extrusions
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08800-4
1.
1 or break metal between non-contiguous framing components (i.e. segmented
2 radius walls,column wraps,etc.).Fabricate as required for concealed fastening.
3
4 L. Glazing Materials at Aluminum Framing: la
5 01 Glazing Gaskets: Extruded neoprene conforming to ASTM C-502(color"black"),
6 sized to fit the frame.
7 02 Sealant: Comply with Fed. Spec.TT-S-00230
I
8
9 M. Glazing Materials at Hollow Metal Frames:
10 01 General: Use glazing compound and preformed glazing sealants approved for the I 1
11 application, except as otherwise specified, conforming to Glazing Materials
12 portion of the FGMA.Glazing Manual.
13 02 Sealant:
14 a. One part acrylic polymer sealant conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-S-00230
I
15 or silicone, Fed. Spec. TT-S-0023-C. Use for glazing of all fixed glass.
16 Include primer as recommended by manufacturer.
17 b. Color: Shall]as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
I
18 c. All sealants to be compatible w/adjacent material per mfg.instructions.
19 03 Setting Blocks: Hard rubber or clean grain softwood.
20 04 Back-up Material: Foamed polyethylene or polystyrene rod stock; sizes as
21 required by joint condition,and compatible with sealant.
I
22 05 Glazing Tape: DAP#1202 or as approved.
23 06 Glazing Gaskets: Extruded neoprene, free of porosity, surface defects,
24 dimensional irregularities,and conforming to physical properties of ASTM C502.
25 07 Use of metal sash putty will not be permitted, but compound conforming to Fed.
26 Spec. T-G-410 will be permitted. The use of non-skinning compounds, non-
27 resilient type preformed sealers and preformed impregnated type gaskets will not
28 be permitted.
29
30
31
32
33 2.4 MANUFACTURERS
34
35 A. Glass:
36 01 Oldcastle Glass
37 02 PPG Industries
38 03 Ford Glass
39 04 AFG Industries,Inc.
40 05 HGP Industries
41
42 B. Aluminum Framing System and Doors:
43 01 The Vista-Wall Group(basis of design)
44 02 U. S.Aluminum
45 03 YKK AP American,Inc.
46 04 EFCO
47 05 Arch Aluminum
48 06 Kawneer
49
50
51 PART 3-EXECUTION
52
53 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08800-5
1 A. Thoroughly examine conditions at each and every location under which work of this
2 Section will be performed.
3 01 Verify that each rough opening is the correct size for the framing being installed.
4 Maximum allowable joint at perimeter of framing shall be 5/8". Inform general
5 contractor of any non-conforming rough openings and do not proceed until
6 unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
7 02 Verify that the sub-sill substrate is continuous, solid, level and at the proper
8 elevation for installation of sub-sill flashing. Sub-sill flashing must be set in a
9 100% bed of sealant without any voids. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
10 conditions are corrected.
11
12 B. Verify that wood bloecking, thru-wall flashing, masonry and other adjacent work is
13 installed as required for the proper installation of aluminum framing prior to proceeding.
14 Inform general contractor of any non-conforming work and do not proceed until
15 unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
16
17 C. Clean glazing channels, stops, and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free
18 from obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work.
19 01 Remove protective coatings which fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of
20 sealants.
21 02 Comply with manufacturer's'instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately
22 prior to application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes.
23 03 Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's
24 recommendations.
25
26 3.2 INSTALLATION—ALUMINUM FRAMING
27
28 A. Install all aluminum framing in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation
29 standards and recommendations;firmly anchored for long life under hard use.
30
31 B. All sill members of fixed frames shall be installed with continuous aluminum sub-sill
32 flashing(with end dams).
33 01 Set sill flashing in 100%bed of sealant.
34 02 All fasteners used to anchor sub-sill flashing shall be completely bedded in sealant
35 prior to installation of sill framing.
36 03 Coordinate with dampproofing sub-contractor to install additional thru-wall
37 flashing at base of jambs to lap over/onto aluminum sub-sill flashing—prior to
38 installation of sill framing member(s).Coordinate as required.
39
40 C. Shim and center framing within rough opening. Maximum sealant joint at perimeter of
41 framing shall be 5/8". Coordinate with other trades to correct rough opening where
42 perimeter joint will exceed 5/8".
43
44 D. Erection Tolerances:
45 01 Maximum Deviation from Vertical: 1/8 inch in any story and 1/4 inch in any 45
46 foot run.
47 02 Maximum Deviation from Horizontal: 1/8 inch in any 30 foot run.
48 03 Maximum Deviation from True Alignment: 1/32 inch from any two abutting units;
49 and horizontal components meeting at a vertical mullion. Allow no edge
50 projections.
51 04 Maximum Joint Cap: 1/32 inch.
52 05 Maximum Openings Between Movable Glazing Stop and Adjacent Member: 1/32
53 inch.
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08800-6
1 3.3 INSTALLATION—GLASS
2
3 A. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation.
4 01 Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges, are
5 scratched,abraded,or damaged in any other manner.
6 02 Do not remove labels from glass until so directed by the Architect.
7 03 Install glass so distortion waves,if present,run in a horizontal direction. 1i
8
9 B. Locate setting blocks at sills one quarter of the width of the glass in from each end of the
I
10 glass,unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer.
11 01 Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with the
12 manufacturer's recommendations.
13 02 Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass
I
14 from stops,except where continuous glazing gaskets or felts are provided.
15 a. Locate spacers no more than 24 inches apart, and no closer than 12
16 inches to a corner.
I
17 b. Place spacers opposite one another.
18 c. Make bite of spacer on glass 1/4 inch or more.
19
20 C. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in
I
21 appearance.
22
23 D. Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system, unless the joint use is
I
24 approved in advance by the Architect.
25
26 E. Mask,or otherwise protect surfaces adjacent to installation or sealants.
27
I
28 F. Install all glass, gasket and aluminum framing in strict accordance with manufacturer's
29 printed instructions.
30
I
31 G. Caulk joints continuous at exterior and interior faces of framing and elsewhere as indicated,
32 as required to meet performance specifications using materials specified in Sealants -
33 Section 07900. Follow sealant manufacturer's printed instructions for the installation of his
34 product. I 35
36 3.4 PROTECTION
37
I
38 A. Protect glass from breakage after installation by promptly installing streamers or ribbons,
39 suitably attached to the framing and held free from glass. Do not apply warning markings,
40 streamers,ribbons,or other items directly to the glass,except as specifically directed by the
41 Architect. I 42
43 B. Protect all window framing during and after installation from marring,blemishes, scratches
44 and damage due to incidental adjacent work. If damaged, make all necessary repairs or
45 replacements in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as directed by
46 the Architect.
47
48 END OF SECTION I 49
I
I
Project No.Fellowship 1314 08800-7
I
1 SECTION 09220
2
3 LATH AND PLASTER
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1 -GENERAL
10
11 1.1 SUBSTITUION
12
13 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
14
15 1.2 SCOPE
16
17 A. Exterior cement plaster
18 B. Basis of design: Synergy Stucco System 7/8"overall thickness
19
20 1.3 RELATED WORK
21
22
23 1.4 SUBMITTALS
24
25 A. Manufacturer's specifications and product data for all products proposed to be
26 furnished as required to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements.
27
28 A. Shop drawings showing all primary and secondary framing; including coordination
29 with adjacent and interfacing work and fixtures.
30 01 Show locations and types of all proposed joints.
31
32 C. Samples.
33 01 Color chart showing full range of colors for finish coat.
34 02 12"x 12"sample of each type to be used.
35
36 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
37
38 A. American Society for Testing and Materials
39 01 ASTM C6-49,(1974)Normal Finishing Hydrated Lime
40 02 ASTM C35-76,Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster.Type II
41 03 ASTM C207-76,Hydrated lime for Masonry Purposes
42 04 ASTM C-1063 installations of lathing and furring for Portland Cement
43 plaster.
44 05 ASTM C-926 application of Portland Cement plaster.
45 06 ASTM C-91,Masonry Cement
46
47 B. Sealants and Backer rods as required at dissimilar materials and expansion joints
48 within the stucco wall system shall provide a complete watertight system.
49
50 C. System shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's product
51 specifications.
52
53 D. American Subcontractor's Association: ASA No.A42.4
54
55 E. Texas Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association/Texas Bureau for Lath and
56 Plaster.
57
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09220- 1
1 PART 2-PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 MATERIALS
4
5 A. Furring and Lathing
6 01 Metal Lath. Expanded type, Permalath 1000, 17ga, weighing 2.5#/sq.yd.,
7 galvanized. Use"dimpled" self-furring type on concrete surfaces.
8 02 Screws. Self-tapping, Stainless Steel.
9 03 Lathing Channels. Cold rolled from 16 gauge steel, hot dip galvanized 3/4"
10 weighing 316 lbs.per 1000 lin.ft.
11 04 Main Runner Channels. 1-1/2" cold rolled galvanized channels weighing
12 508 lbs.per 1000 lin.Ft.
13
14 B. Accessories: Pure Zinc alloy unless otherwise noted.
15 01 Casing Bead. 26 gauge expanded flange casing, with 3"wings and grounds
16 of depth of plaster specified.
17 02 Control joints. 26 gauge,double"V"design with 1 3/4"wings.
18 03 Expansion joints. 26 gauge,equal to Keene#40.
19 04 Corner Bead. 26 gauge expanded to wings of 2-5/8".
20 05 Interior Corner Reinforcement. 2"x 2" or corner master#30 USG self-edge
21 cornerite,or Cornermaster#30.
22 06 Wire. Cold drawn annealed galvanized. Provide gauge nos. 8, 10, 12 and
23 14.Drip Screed. Fry Reglet Corp.,aluminum drip screed DS-875,or slotted
24 vent DS-875 V-200 as shown.
25
26 C. Cement Plaster
27 01 Portland cement. Comply with ASTM C-150,Type I.
28 02 Lime. Comply with ASTM C-206, Type S and Fed. Spec. SS-L-00351a,
29 Type F.
30 03 Sand. Provide sand that meets ASTM C-144 (Sharp Torpedo Type) finish
31 coat graded per ASTM C842.
32 04 Water. Potable
33 05 Fiberglass Strands. 1/2 inch alkaline resistant
34 06 Finish. SMOOTH
35
36 E. Finish Type
37 01 Acrylic Polymer Finish Coat
38 02 Smooth as possible,no course aggregate
39
40
41 2.2 MIXES
42
43 A. Portland Cement Plaster
44 01 Scratch and Brown Coat
45 1 sack Portland cement
46 2 sacks masonry mix
47 9 cu.ft.sharp torpedo plaster sand
48 1-1/2 lbs.of 1/2" alkaline resistant fiberglass strands
49 02 Brown coat for all Portland cement plaster shall be mixed in the same
50 proportions as scratch coat with addition of 1 cu. ft. plastering sand and
51 liquid and powdered waterproofing used according to the manufacturer's
52 recommendations.
53 03 Stucco Finish Coat: Oriental Plaster Mix.
54 04 Acrylic Finish.Coat: Factory mixed 100%pure acrylic based integral color.
55
56 2.3 MANUFACTURERS
57
58 A. Stucco
59 01 Synergy Sentry Stucco
60 02 National Gypsum Co.
61 03 United States Gypsum Co.
62
63 B. Lath&Metal
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09220-2
1 01 Alabama Metal Industries Corp.
2 02 Bailey Metal Products Limited
3 03 Bostwick Steel Lath Co.
4 01 Marino Industries
5 05 United States Gypsum Co.
6 06 Western Metal Lath Co.
7 07 Dietrich
8
9 C. Acrylic Finish Coat
10 01 Dryvit
11 02 Finestone
12 03 R-Wall
13 04 Senergy
14 05 STO
15
16 PART 3-EXECUTION
17
18 3.1 PREPARATION
19
20 A. Cold Weather
21 01 Do not use frozen material.
22 02 Do not apply cement plaster to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost.
23 03 Do not mix materials or apply cement plaster when ambient temperature is
24 less than 35°F/1.6°C.
25 04 A temperature of at least 55°F must be maintained prior to plaster
26 application, during its application, and until it is dry. Any plaster work,
27 which freezes within 48 hours of application, shall be removed and replaced
28 with new plaster.
29
30 B. Hot Weather
31 01 Protect cement plaster from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot,
32 windy,and dry weather.
33 02 Moist curing after each coat of cement plaster with water if ambient
34 temperature is more than 75°F/24°C. Moist cure for 48 hours after
35 application of coats.
36 03 Hot, or dry, or windy weather the cement plaster should be moistened down
37 and then covered with a single sheet of polyethylene plastic(clear only).
38 04 Moist curing is required at the start and end of workday.
39 05 Humidity higher than 75 percent. Moist curing not required.
40
41 C. Remove rust, oil, grease or other foreign substance, which might hinder good bond
42 from lath immediately prior to application of plaster.
43
44 D. Commencing work shall be construed as acceptance of preceding work performed by
45 others as suitable to receive work specified in this division.
46
47 E. Erect and maintain scaffolding in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations,
48 local or other.
49
50 F. Manufactured products shall be delivered in original packages, containers or bundles,
51 bearing manufacturer's name and brand.
52
53 G. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's direction. Protect mixes from frost, dust and
54 evaporation. Clean mixers,boxes and tools after each batch.
55
56 H. Mix thoroughly with correct amount of water until uniform color consistency.
57 Measure materials accurately.
58
59 I. Mix materials dry to uniform color and consistency,before adding water.
60
61 J. Mix only as much plaster as can be used in one hour.
62
63 K. Do not re-temper mixes after initial set has occurred.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09220-3
1 L. Do not apply finish coat when there is any form of precipitation. Protect cement plaster
2 from all forms of precipitation during the application and the setting/curing period of
3 finish coat.Ensure that the finish is fully set prior to removing protective covering.
4
5 M. All stucco shall be 1"think and acrylic finish applied with last coat.
6
7 3.2 APPLICATION
8
9 A. Furring and Soffit Framing:
10 01 Main runner channels (1-1/2") and lath channels shall be spaced at 2'-0"o.c
11 (3/4")channels spaced 16"o.c.
12 02 The use of 16 gauge galvanized ,wood studs (3-1/2" wide) may be used as
13 miscellaneous framing to achieve geometry approved by the Architect in the
14 field.
15 03 All galvanized hanger wires shall be spaced at 4'- 0" o.c. max. Do not use
16 power actuated anchors through metal deck for wire supports.
17 04 Prepare all framing to receive and control joints.
18 02 Exterior soffit locations provide 1 1/2 cold rolled channel stiffeners secured to
19 structure above,space 2 ft.,each way.
20
21 B. Metal Lath(Felt Backed)
22 01 Secure lath to sheathing by securely fastening per manufacturers minimum
23 standards.
24 02 Lap metal lath at least 2 inches over supports.
25 03 Apply lath with long dimension of sheet across supports.
26 04 All lath shall be tightly stretched,free from looseness,bags,and bulges.
27 05 PERMA LATH 1000 with two layer of water-resistant barrie (grade D or
28 better over wood sheathing)
29
30 C. Metal Corner Beads
31 01 Provide on all external plaster corners in single lengths where length of the
32 corner does not exceed 12 feet.
33 02 Fasten securely with tie wire spaced 8"o.c.staggered in two wings.
34
35 D. Casing Beads
36 01 Install at edges of all horizontal planes and elsewhere as indicated on
37 drawings.
38 02 All junctions shall be mitered.
39 03 Horizontal surfaces shall be isolated from all vertical surfaces.
40
41 E. Control Joints
42 01 It is not required to cut lath behind control points, it is required to cut lath
43 behind expansion joints.
44 02 Panels should be relatively square.
45 03 Notify architect if plaster areas exceed 18 lineal feet in length without a
46 control joint.
47 04 Install control joints for surface areas of approximately 150 square feet
48 whether shown or not. Verify locations with Architect.
49 05 Install where dissimilar back-up materials join whether detailed or not.
50
51 F. Portland Cement Plaster
52 01 Trowel apply base coat with sufficient force to form good keys and bond.
53 Allow to harden and scratch to produce rough surface. Keep moist until
54 application of brown coat.
55 02 Apply brown coat, scratch for bond and allow to set hard. Keep moist until
56 application of finish coat.
57 03 Use in all exterior locations and interior locations where noted.
58 04 Finish Coat
59 a. Stucco finish at all ceilings and exterior soffits; apply and cure in
60 accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Match texture
61 of approved sample.
62 b. Acrylic finish at all exterior walls. Mix and apply in accordance
63 with manufacturer's written instructions. No scaffold lines or other
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09220-4
1 marks are allowed due to the application. Match colors and textures
2 of approved samples.
3
4
5 3.3 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION
6
7 A. Rubbish and debris shall be removed as often as necessary. As each room or space is
8 complete,remove all rubbish,debris,scaffolding and tools,and leave broom clean.
9
10 B. Clean plaster spots from work of other trades. Protect finish plaster from injury.
11
12
13
14 END OF SECTION
15
I
1
1
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09220-5
1 SECTION 09260
2
3 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
6 TO THIS SECTION.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Section AB and AF for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SCOPE
15
16 A. Work Included:
17 01 Metal framing for gypsum board construction
18 02 Gypsum board
19 03 Hollow Metal Frames(shall be installed under this sections)
20 03 Sheathing
21
22 B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
23 01 Section 06100-Rough Carpentry
24 02 Section 05410-Light Gauge Steel Framing
25 03 Section 05500-Miscellaneous Steel
26 04 Section 07160-Through-Wall Flashing and Dampproofing
27 05 Section 07210-Building Insulation
28 06 Section 09510-Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings
29 07 Section 09900—Painting and Staining
30 08 Section 09960-Vinyl Wall Covering
31
32 1.3 SUBMITTALS
33
34 A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and other data for all products proposed
35 to be furnished as needed to prove compliance with specified requirements.
36
37 B. Third-party test results of documentation that wood framing products meet specified
38 performance and physical properties.
39
40 C. Manufacturer's installation instructions for all products proposed to be furnished.
41
42
43 1.4 REFERENCES
44
45 A. ANSI A97.11
46
47 B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM):
48 01 ASTM C 473—Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum
49 Panel Products.
50 02 ASTM C 475-Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape
51 for Finishing Gypsum Board.
52 03 ASTM C 840-Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of
53 Gypsum Board.
54 04 ASTM C954-10—Standard Specifications for Steel Drill Screws for the
55 Application of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Studs
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09260-1
1 05 ASTM C1002—07-Standard Specifications for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping
2 Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Studs
3 06 ASTM C1177-Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for
4 Use as Sheathing.
5 07 ASTM C 1280-Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum
6 Sheathing.
7 08 ASTM C 1396-Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
8 09 ASTM E 119-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building
9 Construction and Materials.
10
11 C. Gypsum Association:
12 01 GA-214-Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
13 02 GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
14 03 GA-253-Application of Gypsum Sheathing.
15 04 GA-290-Area Separation Walls.
16 05 GA-600-Fire Resistance Design Manual.
17
18 1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
19
20 A. Wood Framing: Provide non-load bearing wood stud partitions with deflections
21 conforming to L/360 at 5 PSF for ceramic tile finished walls; and L/240 at 5 PSF for
22 typical gypsum board walls(interior). Exterior L/240 at 30PSF for exterior studs.
23
24 B. Fire-Resistive Rating: Where indicated on Drawings, provide materials and
25 construction that are identical to those assemblies whose fire resistance rating has
26 been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable
27 to authorities having jurisdiction.
28 01 Meet or exceed fire resistance requirements outlined under provisions of the
29 GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual for wall and ceiling assemblies.
30 02 Meet or exceed Class A flame/fuel/smoke requirements of ASTM E 84
31 surface burning characteristics for finish materials.
32
33 C. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings,
34 provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated
35 according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified
36 independent testing agency.
37
38 D. Impact-Resistant Characteristics: No structural failure at 400 foot pounds per ASTM
39 E 195.
40
41 E. Mold-Resistant Characteristics: Rating of 10 according to ASTM D 3273 mold
42 testing.
43
44 F. Gypsum Wall Board be"Tough Rock Abuse"where shown on the plans.
45
46
47
48
49
50 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
51
52 A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing name and
53 identification of manufacturer or supplier.
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09260-2
1 B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from
2 weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and '
3 other causes.Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
4
5 C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges,ends, and surfaces.Do not bend or
6 damage metal corner beads and trim. I 7
8 PART 2-PRODUCTS
9
I
10 2.1 STUD FRAMING MATERIALS
11
12 A. All wood framing members shall be studs and top plates and base plates shall be
13 according to Rough Carpentry. I 14
15 01 Provide in sizes as indicated on the drawings and required for the actual
16 installation assembly.
I
17 03 Sizes of studs shall be based on 16" O.C. framing with the maximum,
18 laterally unbraced height at each condition in accordance with the following
19 schedule based on gypsum board applications;5PSF at L/360:
20 Stud Gvp Bd P
21 Size Lavers
22 5-1/2" 1 layer ea side
23 3-5/8" 1 layer ea side
24 04 Where heights exceed limits stated above, framing at less than 16" O.C. or
25 use of size shall be allowed,conditional on submittal of engineered
26 calculations for each specific condition;sealed and signed by a Texas
27 licensed structural engineer.
28
29 B. Studs at all framed door and window openings shall be installed with full-height(floor
30 to top of wall),double studs at jambs.
31 01 Double studs at opening shall be clipped / fastened together to result in a
32 single composite assembly.
33 02 Coordinate with other trades where additional miscellaneous steel bracing is
34 required.
35 03 Framed openings for mechanical and similar work shall be framed as
36 required for the assembly. Fastening directly to ductwork is not permitted.
37 Coordinate with other trades as required.Adhere to U.L.requirements at fire
38 rated partitions.
39
40 C. Structural bracing as required,Reference Structural for Details
41
42
43 2.2 WALL AND CEILING BOARD MATERIALS:
44
45 A. General Design Basis: All gypsum wallboard shall be USG 5/8 inch thick, Type X,
46 tapered-edged.Sizes shall be 4'-0"wide by longest practical length to minimize joints.
47 01 Suitable for use in fire rated assemblies.
48
49 A. Humidity Resistant Gypsum Wallboard shall be USG 5/8",Type X, Sheetrock"Mold
50 Tough"gypsum panels.
51 01 Panels shall comply with ASTM D3273.
52 02 Use at all walls in high humidity at restrooms, non-air-conditioned interior
53 spaces/rooms)that do not receive a ceramic tile finish.
54 03 Also provide within 24"of all sinks and lavatories.
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09260-3
1 C. Ceramic Tile Substrate: A cement-based backer board manufactured specifically for
2 ceramic tile substrate and use in wet locations. Use as wall board substrate at all
3 ceramic tile finished surfaces.
4 01 Minimum 5/8 inch thick
5 02 Provide / install in greatest size sheets possible (48" x 96" or larger) to
6 minimize joints.
7 03 Use joint reinforcement and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's
8 printed instructions.
9 04 Acceptable manufacturers/products include:
10 a. USG"Durock"(basis of design)
11 b. James Hardie Industries HardieBacker
12 c. National Gypsum"Permabase".
13
14 E. Corner Beads: No. 28 gauge galvanized steel, 1 1/4 inch legs. Use at all exterior
15 corners.
16
17 F. Joint Compound (Taping): Standard types manufactured by gypsum wallboard
18 manufacturer for intended use. Fire rated type must be used on fireproof systems.
19
20 G. Laminating Adhesives: Standard type manufactured or recommended by
21 manufacturer of product to be laminated.
22
23 H. Gypsum board reveals shall be 1/2" wide by 5/8" deep drywall reveals; extruded
24 aluminum,painted finish.
25 01 Provide where indicated on the Drawings
26 02 Acceptable manufacturers/products include:
27 a. Gordon`Final Forms I' Series 500(basis of design)
28 b. Fry Reglet-."DRM"Series
29 c. Pittcon-"SWR"Series
30
31 I. Control Joints: Metal type with 1/4 inch open joint,perforated flanges for floating in
32 place.
33 01 Niles Building Products model 093 Zinc Control Joint;or equal.
34 02 Control joints shall be located vertically a maximum of 30'-0" O.C. floor to
35 above ceiling; each side of door frames from top of jamb to above ceiling;
36 and at building expansion joints full length unless detailed or specified
37 otherwise.
38
39 J. Fasteners (screws) shall be U.S.G. type "S" drywall screws, minimum 1-1/4" length,
40 or longer as required to penetrate framing components a minimum of 1/2".
41
42 K. Exterior Sheathing,(As required per plans:REF Structural)
43 01 Mold-resistant,fire-rated glass-mat gypsum sheathing board.
44 02 Thickness: 5/8 inch(16 mm).
45 03 Properties: Enhanced mold resistance per ASTM D3273. Glass facers on
46 both sides.
47 04 Water absorption less than 6 percent per ASTM C473.
48 05 Configuration: Forty-eight inches(1219 mm)wide by length required with
49 square edges for horizontal application.
50
51 2.3 MANUFACTURERS:
52
53 A. Gypsum Wall Board:Provide domestically manufactured gypsum wall board.
54 01 U.S.Gypsum Co.
55 02 National Gypsum Company
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09260-4
s
t
p
1 03 Georgia Pacific
2 04 Temple—Inland Forest Products Corp. I 3
4 B. Exterior Sheathing
5 01 Temple-Inland Forest Products Corp."Green Glass"
6 02 Georgia Pacific,"Dens Glass Gold"
I
7 03 U.S.Gypsum"Securock"
8 04 National Gypsum,Gold Bond"e2XP"Extended Exposure Sheathing
9 t 10 C. Substitutions of above must be approved by the Architect 10 days prior to proposal/
11 bid date.
12
13 PART 3-EXECUTION II
14
15 3.1 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION
16
17 A. Studs:
18 01 Single lengths positioned vertically in the runners, spaced 16 inches O.C.
19 maximum unless otherwise shown..
20 02 Install double studs at framed opening jambs. Install stud bracing on each
21 side of opening at frame head height between jamb studs and adjacent studs.
22 03 Secure studs to stud plate on both sides at bottom plate prior to installation of
23 gyp board.
24 04 Where framing extends to structure or floor/roof deck, secure studs to both
25 sides at bottom plate prior to installation of gyp board.
26
27
28 3.2 WALLBOARD INSTALLATION
29
30 A. Select the maximum practical length to minimize end joints. All end joints shall be
31 neatly fitted and staggered. Joints on opposite sides of partition shall be so arranged
32 as to occur on different studs.
33
34 B. Install metal corner bead at external corners. Where length of the corner does not
35 exceed standard stock lengths,use a single length.
36
37 C. Install gypsum board 1/2 inch above surface of slab to prevent wicking of moisture.
38
39
40 D. Apply at least three coats of joint compound over beads, screw heads and trim, and
41 each coat shall be feathered out onto panel faces. Refer to Para. 3.7 Workmanship
42 Tolerances for level of finish required.
43
44 D. Float out and sand joints to make joints invisible when painted with non-texture paint,
45 level 4 finish required throughout.
46
47 E. Hollow metal door frames to be set within framed opening, install plumb and
48 level to ensure proper operation of doors.REF 08110 3.1 for requirements
49
50 F. Caulk around pipes,ducts,structure or similar items which penetrate drywall systems.
51
52 G. Fasten wallboard at 12 inches o.c., except at the edges/joints which shall be at 8
53 inches o.c.
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09260-5
1 H. At all wrap-around hollow metal frames, gyp board shall extend 'W' minimum into
2 frame throat.
3
4 I. At all exterior metal framed walls extend gypsum wall board from floor to deck unless
5 noted otherwise.
6
7 3.3 SHEATHING INSTALLATION
8
9 A. Install sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable
10 instructions in Gypsum Association-253 and ASTM 1280.
11
12 B. Install using maximum lengths possible to minimize the number of joints.
13
14 C. Secure sheathing to wood framing with hot dip galvanized screws spaced 8 inches
15 O.C. at perimeter of board and 12" O.C. in field of board. Do not countersink
16 fasteners; drive them to bear flush with surface of sheathing. Locate fasteners at least
17 3/8"from edges.
18
19 D. Provide sheathing at all exterior wood framed walls unless noted otherwise. Install
20 with all joints tight.
21
22 E. Accurately cut and scribe at interfacing/penetrating work.
23
24 F. Coordinate with the installation of dampproofing above grade. Refer to spec section
25 07160.
26
27 3.4 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION
28
29 A. Main Runners: Hanger wires(9 gauge)shall be spaced not over 4'-0" in the direction
30 of 1 1/2 inch main runner channels, not over 4'-0" in the direction of right angles to
31 the main runners, and within 6 inches of the ends of main runners and of boundary
32 walls, girders or similar interruptions of ceiling continuity. Do not place over 4'-0"
33 o.c.,properly positioned and leveled.
34
35 B. Furring Channels: Space 16 inches o.c., and saddle-tie with two strands of 16 gauge
36 tie wire to main runners or main support members. Do not let into or come in contact
37 with abutting masonry walls. End splices shall be provided by nesting channels or
38 studs no less than 8 inches and securely wire-tie.
39
40 3.5 CEILING BOARD INSTALLATION
41
42 A. Apply gypsum board of maximum practical length with the long dimension at right
43 angles to the furring channel and fastened with 1 inch drywall screws spaced 12 inches
44 o.c.in the field of the board and along abutting ends.
45
46 B. Align abutting end or edge joints over the web surface of the furring channel. Tie
47 neatly and accurately with end joints staggered.
48
49 3.8 COMMENCEMENT RESTRICTIONS
50
51 A. Interior gypsum wallboard and ceiling board installation may not commence until all
52 exterior sheathing and dampproofing is completed, the individual floor is dried in or
53 roofing is complete, roof top equipment openings are covered and flashed, and
54 exterior wall openings are protected.
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09260-6
-.111111111.
1
1
2 3.9 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP
3
4 A. Coordinate with painting and make sure all gypsum board is primed and the specified
5 texture is provided.
6
7 B. Unless the Construction. Manager gives notice otherwise, in advance. Each Trade
8 contractor is responsible for removing his own trash from the Work area and for the
9 initial cleaning of his own Work,while ongoing and when completed.
10
11 01 Trash Removal: Clear the building and site of trash at least once a week.
12 When rapid accumulation occurs, make more frequent removal. Remove
13 highly combustible trash such a paper and cardboard daily.
14 02 Disposition Of Debris: Remove debris from the site and make legal
15 disposition. Locations for disposal shall be of the Contractor's choice within
16 the above restrictions. No debris or material may be buried or burned at the
17 site. Take necessary precautions to prevent accidental burning of materials
18 be avoiding large accumulations of combustible materials.
19
20 C. The Work shall be turned over to the Construction Manager/Owner in immaculate '
21 condition. Cleaning includes removal of smudges, marks, stains, fingerprints, soil,
22 dirt,paint spots,dust,lint,discolorations and other foreign material.
23
24 D. Remove all temporary facilities.
25
26 END OF SECTION
27
1I
I
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09260-7
I
1 SECTION 09310
2
3 CERAMIC TILE
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1 -GENERAL
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
14
15 1.2 SUBMITTALS
16
17 A. Product Data:Manufacturer's product data for all products proposed to be furnished.
18
19 B. Samples:
20 01 Selection: Submit full range of manufacturer's colors, patterns,textures and
21 finishes available for the specified tile series.
22 02 Approval: Submit samples of selected tile mounted on 12" x 12" board
23 indicating joint size and grout.
24
25 C. Certification: Provide Master Grade Certificate as specified in ANSI A137.1.
26
27 D. Installation Instructions:Manufacturer's installation instructions for this application.
28
29 E. Maintenance:Manufacturer's recommended maintenance procedures.
30
31 1.3 REFERENCES
32
33 A. Tile Council of American,Inc."Tile Handbook"
34
35 B. American National Standards Specifications for the installation of ceramic tile.
36
37 1.4 SCOPE
38
39 A. Refer to room finish schedule,wall tile at restrooms
40
41 PART 2-PRODUCTS
42
43 2.1 MATERIALS
44
45 A. Ceramic Tile:Reference drawing for detail and patterns
46 01 Nominal Sizes:
47 a.12"x 12"
48 b.Stratford Place SD94
49 b.Dorian Grey
50
51 02 Provide bullnose at the top of all wall patterns.
52 03 Provide cove base where scheduled.
53 04 Tile shall be through-body color.
54 05 Brick bond,as indicated on plans
55
56
57 B. Accent tile:Reference drawings for details and patterns.
58 01 Nominal Size:
59 02 6"x 6"x 3/8"(Daltile Selected from Group 2 range)
60 03 Provide size and shapes as indicated on drawings.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09310- 1
1
2
3
4 C. Mortar Adhesive and Grout:
5 01 Laticrete 254 Platinum thin-set mortar
6 02 Mix in strict accordance with manufactures recommendations
7 03 Water: Potable,drinking quality
8 04 Grout(1/8" Joint):
9 a. As recommended by tile manufacturer
10 b. Color selected by Architect
11 c. ANSI A118.6
12 05 Grout Release as recommended by tile manufacturer
13
14 D. Expansion Joints:
15 01 Polysulfide compound sealant over filler. Provide at all concrete foundation
16 control joints, changes in materials, where floor tile abuts perimeter walls,
17 curves, columns, and pipes. Sealant shall match grout color. Tile Council of
18 America#EJ171-90
19
20 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
21
22
23 A. Dal-Tile—(basis for design)
24
25
26
27 PART 3-EXECUTION
28
29 3.1 PREPARATION
30 66
31 A. Examination: Examine substrates for defects which may affect the work. Do not start
32 work until defects have been corrected.Ensure that surfaces are:
33 01 Dry,clean,free of oily or waxy films.
34 02 Firm and level within specified tolerances.
35 03 Sloped to drains where floor drain occurs.
36 04 Minimum of 40°F and rising.
37
38 3.2 INSTALLATION
39
40 A. Joints to be installed in a brick bond pattern.
41
42 B. Set tile and grout in accordance with Tile Council of America, Inc. Spec. F115-93, ,,
43 and F121-93 at restrooms in patterns as directed by the Architect.
44
45 C. Lay out all work so that,where possible,no tiles less than half size occur.
46
47 D. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
48
49 E. Use potable water.
50
51 F. Install base tile so that joints align with floor tile joints,where applicable.
52
53 G. Expansion joints per Tile Council of America, Inc., Spec EJ171-90. Coordinate
54 expansion joints with joints in the concrete slab.
55
56
57 END OF SECTION
58
59
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09310-2
1 SECTION 09510
2
3 ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN CEILING
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 1.1 DESCRIPTION
9
10 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
11
12 1.2 SCOPE
13
14 A. Suspension System
15 B. Acoustical Ceiling Boards
16 C. Fire Protection over light fixtures and other ceiling mounted items as required.
17
18 1.3 SUBMITTALS
19
20 A. Comply with Section 01300.
21
22 B. Product Data:Manufacturer's specifications and technical data.
23
24 C. Samples: submit two units for each type of acoustical unit, suspension system and
25 accessories.
26
27 1.4 INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
28
29 A. Refer to Section 0142-Notification of Architect Requirements.
30
31 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
32
33 A. Projection Conditions
34 1. Do not install acoustical ceiling until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is
35 provided, dust generating activities have terminated and overhead
36 mechanical work is completed,tested and approved.
37 2. Maintain temperature at minimum 60 degrees F°and humidity if 40%to 50%
38 prior to,during,and after installation.
39
40 B. References
41 1. American Society for Testing Materials:
42 ASTM C635
43 ASTM C636
44 ASTM E795
45 ASTM E84
46
47 2. Underwriters Laboratories assembly,as noted on drawings.
48
49 1.7 WARRANTY
50 A. Lifetime system warranty to withstand conditions up to 104°F,95%relative
51 humidity without visible sagging.
52
53
54 PART 2—PRODUCTS
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09510- 1
1 2.1 MATERIALS
2
3 A. Suspension System:
4 01 Typical Grid Type"A":
5 a. Pre-painted standard cold-rolled steel electro-zinc coated (ASTM
6 C635)
I
7 b. UL 1-hour rated assemblies and 1-hour rated assemblies as
8 indicated on drawings(where it is noted on the Finish Schedule).
9 c. Color:Low sheen satin(typically white).
I
10 d. Main runners&cross tees to be 1 1/2 inches.
11 e. Approved hold down clips.
12 02 Grid for Type"B"Lay-in Boards:
13 a. Same as typical grid, except with an aluminum cap (factory white
14 flat finish).
15
16 ,17 B. Hanger Wire:
18 01 12-gauge steel wire
19 02 Spacing at 4'-0"`o.c.both directions,wrapped tightly at least 3 full turns.
20 I 21 C. Lay-in Board:
22 01 Type"A":suitable for humid areas up to but not including standing water
23 A. USG-Radar ClimaPlus(none directional) I 24 B. #2210/2410 as indicated on plans
25 C. White Finish
26 D. Fire Resistive
27 E. 24 in.X 24/48"in.X 5/8 in. I 28 F. Square Lay-In Edge Detail
29 G. NRC=0.55
30 H. CAC=35
31 I. Light reflectance=0.84
I
32
33 02 Type"B":
34 a. Un-perforated vinyl face on gypsum board
35 b. 24"x 24"x 1/2"thick
36 c. 2-hour rated assembly(ASTM C635),Class"A"
37 d. Color:White
38 e. Location:All areas subject to humidity,shower stalls,etc
39
40
41 D. Accessories:
42 01 At all locations (whether detailed or not) where an acoustical lay-in ceiling
43 abutts a gypsum board ceiling in the same plane, provide a "W" shaped
44 reveal or"shadow"molding similar to USG#MS 174.
45 02 All Grid to be Donn DX/DXL.
46
47 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
48
49 A. Armstrong World Industries,Inc.
50
51 B. U.S.Gypsum
52
53 C. CertainTeed
54
55 D. Conwed
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09510-2
1
2 E. Donn Products,Inc.
3
4 F. Chicago Metallic
5
6 G. Eurostone
7
8
9
10 PART 3-EXECUTION
11
12 3.1 PREPARATION
13
14 A. Ensure that walls are flat and wall corners square. Commencing work shall be
15 construed as acceptance of preceding work performed by others,as suitable to receive
16 work specified in this Section.
17
18 B. Ensure that wall control joints are flat and will not cause wall mold to misalign at
19 those locations.
20
21 C. Coordinate all locations of cut tile with Architect in field,prior to commencing work.
22
23 D. Do not install any ceiling tile until all above ceiling inspections and corrections have
24 been completed.
25
26 3.2 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
27
28 A. Install ceiling systems by skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed
29 instructions,the approved shop drawings and reflected ceiling plans.Exposed surfaces
30 of acoustical units shall be level and flush,with all joints straight and true.Cutting and
31 fitting around all items protruding through acoustical ceiling shall be done neatly.
32 Edge moldings and runners shall have flush hairline joints, with all corners mitered.
33
34 B Install main beam and cross tees in accordance with reflected ceiling plans. Suspend
35 main beams from structure above (but not bridging), by means of #12 gauge
36 galvanized wire,located 4 feet on center.Join cross tees to main beam with a positive
37 interlock. At perimeter areas, secure angle molding to vertical surfaces, ends of tees
38 to rest on bottom flange of molding.
39
40 C. Align beams or tees with angle molding at corners,unless authorized by Architect.
41
42
43 E. Attachment of grid members to wall molding with pop rivets is not permitted.Hanger
44 wire at 45 degrees, approximately 10 inches long may be used to tie the grid to the
45 wall above the ceiling to prevent eventual disengagement of the two components.
46
47 3.3 EXTRA STOCK
48
49 A. Deliver two(2)unopened cartons of each type of ceiling board at completion of job to
50 location as directed by owner.
51
52
53 END OF SECTION
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09510-3
ortiliMMINIMINNIMINom
1 SECTION 09660
2
3 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9
10 PART 1-GENERAL
11
12 1.1 SUBSTITUTION
13
14 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
15
16 1.2 SCOPE
17
18 A. Vinyl Composition Tile
19
20 B. Resilient Rubber Cove Base
21
22 C. Rubber Stair Tread
23
24 1.3 RELATED WORK
25
26 A. All other Division 9 flooring specifications.
27
28 1.4 SUBMITTALS 111
29
30 A. Product Data. Manufacture's specification data and installation instructions.
31
32 B. Samples. Submit full range of colors and patterns of actual materials proposed to be
33 furnished for Architect's selection.
34
35 C. Maintenance Data. Include in the final close-out documents the maintenance data
36 describing the procedure to be followed in maintaining the materials.
37
38 D. Asbestos Free Materials. Provide a written notarized statement indicating that all
39 materials used are totally asbestos free.
40
41
42 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
43
44 A. Vinyl Composition Tile.Fed Specs SS-T-312,Type IV Composition I
45
46 PART 2-PRODUCTS
47
48 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE:
49
50 A. Materials
51 01 Size. 12"x 12"x 1/8"thick
52
53 B. Patterns and Colors: Selected from manufacturer's premium line.Patterns shall be as
54 indicated on the Drawings;and if not indicated,shall be a maximum two color pattern
55 as directed by the Architect.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09660- 1
1
2 2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE MANUFACTURERS:
3
4 A. Armstrong World Industries—"Standard Exelon"(basis of design)
5
6 B. Mannington Commercial—"Designer Essentials"
7
8 C. Tarkett/Azrock Floor Products—"Cortina Colors and Classics"
9
10
11 2.3 RESILIENT MATERIALS
12 A. Materials
13 01 Base:
14 a. Quality Standard. ASTM-1861-98,Type TS 100%rubber base with
15 matching end stops and molded corner units.
16 b. Type. Top-set cove;48 inch lengths or in roll
17 c. Height. 4 inches,unless shown otherwise
18 d. Thickness. Full 0.125
19 e. Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
20
21 02 Resilient Reducer Strips:
22 a. 1"wide x 1/8"thick,rubber,tapered or bullnose edge,color as selected
23 by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
24
25 B. Primers and Adhesives
26 01 Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by material
27 manufacturers.
28 02 Adhesives: Waterproof,stabilized type as manufactured by resilient material
29 manufacturer.
30
31 2.4 RESILIENT MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS
32
33 A. Flexco
34
35 B. Roppe Rubber Co.
36
37 C. Burke Mercer Floor Products,Co.
38
39 D. Nora Rubber Flooring
40
41 PART 3-EXECUTION
42
43 3.1 INSPECTION
44
45 A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
46 Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not
47 proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
48
49 B. Subfloors:
50 01 Verify that substrate is smooth,level,at required finish elevation,and
51 without more than 1/8 inch in 10'-0"variation from level or slopes shown on
52 the drawings.
53 02 Prior to laying materials, broom clean or vacuum the surfaces to be covered,
54 and inspect the subfloors.
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09660-2
1 3.2 INSTALLATION
2
3 A. General:
4 01 Install materials only after finishing operations (including painting), have
5 been completed, and after permanent heating and cooling system is
6 operating.
7 02 Verify that moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and
8 relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of
9 the materials used. I 10
11 B. Installing Resilient Tiles:
12 01 Place units with adhesive cement in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
13 recommendations. I 14 02 Butt units tightly to vertical surfaces,nosings,edgings,and thresholds.
15 03 Scribe,as necessary,around obstructions and to produce neat joints.
16 04 Place tiles tightly laid,even,and in straight parallel lines. I 17 05 Extend units into toe spaces,door reveals,and in closets and similar spaces.
18 06 Lay units from center marks established with principal walls, discounting
19 minor offsets,so that units at opposite edges of the room are of equal width.
20 a. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 3 inches '
21 wide at edge of space.
22 b. Lay units square to axis of the room or space.
23 07 Match units for color and pattern by using materials from cartons in the same
24 sequence as manufactured and packaged.
I
25 08 Lay in with grain in all units running in the same direction.
26 09 Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to units and secured with adhesive,
27 providing at all unprotected edges,unless otherwise shown.
28
29 C. Installing Base:
30 01 Install base on solid backing.Adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
31 02 Use factory-preformed exterior corners, and factory preformed or job-
32 mitered interior corners.
33 03 Scribe and fit to doorframes and other obstructions.
34 04 Install base on all casework as shown,unless otherwise noted.
35
36
37
38
39 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
40
41 A. Remove excess adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces, using neutral
42 cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the resilient materials.
43
44 3.4 EXTRA STOCK
45
46 A. Deliver to the Owner for his future use an extra stock of two unopened boxes of each color
47 and pattern of tile selected,and one container of base adhesive.
48
49 END OF SECTION
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09660-3
1 SECTION 09661
2
3 LUXURY VINYL TILE FLOORING
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9
10 PART 1 -GENERAL
11
12 1.1 SUBSTITUTION
13
14 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
15
16 1.2 SCOPE
17
18 A. Luxury Vinyl Tile/Plank
19
20 B. Resilient Rubber Cove Base
21
22
23 1.3 RELATED WORK
24
25 A. All other Division 9 flooring specifications.
26
27 1.4 SUBMITTALS
28
29 A. Product Data. Manufacture's specification data and installation instructions.
30
31 B. Samples. Submit full range of colors and patterns of actual materials proposed to be
32 furnished for Architect's selection.
33
34 C. Maintenance Data. Include in the final close-out documents the maintenance data
35 describing the procedure to be followed in maintaining the materials.
36
37 D. Asbestos Free Materials. Provide a written notarized statement indicating that all
38 materials used are totally asbestos free.
39
40
41 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42
43 A. Must Comply with ASTM C1028 and ASTM D2047
44
45 PART 2-PRODUCTS
46
47 2.1 LUXURY VINLY TILE/PLANK:
48
49 A. Materials:
50 01 ARMSTRONG,Natural Creations:Arbor Art
51 a. Size:6"x 48"x.125"thick planks
52 b. Edge: Slight Bevel
53 c. Texture:Distressed
54 d. Wear Layer: .020"Clear,Rigid high density Polyurethane
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09660- 1
1 B. Patterns and Colors:Joints to be staggered at random,starter planks minimum length
2 to be at least 10"in length,color from standard Arbor Art product line
3
4 2.2 LUXURY VINYL TILE MANUFACTURERS:
5
6 A. Armstrong(basis of design)
7 B. Others-Approval based on actual submission of materials.
8
9
10 2.3 RESILIENT MATERIALS
11 A. Materials
12 01 Base:
13 a. Quality Standard. ASTM-1861-98,Type TS 100%rubber base with
14 matching end stops and molded corner units.
15 b. Type. Top-set cove;48 inch lengths or in roll
16 c. Height. 4 inches,unless shown otherwise
17 d. Thickness. Full 0.125
18 e. Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
19
20 02 Resilient Reducer Strips:
21 a. 1"wide x 1/8"thick,rubber,tapered or bullnose edge,color as selected
22 by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
23
24 B. Primers and Adhesives
25 01 Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by material
26 manufacturers.
27 02 Adhesives: Waterproof,stabilized type as manufactured by resilient material
28 manufacturer.
29
30 2.4 RESILIENT MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS
31
32 A. Roppe Rubber Co.
33
34 C. Burke Mercer Floor Products,Co.
35
36 D. Nora Rubber Flooring
37
38 PART 3-EXECUTION
39
40 3.1 INSPECTION
41
42 A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
43 Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not
44 proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
45
46 B. Subfloors:
47 01 Verify that substrate is smooth,level,at required finish elevation,and
48 without more than 1/8 inch in 10'-0"variation from level or slopes shown on
49 the drawings.
50 02 Prior to laying materials,broom clean or vacuum the surfaces to be covered,
51 and inspect the subfloors.
52
53 3.2 INSTALLATION
54
55 A. General:
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09660-2
1 01 Install materials only after finishing operations (including painting), have
2 been completed, and after permanent heating and cooling system is
3 operating.
4 02 Verify that moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and
5 relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of
6 the materials used.
7
8 B. Installing LVT Planks:
9 01 Place units with adhesive cement in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
10 recommendations.
11 02 Butt units tightly to vertical surfaces,nosings,edgings,and thresholds.
12 03 Scribe,as necessary,around obstructions and to produce neat joints.
13 04 Place tiles tightly laid,even,and in straight parallel lines.
14 05 Extend units into toe spaces,door reveals,and in closets and similar spaces.
15 06 Lay units from center marks established with principal walls, discounting
16 minor offsets,so that units at opposite edges of the room are of equal width.
17 a. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 2 inches
18 wide at edge of space.
19 b. Lay units square to axis of the room or space.
20 07 Match units for color and pattern by using materials from cartons in the same
21 sequence as manufactured and packaged.
22 08 Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to units and secured with adhesive,
23 providing at all unprotected edges,unless otherwise shown.
24
25 C. Installing Base:
26 01 Install base on solid backing.Adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
27 02 Use factory-preformed exterior corners, and factory preformed or job-
28 mitered interior corners.
29 03 Scribe and fit to doorframes and other obstructions.
30 04 Install base on all casework as shown,unless otherwise noted.
31
32
33
34
35 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
36
37 A. Remove excess adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces, using neutral
38 cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the resilient materials.
39
40 3.4 EXTRA STOCK
41
42 A. Deliver to the Owner for his future use an extra stock of two unopened boxes of each color
43 and pattern of planks selected,and one container of base adhesive.
44
45 END OF SECTION
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09660-3
1 SECTION 09680
2 '3 CARPET
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DNISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY
15
16 A. Manufacturer shall warrant the carpeting for 15 years against the following defects:
17 01 Dimensional stability including curling.
18 02 Edge ravel.
19 03 Delamination of backing.
20 04 Wear in excess of 10%by weight.
21
22 B. Manufacturer shall warrant that the generation of static electricity shall not exceed 3.5
23 KV at 70°F at 20%RH for the life of the carpet.
24
25 1.3 SUBMITTALS
26
27 A. Shop drawings to the Architect showing layout of all seams and cross seams,location,
28 and type of carpet accessories.
29
30 B. Certificate showing manufacturer's loom on which carpet will be produced, and date
31 of last inspection for specification tolerances.
32
33 C. Samples showing manufacturer's matching color (12" x 12"). Actual base and
34 accessory samples.
35
36 D. Actual sample from loom to produce run of carpet.
37
38 E. Manufacturers product data including base adhesive.
39
40 F. Maintenance instructions.
41
42 1.4 SCOPE
43
44 A. Furnish and install all carpet as indicated.
45
46 1.5 ALTERNATE
47
48 A. Refer to Section 01030-Alternates.
49
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09680- 1
1 PART 2-PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 MATERIALS
4
5 A. Provide carpet free of any irregularities in weave or materials, and each color of one
6 dye lot. Carpet shall be moth and vermin-proof, and pre-shrunk carpet.
7
8 Borders and/or patterns as indicated on the Drawings.
9
10 B. Carpeting:Reference Finish Schedule for type and placements
11
12 "C-1" 01 Field Carpet: Tandus Reverb (44024) Color "TBD" or approved
13 equal as selected by Architect.
14 02 Construction: Tufted Patterned Loop
15 03 Fiber:TDX Nylon
16 04 Dye method: Solution
17 05 Pattern Repeat:35.82"L x 24"W
18 06 Tufted Weight:22.0
19 07 Gauge 1/10
20 08 Stitches per inch: 13.4
21 09 Finished Pile Thickness:0.197
22 10 Product size: 12 foot
23 11 Primary backing: super-loc
24 12 Protective Treatment:Ensure
25
26
27 C. Carpet Accessories and Adhesive(refer to Section 09660,2.2 Resilient Materials):
28 01 Standard accessories as recommended by the successful carpet manufacturer.
29 02 Carpet edge shall be vinyl overlap type for glue-down carpet.
30 03 Adhesive as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
31
32 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
33
34 A. Tarkett
35 B. Interface FLOR
36 C. The Mohawk Group
37 D. Shaw Group
38
39 PART 3-EXECUTION
40
41 3.1 PREPARATION
42
43 A. Deliver carpet to the job site in original mill scrapings,if full rolls. Store carpet raised
44 above floor, under cover, and in well ventilated spaces, as soon as delivered. Protect
45 carpet from damage,dirt,stains,and moisture.
46
47 B. The floor shall be clean and free of any foreign substances,such as wax,paint,oil,etc.
48
49 C. Cracks and holes shall be filled with latex emulsion filler compatible with adhesive.
50
51 D. Any ridges and high spots in concrete surface shall be brought to the attention of the
52 Architect and the General Contractor.
53
54 3.2 INSTALLATION
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09680-2
1 A. General:
2 01 Glue directly to floor using no pad and no foam. Roll carpet with a roller to I 3 ensure maximum contact at the pressure recommended by the manufacturer.
4 02 Scribe carpet accurately to all vertical surfaces.
5 03 Align lines of carpet as woven, using no fill strips less than 15 cm (6") in
6 width, laying all carpet in same direction unless specifically otherwise I 7 directed by the Architect..
8
9 B. Seams: I
10 01 Locate seams only where shown on approved shop drawings or where
11 otherwise approved by Architect.
12 02 Fabricate seams by the compression method,using a butt joint, and properly
13 bead and seal. Do not stretch seams. I 14 03 Brush out or roll out air bubbles toward seam.
15 04 Carefully apply a bead seam adhesive to the cut edge at proper height to lock
16 in tufts and seal edge. Do not use floor adhesive to bead cut edge. Use
for
17 regular seam adhesive.
18
19 C. Clean-Up:
20 01 Thoroughly clean all carpet surfaces prior to final acceptance of the carpeted
21 areas by Owner. Leave work in neat, uniform condition, vacuumed and
22 ready for use.
23 02 Any spillage of adhesive on the face of the carpet shall be removed
24 immediately with a clean-up solvent recommended by the manufacturer.
25 03 Avoid traffic for at least twelve hours after installation.
26 04 Carpet contractor shall repair any and all damage done by his workmen.
27 05 Provide traffic areas with heavy Kraft paper or"Visqueen"to protect against
28 damage and soiling. Provide such protection when directed by the Architect.
29
30 3.3 EXTRA CARPET
31
32 A. After completion of the carpet installation, the carpet subcontractor shall provide an
33 additional 3% of total yards installed of carpet (6' wide) and/or two cartons of
34 unopened carpet tiles to the Owner for future carpet replacement that may be required.
35 This extra stock is to be unused rolls and/or tiles and does not include scraps.
36
37 3.4 GUARANTEE
38
39 A. The carpet installer shall be required to re-lay any carpet that does not provide an
40 attractive wrinkle-free appearance, and shall correct any condition due to faulty
41 installation which may appear for a period of one year from date of substantial
42 completion.
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
46
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09680-3
1 SECTION 09770
2
3 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13 B. Locations:All mechanical and electrical rooms,UNO
14
15 1.2 SUBMITTALS
16
17 A. Refer to Section 01300. Submit manufacturer's data.
18
19 PART 2-PRODUCT
20
21 2.1 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS
22
23 A. Concrete floor sealer shall be "Cureseal W" semi-gloss clear sealer as manufactured
24 by L.M. Scofield;or equal approved by the Architect.
25
26 B. Prosoco"Durasheen"
27
28 C. ZEP Manufacturing"ZEP Seal Out"
29
30 PART 3-EXECUTION
31
32 A. Concrete slabs shall be smooth,dry,and free of any foreign materials.
33
34 B. Apply two coats of specified finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's
35 instructions.
36
37 C. Allow approximately 24 hours drying time between installation of coats.Do not apply
38 second coat until Architect has inspected first coat application.
39
40 D. Install coating after all painting operations are completed.
41
42 E. Apply any painted stripes or graphics indicated on drawings.Allow approximately 24
43 hours drying time between installation and additional coats.
44
45 F. Apply two (2) additional coats of concrete floor sealer over any areas receiving
46 striping or graphics as specified above. (Total for striped areas is 4 coats.)
47
48
49 END OF SECTION
50
51
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09770- 1
I
1 SECTION 09900
2
3 PAINTING AND STAINING
4
5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
6 TO THIS SECTION.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SCOPE
15
16 A. Work Included:Work under this Section includes furnishing all labor,material,
17 equipment and accessories necessary for completion of all painting and staining.
18 Refer to paragraph 3.01 for list of items to receive paint.
19
20 B. Work Not Included:
21 01 Shop coat of paint on metal,unless noted otherwise.Refer to Section 05500-
22 Miscellaneous Metals.
23 02 Aluminum and copper,unless noted otherwise.
24 03 Factory finished equipment.
25 04 Plastic clad educational equipment.
26
27 1.3 SUBMITTALS
28
29 A. Material lists:Give the supplier's name,product name,number and generic
30 description of each proposed product and its use. Provide product data sheets if
31 requested.
32
33 B. Samples: Submit full range of colors,patterns,textures and finishes available for
34 selection,including the following:
35 01 Color Chips: Provide complete duplicate sets of color chips for color
36 selection.
37 02 Small Applied Samples:Provide pieces of actual material on which paint will
38 occur with minimum dry mil thickness of specified paint.
39 03 Sheen Samples: Provide full range of varying sheens when sheens are
40 controllable by intermixing.
41
42 C. Installed Samples: Provide large size samples for approval.Approved samples may
43 be left in place as part of the work.
44
45 D. Interior:One room and/or area,as selected by the Architect,shall be painted with
46 materials specified or accepted and applied directly from container,unthinned.After
47 acceptance by Architect,room and/or area shall be standard of quality of entire
48 project.
49
50 E. Exterior:Three samples,4'x4'each,of all exterior finishes,provided at the job site.
51 Samples should represent each substrate.After acceptance by Architect,samples shall
52 be standard of quality of entire project.
53
54 F. Certification: Furnish a letter certifying that materials submitted are truly equivalent,
55 or better than those called out in the finish schedule.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09900- 1
1
2
3 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
• 4
5 A. Materials shall be applied directly from containers in which material is purchased.No
•
6 exceptions.
7
8 B. Subcontractor shall provide to Owner and Architect a notarized certification that paint
9 used is as specified in writing by the Architect.
10
11 C. Number of coats of each of several finishes shall be in accordance with detailed
12 specifications,which will produce first quality finish if properly applied. If number of
13 coats specified fails to produce a finish acceptable to Architect,this Contractor shall
14 apply additional coat(s)at his own expense until an acceptable finish is achieved.
15
16 D. Provide primers and other undercoat paints produced by same manufacturer as finish
17 coats.Use thinners recommended by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
18
19 E. Deliver products to jobsite in unbroken containers bearing manufacturer's labels,
20 intact and legible at time of use.
21
22 1.5 WARRANTY
23
24 A. The undertaking of a painting subcontract will indicate that the subcontractor will
25 warrant the work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or
26 causing an objectionable appearance,resulting from either defective or
27 nonconforming materials and workmanship.
28
29 B. Defects shall include by not be limited to the following:
30 01 Discoloring noticeably by yellowing,streaking,blooming,changing color or
31 darkening
32 02 Mildew
33 03 Peeling,cracking,blistering,alligatoring or releasing from the substrate
34 04 Chalking or dusting excessively
35 05 Changing sheen in irregular fashion
36 06 Softening or becoming tacky
37 07 Bubbling
38
39 C. In the event of damage,immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary for
40 approval of the Architect,and at no additional cost to the Owner.
41
42 1.6 RESPONSIBILITY OF COORDINATION
43
44 A. Coordinate the work specified herein with the following work:
45 01 Provide information to preceding trades for proper preparation of substrate.
46 02 Inspect substrate before proceeding to verify proper preparation.
47 03 Notify Architect of any item to receive paint which may not be covered by a
48 scheduled finish type. Architect will furnish appropriate specification.
49
50 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING
51
52 A. Store only approved materials at the jobsite,storing only in a suitable and designated
53 area restricted to the storage of paint materials and related equipment.
54
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09900-2
I
1 B. Temperature in the storage area shall be between 40°F and 110°F. Open and mix all
2 materials in the storage area.
3
4 C. Use all means necessary to protect materials before,during,and after application,and
5 to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
6
7 D. Apply water-base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted,and
8 surrounding air temperatures are between 50°F(10°C)and 90°F(32°C),unless
9 otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
10
11 E. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted,and
12 surrounding air temperatures are between 45°F(7°C)and 95°F(35°C),unless
13 otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
14
15 F. Do not paint in snow,rain,fog or mist,or when relative humidity exceeds 85%,or to
16 damp or wet surfaces,unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed
17 instructions. Painting may be continued during inclement weather,if areas and
18 surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by
19 paint manufacturer,during application and drying periods.
20
21 1.8 EXTRA STOCK
22
23 A. Upon completion of the work of this Section,deliver to the Owner,an extra stock
24 equaling 10 percent or a minimum of 1 gallon,whichever is greater,of each color,
25 type,and gloss of paint used in the work. Make sure each container is tightly sealed,
26 clearly labeled with contents,and location where used.
27
28
29 PART 2-PRODUCTS
30
31 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
32
33 A. All paint materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the
34 product of a single manufacturer and shall, as a system, have flame spread, fuel
35 contribution,and smoke density test results less than 25.
36
37 B. Paint materials listed herein, unless otherwise designated in the "Painting Schedule",
38 are the products of Sherwin Williams., and require no further approval as to
39 manufacturer or catalogue number.
40
41 C. Similar first-line material of one of the following manufacturers may be used subject
42 to approval by the Architect for items indicated to be coated with Sherwin Williams
43 materials:
44 01 ICI/Devoe
45 02 PPG Industries
46 03 Carboline
47 04 Sherwin-Williams
48
49
50 2.2 MATERIALS
51
52 A. The following is a specification of typical painted items and does not specifically
53 include every item that its to receive paint. It should,however,establish type and
54 quality of finish for all items normally included in a complete paint job.
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09900-3
1
2
3 B. Ferrous Metals:
4 01 1 coat—SW Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer B66-310 Series.2.0—
5 4.O mdf
6 02 2 coats—SW DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating B66W100 Series.2.5—4.0 mdf
7 each coat
8
9 C. Exterior Wood:
10 01 1 coat—SW A-100 Alkyd Wood Primer Y24W20. 2.3 mdf
11 02 2 coats—SW DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss Coating B66W100 Series.2.5—4.0
12 mdf each coat
13
14 D. Interior Gypsum Drywall and Ceilings—Enamel Finish:
15 01 1 coat—SW Preprite 200 Latex Primer B28W200. 1.1 mdf
16 02 2 coats—SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC S/G Latex Series.
17
18 E. Interior Galvanized Metal:
19 01 1 coat—SW ProCryl Water Based Universal Primer B66-310 Series. 2.0—
20 4.0 mdf
21 02 2 coats—SW ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic S/G Enamel B31 W51 Series.
22 1.4 mdf each
23
24
25 F. Interior Non-Galvanized Metal:
26 03 1 coat—SW ProCryl Water Based Universal Primer B66-310 Series. 2.0—
27 4.0 mdf
28 04 2 coats—SW ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic S/G Enamel B31 W51 Series.
29 1.4 mdf each
30
31 G. On Metal with Shop Coat,use:
32 01 Touch-up Shop Coat with SW ProCryl Water Based Universal Primer B66-
33 310 Series.2.0—4.0 mdf
34 02 2 coats—SW Pro Classic Interior Alkyd Semi Gloss B34 Series
35 03 Used for metal doors and frames and miscellaneous metal items
36
37
38 H. Interior CMU—Enamel Finish:
39 01 2 coats-SW Loxon Block Surfacer A24W200.8.0 mdf each coat
40 02 2 coats—SW ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic S/G Enamel B31 W51 Series.
41 1.4 mdf each
42
43 I. Interior Wood-Enamel
44 01 1 coat—SW Preprite Classic Latex Primer B28W101. 1.6.mdf.
45 02 2 coats-SW ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic S/G Enamel B31 W51 Series.
46 1.4 mdf each
47
48 J. Interior Wood—Transparent Finish
49 01 SW Wood Classics Stain A49-200 Series.
50 02 1 coat SW Wood Classics Sanding Sealer B26V43. 1.2 mdf.
51 03 2 coats SW Wood Classics Varnish A66 Series.2.6 mdf each coat
52
53 K. Cement Siding,Soffit and Trim(specification call pre—primed).
54 01 Cement Siding,Soffit and Trim
55 02 2 coats-SW ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic S/G Enamel B31 W51 Series.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09900-4
1 L. Follow the Manufactures recommendation for top coat.
2
3
4 2.3 COLORS
5
6 A. Variations and multiple colors shall be as noted on schedules and legend in the .
7 drawings.Different colors may be selected for each room,and more than one color
8 may be selected in each room.
9
10
11 PART 3-EXECUTION
12
13 3.1 ITEMS TO RECEIVE PAINT
14
15 A. Generally,all unfinished items that are normally painted in any typical building,
16 including but not limited to the following list:
17 01 All ferrous metal
18 02 All Exterior Wood:
19 03 All interior wood
20 04 All exposed conduit,outlet boxes and electrical cabinets,excluding those
21 located in mechanical rooms.
22 05 All exposed pipe,plumbing and ductwork,excluding those located in
23 mechanical rooms.
24 06 All new metal grilles,except aluminum,unless otherwise indicated.
25 07 All new exposed gypsum board surfaces,including all mechanical rooms.
26 08 All exposed interior concrete masonry units,including all mechanical rooms.
27 09 Miscellaneous other items which normally require painting or are scheduled
28 to be painted.
29 10 Consult plans,finish schedule,details and specifications for other trades as
30 all items usually field painted or finish will be considered as part of the
31 Contract.
32 11 All new exposed mechanical equipment and electrical equipment.
33 12 Any other material that is exposed to view that is not prefinished.
34
35 B. All work where a coat of material has been applied must be inspected and approved
36 by the Architect,before application of succeeding specified coat,otherwise no credit
37 for coat applied will be given. Notify Architect when a particular coat has been
38 completed for inspection and approval. Apply coats of material in strict accordance k.
39 with manufacturer's specifications,except where requirements of these specifications
40 are in excess of manufacturer's requirements.Paint all sight exposed pipe and
41 plumbing,only after all mechanical work and tests have been completed.
42
43 3.2 PREPARATION
44
45 A. General: Surface must be clean to ensure adhesion.Remove oil and grease with paint
46 thinner.Wash off dirt with warm soapy water and rinse with clean water.Remove rust
I
47 by wire brushing or sanding.
48
49 B. Unfinished Surfaces: t
50 01 Wood: Sand smooth and apply one coat of primer undercoat. After primer
51 has dried overnight, putty nail holes and cracks, then spot-prime putty with
52 primer.Again,allow the primer to dry overnight,sand lightly and topcoat.
53 02 Masonry and Concrete: Remove form release compounds, efflorescence or
I
54 cement dust on masonry and concrete by etching with a 10% solution or
55 muriatic (Hydrochloric) acid. Power wash surface after etching with clean
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09900-5
I
1 water, and paint while still damp, but within manufacturer's moisture
2 tolerance. On surface where muriatic acid cannot be used to neutralize the
3 efflorescence, remove the efflorescence by sanding, scraping or wire
4 brushing,and apply a coat of masonry conditioner before painting. Fill voids
5 and pores in concrete and haydite blocks with latex block filler and allow to
6 dry overnight before top coating.
MI 7 03 Iron and Steel: Prime with metal primer and allow to dry overnight before
8 top coating.
9 04 Galvanized Metal: Prime with galvanized metal primer and allow to dry
' 10 overnight before top coating.
11
12 3.3 APPLICATION
1 13
14 A. General: Surfaces to be finished must be clean,dry,free of dirt,oils,loose paint or
15 any other contamination that would adversely affect adhesion,protective properties or
16 appearance of the coating.
1 17
18 B. Allow exterior paints to dry 72 hours between coats and interior paint to dry 24 hours
19 between coats.Allow all enamels and varnishes to dry 24 hours between coats. If
I
20 enamel and varnishes are tacky after 24 hours,allow additional time until finish is dry.
21
22 C. Leveling: Apply with proper consistency and quality so paint flows out to a level
23 surface free of brush and roller marks,bubbles,dust,runs,sags,and holidays. Spread
t 24 evenly.
25
26 D. Appearance: Uniform color,texture and sheen.
I 27
28 E. Acrylic coating on concrete tilt-wall system to be applied with 1000psi airless sprayer
29 with heavy duty texture gun.
30
I
31
32 F. Neatness: Paint shall not be smeared,spattered or run over adjoining colors or
materials. Cut-on lines shall be straight.
33
34 G. First coat shall be white,unless otherwise specified.
n i 35
36
37 END OF SECTION
4 111
Project No.Fellowship 1314 09900-6
IAridlift1
SECTION 10165
2
3 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET PARTITIONS
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Shop Drawings: Within four weeks of award of contract,submit:
17 01 Complete shop drawings for the Architect's approval, show all required field
18 measurements,all details and elevations plans,and sections required to indicate
19 all conditions.
20 02 Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with
21 the specified requirements.
22 03 Manufacturer's installation instructions.
23 04 Samples or color charts showing manufacturer's full range of colors
24
25 PART 2-PRODUCTS
26
27 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
28
29 A. Toilet Partitions:
30 01 General Partitions
31 04 Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc.
32 06 Tex-Lam
33
34 B. Plastic Laminate:
35 01 Wilsonart
36 02 Formica
37
38
39 2.2 MATERIALS
40
41 A. All toilet partitions shall be floor mounted, overhead braced, laminated plastic in the
42 dimensions and arrangements indicated on the drawings.
43
44 B. Panels:
45 01 Doors, stiles, wall posts, panels and seats of compartments shall have a
46 finished thickness of 1 inch nominal minimum, and shall have a uniform flush
47 front appearance.
48 02 Core of doors, wall posts, panels and seats shall be resin impregnated particle
49 board.
50 03 Stiles shall have a leveling device and be concealed by a one piece 4 inch high, I
51 type 304 satin finish stainless steel shoe.
52
53
I
54
55 C. Finish:
Project No. Fellowship 1314 10165- 1
1 01 Surface of toilet compartments shall be high pressure laminated plastic 1/16
2 inch thick, with matte finish, and shall be self-edged with laminated plastic.
3 Color as selected by Architects. A maximum of two colors shall be selected.
4 02 All laminating shall be done with adhesives that prevent delamination from
5 moisture and heat.
6
7 D. Hardware:
8 01 All door hardware, mounting brackets and support brackets for seats shall be
9 type 304 satin finish stainless steel.
10 02 Headrails and headrail returns of overhead braced toilet compartments shall be
1 1 anodized aluminum with satin finish.Locate above all doors and panels.
12 03 Hinges shall hold door of unoccupied compartment partially open.
13 04 Locked compartment maybe opened from outside by lifting door.
14 05 All exposed screws to be tamperproof.
15 06 Mounting hardware at all panels and all stiles or walls shall be stainless steel
16 continuous channels with side flange.
17
18 PART 3-EXECUTION
19
20 3.1 INSTALLATION
21
22 A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
23
24 B. Install all toilet partitions where indicated on the drawings,and as indicated on the shop
25 drawings, anchoring all components firmly in place for long life under hard use, and in
26 complete accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
27
28 C. Provide blocking/anchoring devices to secure to wall. Anchoring devices must be
29 compatible to wall type,to ensure adequate strength.
30
31 3.2 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
32
33 A. Defaced laminate finish will not be permitted. Damaged,scratched or marred defective
34 materials will be rejected,and shall be replaced with new materials.
35 B. Clean surfaces free of oil and imperfections.
36 C. Except for compartments for the handicapped, adjust doors to remain at a uniformly
37 open position when unlocked.
38
39
40 END OF SECTION
Project No. Fellowship 1314 10165-2
1 SECTION 10420
2
3 GRAPHICS
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 WORK INCLUDED
15
16 A. Furnish and install the following:
17 01 Room identification signs
18 02 Exterior signage
19 03 Building Letters
20
21
22 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24 A. Work of this Section shall comply with applicable requirements of the Handicapped
25 Accessibility Act of Texas,as codified in Section 7,Article 601b,Vernon's Texas
26 Civil Statutes.
27
28 1.4 ALLOWANCE
29
30 A. Include in the proposal the cash allowance stated in Section 01020 for graphics as
31 selected,and as directed by the Architect.
32
33
34 END OF SECTION
111
Project No.Fellowship 1314 10420- 1
1
1 SECTION 10522
2
3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND CABINETS
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions.
17
18 PART 2-PRODUCTS
19
20 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
21
22 A. Cabinets:
23 01 Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
24 02 J.L.Industries-"Cosmopolitan"Series#1037-V10
25
26 B. Fire Extinguisher:
27 01 Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
28 02 J.L.Industries
29
30 2.2 MATERIALS
31
32 A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:(SRFE noted on Plans)
33 01 24"x 9 1/2"x 6"inside box dimension
34 02 Semi-recessed type with 2 1/2 inch return trim rolled edge
35 03 Stainless steel door with handle and silk-screened lettering "Fire
36 Extinguisher"with wire glass.
37 04 Hinge: Concealed
38 05 Provide a handle and roller catch.
39 06 Finish of Exterior: Stainless steel
40 07 Finish of Interior: Standard
41 08 All fire extinguisher cabinets shall be furnished with 10 lb.fire extinguisher.
42 09 Fire rated cabinets as required,Ref:Plans for locations.
43
44 B. Fire Extinguishers(Standard):
45 01 Multi-purpose dry chemical with UL 4A-60B:C and FM approved; UL 2A-
46 10B:C for 5 lbs.
47 02 Capacity: 5 lb. At mechanical rooms and direct wall mounted extinguishers;
48 and 10 lb.at fire extinguisher cabinets as shown on drawings.
49 03 Extinguishers are furnished for direct wall mounting and for fire extinguisher
50 cabinets. Refer to drawings for location and quantity.
51 04 Provide initial inspection tag for each extinguisher.
52
53 C. Surface Mounted
54 01 Same as above with brackets etc.(Use in Mech.Rooms)
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 10522- 1
1 PART 3-EXECUTION
2
3 3.1 INSTALLATION
4
5 A. Install in openings prepared by others in accordance with manufacturer's printed
6 instructions.
7
8
9 END OF SECTION
1
Project No.Fellowship 1314 10522-2 '
1
I
1 SECTION 10650
2
I
3 OPERABLE WALL
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 APPLY
I 7 TO THIS SECTION.
8
9 PART 1-GENERAL
I
10
11 1.1 DESCRIPTION
12
13 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
I
14
15 1.2 SUBMITTALS
16
17 A. Complete shop drawings for the Architect's approval.
I
18
19 B. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with
20 specified
21 requirements.
I I
22
23 C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
24
25 D. Samples or color charts showing manufacturer's full range of colors.
26
, I 27
28 1.3 REFERENCES
29
30 A. ASTM E557-77-Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions
1 31
32
33 PART 2-PRODUCTS
I I 34
35 2.1 MATERIALS
36
37 A. Basis of Design: Shall be Top Supported Series 632 as manufactured by Hufcor,and
38 furnished and installed by an authorized distributor.
39 01 Design,fabricate and provide in configurations as indicated on the Drawings.
40 02 Operable walls shall be complete with all components,hardware,suspension
41 system,sound seals and accessories required for a complete installation.
42
43 B. Operation: Shall consist of a series of top center-supported, manually operated,
44 paired,flat panels.
45
46 C. Panels shall be nominally 3"[76]thick and to 48"[1219]in width.(ref plans for
47 opening size)
4 11 48 01 Panel faces shall be of Class"A"rated gypsum laminated to appropriate
49 substrate to meet the minimum STC rating of 47.
50 02 Frames shall be of 16 gauge[1.42mm]painted steel formed to capture and
51 protect vertical edges of the face material.
52 03 Weight of the panels shall be 5.3-11.4 lbs.per sq.ft. [25.66-55.6kg/sq.m]
53 based on options selected. (ref plans for height)
54
55 D. Vertical interlock between panels shall be of tongue and groove configuration and
56 provide panel-to-panel interlock. The lead panel shall seal against the adjacent wall
1 i 57 without the need for wall mounted jambs.
58 01 Horizontal top seals shall be continuous contact multi-ply vinyl.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 10650- 1
1 02 Horizontal bottom seals shall be manually operated and provide up to 2"[50]
2 nominal operating clearance.
3
4 E. Horizontal trim shall be of aluminum.
5
6 F. Suspension system:
7 01 Track shall be of clear anodized architectural grade extruded aluminum alloy
8 6063-T6. Track design shall provide integral support for adjoining ceiling,
9 soffit,or plenum sound barrier.
10 02 Track shall be connected to the structural support by pairs of 3/8"[10] dia.
11 threaded steel hanger rods. L,T,or X intersections shall be factory
12 assembled and welded.
13 03 Each panel shall be supported by two 2-wheeled counter-rotating horizontal U
14 carriers.
15 04 Wheels to be of precision ground steel ball bearings with heat treated and
16 hardened races encased with molded polymer tires
17
18 G. Finishes
19 01 Face finish shall be:Factory applied reinforced vinyl fabric with woven
20 backing,weighing not less than 15 oz.per lineal yard[465 g/m]. Color shall
21 be selected from manufacturer's standard color selector.
22 02 Frame and horizontal trim color shall be:Gray w
23 03 Aluminum track shall be clear anodized
24
25
26
27 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
28
29 A. Hufcor(basis of design)
30
31 B. Panelfold
32 los
33 C. Modernfold
34
35 D. Moderno
36
37 2.3 OPERATION
38
39 A. Panels are manually moved from the storage area,positioned in the opening,and seals
40 set.
41
42 B. Bottom seals shall be activated by pressing the edge of the panel into the edge of the
43 adjacent panel or wall. Seal activation requires approximately 15 lbs. [6.8 kg]of
44 force per panel.
45 1111
46 C. Final partition closure:Expanding Jamb Closure Panel of the construction as basic
47 panels but with an expanding jamb. Jamb compensates for minor wall irregularities
I
48 and provides a minimum.of 250 lbs. [113.4kg]seal force against the adjacent wall for
49 optimum sound control. The jamb activator shall be located approximately 45"
50 [1143] from the floor in the panel face and be accessed from either side of the panel.
51 The jamb is equipped with a mechanical rack and pinion gear drive mechanism and
52 shall extend 4"-6"[100-152]by turning the removable operating handle.
53
54
55 PART 3-EXECUTION
56
57 3.1 INSTALLATION
Project No.Fellowship 1314 10650-2
I
1
2 A. Preparation of opening shall be by General Contractor.
3
4 B. Installation. The complete installation of the operable wall system shall be by an
5 authorized factory-trained installer and be in strict accordance with the approved shop
6 drawings and manufacturer's standard printed specifications,instructions,and
7 recommendations and in accordance with ASTM E-557-77.
8
9 C. Cleaning
' 10 01 All track and panel surfaces shall be wiped clean and free of handprints,
11 grease,and soil.
12 02 Cartoning and other installation debris shall be removed from the job site.
13
' 14 D. Training
15 01 Installer shall demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to
16 owner's representative.
17 02 Owners manuals shall be provided in Close-Out Documentation.
18
19
20
21
22 END OF SECTION
rt
i
IN
41,
Project No.Fellowship 1314 10650-3
0
1 SECTION 10800
2
3 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
7
8 PART 1 -GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SCOPE:
15
16 A. Furnish and install items specified.
17
18
19 1.3 SUBMITTALS
20
21 A. Comply with Section 01300.
22
23 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, material and finish. Show locations, installation
24 procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, fasteners, clearances, and mounting
25 heights.
26
27 C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions.
28
29 D. Operation and Maintenance Instructions:
30 01 Provide printed or written instructions for operation and maintenance of units
31 specified.
32
33 1.4 MINIMUM COMPLIANCE STANDARDS
34
35 A. Comply with ANSI A117.1
36
37 PART 2-PRODUCTS
38
39 2.1 QUALITY STANDARDS
40
41 A. Design,finish and keying of items shall be the same.
42
43 B. Furnish items from one manufacturer only,unless otherwise specified or directed by
44 Architect.
45
46 2.2 MATERIALS
47
48 A. Stainless Steel:
49 01 Alloy:AISI,Type 302 or 304(18-08)ASTM A167
50 02 Finish:No.4 satin,unless otherwise specified
51 03 Thickness: US Stainless 22 gauge minimum
52
53 B. Aluminum:
54 01 Extruded:6463-T5 alloy,anodized
55 02 Cast: 356 or 356-T6 alloy
Project No.Fellowship 1314 10800- 1
i
1
I1
I
2 C. Chromium Plating:
3 01 Method: Over nickel
4 02 Standard:ASTM C456,Type SC 2
5
I
6
7 D. Brass:
01 Cast or forged
8 02 QQ-B-626C
9
I 10 E. Mirrors:(Framed)
11 01 Standard:Federal Standard A-A-3002.
12 02 Glass thickness: 1/4 inch minimum
I
13
14 03 Backing:Electrolytic cooper
04 Protection: Padding and filler strips
15 05 Frame:Type 304 stainless steel,satin finish.
16
I
17 2.3 MANUFACTURERS
18
19 A. American Specialties(Basis of Design)
I
20 B. Bobrick Dispensers,Inc.
21 C. GAMCO,General Accessory Mfg.Co.
22
23 PART 3-EXECUTION
I
24
25 3.1 MOUNTING LOCATIONS
26
27 A. Refer to drawings for mounting locations. When not shown, submit supplier's
28 recommendations for locations and mounting height before proceeding.
iik 29
30 B. Contractor shall be responsible for supplying all opening, blocking, and other
31 components necessary for installation of all toilet accessories.
32
33 C. Use approved theft-resistant type fasteners.
34
I
35 D. Comply with ADA requirements. Refer to the drawings.
36
37 PART 4-SCHEDULES
38
i 111 39 4.1 ITEM LIST
40
41 A. As a quality standard,model numbers shown are ASI Products.
i II 42 Washroom Equipment:
43 01 TA-1 -Soap Dispensers
44 a. Model No.:0347
45 b. Mounting: Surface with concealed fasteners.
46 c. Soap:Liquid
47
48 02 TA-2-Mirrors
49 a. Model No.: 0620 stainless steel framed mirror without shelf.
1 is
50 b. Mounting: Surface with concealed fasteners
51 c. Sizes: 18"X 30"UNO
52 03 TA-3—Paper Towel Dispenser
53 a. Model No.:0469,C-fold paper towel dispenser,stainless steel.
54 b. Mounting:Recessed with concealed fasteners
55
Project No.Fellowship 1314 10800-2
I
1 04 TA-4—Paper Towel Dispenser(Single Stall Restrooms)
2 a. Model No.:0462,C-fold paper towel dispenser,stainless steel.
3 b. Mounting:Recessed with concealed fasteners
4
5 05 TA-5-Toilet Paper Dispenser
6 a. Model No.:0030 dual roll stainless steel dispenser.
7 b. Mounting: Surface with concealed fasteners
8 c. Location: One at each toilet,whether indicated or not.
9
10 06 TA-6-Grab Bars—Toilet Compartments
11 a. Model No.: 3800 x 36 and x 42 in each 60"wide accessible stall
12 b. Model No.:3800 x 42(2)in each 36"wide accessible stall
13 c. Mounting: Surface with concealed fasteners and theft-proof covers
14 07 TA-7-Mop and Broom Holder
15 a. Model No.: 8215-4,four holders
16 b. Mounting: Surface
17 c. Location: One at each mop sink,whether indicated or not.
18 08 TA-8-Clothes Hooks
19 a. Model: 0714
20 b. Mounting: Surface(48"AFF)
21 c. Location:One at each toilet stall door,whether indicated or not.
22 09 TA-09—Baby Changing Station
23 a. Model:KB200
24 b. Mounting: Surface(comply with TAS)
25 c. Location:Reference plans
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33 END OF SECTION
34
35
Project No.Fellowship 1314 10800-3
1 SECTION 12510
2
3 HORIZONTAL BLINDS
4
5
6 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1,as indexed,apply to this Section.
R 7
8 PART 1-GENERAL
9
10 1.1 DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Refer to Instructions to Proposers for substitutions.
13
14 1.2 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Comply with Section 01300.
17
18 B. Product Data. Manufacturer's specifications and technical data.
19
20 C. Shop drawings. Show locations of blinds and typical mounting details.
21
22 D. Samples. Samples showing manufacturer's full range of colors.
23
24 PART 2-PRODUCTS
25
26 2.1 MATERIALS
27
28 A. Horizontal blinds shall consist of the following:
29 01 Steel Channel Headrail: 'U'-shaped, 1" high x 1-1/2" deep, fabricated from
30 .025 inch thick phosphate-treated steel with rolled edges at top,with a prime
31 coat of vinyl primer and finish coat of polyester baked enamel to match
32 bottom rail and slats.
33 02 Head Channel Hardware: Metal hardware shall be electroplated.Provide lift
34 cords and braided ladders.
35 03 Enclosed Metal Bottom Rail: Tubular shape, .030 inch thick phosphate-
36 treated steel with prime coat of vinyl primer and finish coat of polyester
37 baked enamel matching headrail and slat color.
38 04 Slats: Slats shall be virgin aluminum alloyed for maximum strength,
39 flexibility and resistance to internal and external corrosion. Slats shall be
40 nominal 1 inch wide. Slats shall have a pre-coating treatment to bond the
41 polyester baked enamel finished coating. Total coating thickness shall be .8
42 mil.
43 05 Tilter: Wand-type shall be operated by a length of transparent extruded
44 plastic rod with a multi-sided cross-section measuring approximately 3/8 inch
45 across points for comfortable grip.Plastic wand shall be easily detachable by
46 means of a wand link and sliding crystal sleeve. Tilter shall be snap-fitted to
47 headrail using no rivets or metal cleats.
48 06 Braided Ladders:
49 a. Distance between end ladder and end of slats shall not exceed 6
50 inches.
51 b. Distance between ladders shall not exceed 22 inches.
52 c. Material shall be polyester yarn. Vertical component shall be not
53 less than.045 inch dia.nor greater than.066 inch diameter
54 07 Cord lock and tilter operation locations: Tilter at left, cord lock at right
55 (standard).
56 08 Installation brackets: End support, hinged cover brackets .042 inch thick
57 treated steel with prime coat of epoxy primer and finish coat of polyester
58 baked enamel in color to match headrail. Brackets shall be marked left and
59 right to facilitate installation and shall have a 1-1/4 inches extra-wide top to
60 accommodate power screwdriver.
61 09 Intermediate support brackets: Brackets shall be furnished for blinds over 60
62 inches wide. Maximum spacing for intermediate support brackets shall be 48
63 inches.
Project No.Fellowship 1314 12510- 1
.. _. _.. .. :err
110
1 10 Install valance brackets and double blade stacked slats at top of all blinds.
2
3 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
4
5 01 Levolor Riviera Blinds
6 02 Bali Classics Custom Mini Blinds
7 03 Hunter Douglas
8
9 PART 3-EXECUTION
10
11 3.1 INSTALLATION
12
13 A. Install blinds at locations scheduled or noted on the drawings in accordance with
14 manufacturer's installation procedures,except as otherwise specified herein.
15
16 B. Install intermediate support brackets and extension brackets as needed to prevent
17 deflection in headrail.
18
19 C. Inside mount blinds with adequate clearance to permit smooth operation of blinds and
20 any sash operators. Hold blinds 1/4 inch clear from each side of window opening
21 unless other clearance is indicated.
22
23 D. Set tilt and locking controls. Demonstrate blinds to be in smooth uniform working
24 order.
25
26
27 END OF SECTION
28
i
Project No.Fellowship 1314 12510-2